7650 SM PDF

(A175/A176/A177)
FT7650/7660/7670
SERVICE MANUAL
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or certified
by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical
Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY

1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the paper tray unit are
supplied with electrical voltage even if the main switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers
off or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from
electrified or mechanically driven components.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot
while the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those
components with your bare hands.
6.The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too heard may
cause it to drop onto the floor. While moving the copier, push the table.
7. When the main switch is tuned on, the machine will suddenly start
turning to perform the developer initialization. Keep hans away from any
mechanical and electrical components during this period.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified
intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your
eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove
with eye drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get
medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course
on those models.
CAUTION
2. The RAM board on the main control board has a lithium battery
which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the RAM board
only with an identical one. The manufacturer recommends
replacing the entire RAM board. Do not recharge or burn this
battery. Used RAM board must be handled in accordance with
local regulations.
SM i A175/A176/A177
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL
1. Do not incinerate the toner cartridge or the used toner. Toner dust may
ignite suddenly when exposed to open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductor according
to local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used RAM boards in order to dispose of them later, do not
put more than 100 RAM boards per sealed box. Storing larger numbers
or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat
build-up.
A175/A176/A177 ii SM
SECTION 1
OVERALL MACHINE
INFORMATION
1. SPECIFICATION
Configuration: Console
Overall Machine
Information
Copy Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Toner Supply Control: Fuzzy Control
Photoconductor: OPC drum
Originals: Sheet/Book
Original Size: Maximum A3/11" x 17"
Original Alignment: Left rear corner
Copy Paper Size: Maximum A3/11" x 17"
Minimum A5/51/2" x 81/2" (Tray)
B5/81/2" x 11" (1.5 k LCT)
A6/51/2" x 81/2" (By-pass)
Duplex Copying: Maximum A3/11" x 17"
Minimum A5/51/2" x 81/2" (sideways)
Copy Paper Weight: Paper tray: 52 ~ 128 g/m2, 14 ~ 34 lb
Bypass feed table: 52 ~ 157 g/m2, 14 ~ 42 lb
Duplex copying: 64 ~ 104 g/m2, 17 ~ 24 lb
Reproduction Ratios: 4 Enlargement and 6 Reduction
A4/A3 Version LT/LDG Version

200% 200%
141% 155%
Enlargement
122% 129%
115% 121%
Full Size 100% 100%
93% 93%
82% 85%
75% 77%
Reduction
71% 74%
65% 65%
50% 50%
SM 1-1 A175/A176/A177
Power Source: 115 V, 60 Hz, more than 20 A (for N.A)
220 ~ 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz, more than 10 A (for
Europe and Asia)
Power Consumption: A175 copier
Copier only Full system*

Warm-up 1.20 kVA 1.22 kVA
Stand-by 0.22 kVA 0.24 kVA
Copying 1.40 kVA 1.40 kVA
Maximum 1.70 kVA 1.75 kVA
A176 copiers

Stand-by 0.22 KVA 0.24 kVA
A177 copiers

Stand-by 0.22 kVA 0.24 kVA
*Full System:
• Mainframe with dual job feeder, floor type
sorter stapler and 3,500-sheet large capacity
tray
• Mainframe with recirculating document
handler, finisher and 3,500-sheet large
capacity tray
A175/A176/A177 1-2 SM
Noise Emission: Sound Pressure Level:
The measurements are made according to
ISO7779
Overall Machine
Information
A175 copier
Sound pressure level (The measurements are made according to ISO 7779 at
the operator position.)
Copier only
Stand-by less than 34 dB (A)
Copying less than 57 dB (A) (average)
Sound power level (The measurements are made according to ISO 7779.)
Copier only
A176 copiers
Copier only
Copier only
A177 copiers
Copier only
Copier only
SM 1-3 A175/A176/A177
Dimensions:
Width Depth Height
Copier only 690 mm 690 mm 980 mm
27.2" 27.2" 38.6"
Copier with dual job feeder, sorter stapler, and 1,659 mm 690 mm 1,116 mm
3,500-sheet large capacity tray 65.4" 27.2 mm" 43.9"
Copier with dual job feeder, sorter stapler with 1,659 mm 690 mm 1,113 mm
punch, and 3,500-sheet large capacity tray 65.4" 27.2" 43.9
Copier with recirculating document handler, 1,764 mm 690 mm 1,112 mm
finisher, and 3,500-sheet large capacity tray 65.9" 27.2" 43.8"
Weight: Copier only: (Without the optional platen cover

= Approximately 2 kg)
A175 copier: Approximately 161 kg
A176/A177 copiers: Approximately 164 kg
A191/A192 copiers: Approximately 167 kg
Zoom: From 50% to 200% in 1% steps

Copying Speed: A4/LT (sideways) A3/DLT B4/LG
51 (A4 others)
A175 copier 50 (A4/in France) 26 32
50 (LT)
A176 copiers 60 31 38
A177 copiers 70 36 44
Warm-up Time: Less than 5 minutes (20°C) (A175 copier)

Less than 5.5 minutes (20°C) (A176/A177
copiers)
First Copy Time: 3.1 seconds (A175 copier)

(A4/81/2: x 11" sideways 2.6 seconds (A176/A177 copiers)
from the 1st feed station)
Copy Number Input: Number keys, 1 to 999 (count up or count down)

Manual Image Density 7 steps
Selection:
Automatic Reset: 1 minute standard setting; can also be set from
1 second to 999 seconds or no auto reset.
A175/A176/A177 1-4 SM
Copy Paper Capacity: • By-pass feed table: approximately 50 sheets
• Paper tray: approximately 550 sheets
• Tandem tray: approximately 500 sheets
Overall Machine
Information
• Large capacity tray: approximately 1500
sheets
Toner Replenishment: 1,100 g/cartridge, Yield 38K/cartridge 6% original

Developer Replenishment: Black only, 1Kg/Bag. Yield 120K/Bag
Optional Equipment: • Platen cover (A528-04)
• Dual job feeder (A610)
• Recirculating document handler (A607)
• 20 bin sorter stapler (Floor type) (A606-17)
• Finisher (A608)
• 3500-sheet Large capacity tray (A609)
• Receiving Tray (A446-05)
• Key Counter Bracket D (A509-03)
• 20 bin sorter stapler (Floor type) with punch
(A606-57),
• Editing sheet (spare part)
SM 1-5 A175/A176/A177
2. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
2.1 COPIER OVERVIEW
There are three types of mainframe.
FT7650 (A175) copier

Four 550-sheet paper trays
Optional 3,500-sheet large capacity
tray
50
550
(3,500)
550
550
550
FT7660/7670 (A176/A177) copiers

Tandem paper tray
(including two 500-sheet paper tray)
One 550-sheet paper tray
1,500-sheet built-in large capacity
tray
Optional 3,500-sheet large capacity
tray
50
500 x 2 or 500
(3,500)
550
1,500
A175/A176/A177 1-6 SM
2.2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
DJF version
Overall Machine
Mainframe type FT7650/7660/7670 (A175/A176/A177) with dual job feeder
Information
and floor type sorter stapler. The mainframe in the illustration below is the
FT7660.
Dual job feeder (DF62)
Floor type 3,500-sheets

sorter stapler large capacity
(ST28) or tray (RT34)
Floor type
sorter stapler
with punch
(ST28P)
RDH version
The mainframe FT7650/7660/7670 (A175/A176/A177) with recirculating
document handler and finisher. The mainframe in the illustration below is the
FT7660.
Recirculating document handler (DH500)
Finisher
(SR900) 3,500-sheets
large capacity
tray (RT34)
SM 1-7 A175/A176/A177
3. COPY PROCESS AROUND THE DRUM
11 2 1 3 4 5
10
7
8
1. OPC DRUM
The organic photo conductive (OPC) drum (100 mm diameter) has high
resistance in the dark and low resistance under light.
2. DRUM CHARGE
In the dark, the charge corona unit gives a uniform negative charge to the
OPC drum. The charge remains on the surface of the drum. The amount of
negative charge on the drum is proportional to the negative grid bias voltage
applied to the grid plate on the charge corona unit.
3. EXPOSURE
An image of the original is reflected to the OPC drum surface via the optics
section. The charge on the drum surface is dissipated in direct proportion to
the intensity of the reflected light, thus producing an electrical latent image
on the drum surface.
The amount of charge remaining as a latent image on the drum depends on
the exposure lamp intensity controlled by the exposure lamp voltage.
4. ERASE
The erase lamp illuminates the areas of the charged drum surface that will
not be used for the copy image. The resistance of drum in the illuminated
areas drops and the charge on those areas dissipates.
5. DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR
The drum potential sensor detects the electric potential on the drum to
compensate image processing elements.
A175/A176/A177 1-8 SM
6. DEVELOPMENT
Positively charged toner is attracted to the negatively charged areas of the
drum, thus developing the latent image. (The positive triboelectric charge of
Overall Machine
the toner is caused by friction between the carrier and toner particles.)
Information
The development bias voltage applied to the development roller shaft
controls two things:
1) The threshold level if toner is attracted to the drum or toner remains on

the development roller.
2) The amount of toner to be attracted to the drum.
The higher the negative development bias voltage is, the less toner is
attracted to the drum surface.
7. PRE-TRANSFER LAMP (PTL)
The PTL illuminates the drum to remove almost all the negative charge from
the exposed areas of the drum. This makes image transfer easier.
8. IMAGE TRANSFER
Paper is fed to the drum surface at the proper timing so as to align the copy
paper and the developed image on the drum surface. Then, a negative
charge is applied to the reverse side of the copy paper by the transfer belt,
producing an electrical force which pulls the toner particles from the drum
surface onto the copy paper. At the same time, the copy paper is electrically
attracted to the transfer belt.
9. PAPER SEPARATION
Paper separates from the OPC drum by the electrical attraction between the
paper and the transfer belt. The pick-off pawls help to separate the paper
from the drum.
10. CLEANING
The cleaning brush removes toner remaining on the drum after image
transfer and the cleaning blade scrapes off all the remaining toner.
11. QUENCHING
Light from the quenching lamp electrically neutralizes the charge potential of
the drum surface.
SM 1-9 A175/A176/A177
4. MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2 12
13
14
1
15
39 16
38 17
18
37 19
20
36 21
22
23
24
35
25
26
27
40
28
34 33 32 31 30 29
A175/A176/A177 1-10 SM
Overall Machine
Information
1. 3rd Mirror 22. Registration Rollers
2. 2nd Mirror 23. Transfer Belt
3. 1st Mirror 24. Vertical Transport Rollers
4. Exposure Lamp 25. Tandem Tray
550-sheet Tray
5. Lens
26. Universal Tray
6. Cleaning Brush
27. 1500-sheet LCT
7. Cleaning Blade 550-sheet Tray
8. Quenching Lamp 28. Toner Collection Bottle
9. Charge Corona Unit 29. Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade
10. OPC Drum 30. Hot Roller
11. 6th Mirror 31. Pressure Roller
12. 4th Mirror 32. Jogger Fences
13. 5th Mirror 33. Duplex Positioning Roller
14. Erase Unit 34. Duplex Pick-up Roller
15. Drum Potential Sensor 35. Duplex Feed Roller
16. Toner Hopper 36. Separation Belt
17. Development Unit 37. Junction Gate
18. Pre-Transfer Lamp 38. Exit Rollers
19. Pick-up Roller 39. Optics Cooling Fan
20. Feed Roller 40. 550-sheet Tray
21. Separation Roller
SM 1-11 A175/A176/A177
5. DRIVE LAYOUT
9 ❶
10 1 ❷
11
❾
2
❽ 3
4
5
❼ ❸
6
❻
8 ❹
7
❶ Main Motor 1. OPC Drum

❷ Scanner Drive Motor 2. Scanner Unit
❸ Fusing/Duplex Drive Motor 3. Transfer Belt Unit
❹ Paper Feed Motor 4. Paper Exit Unit
❺ Toner Collection Motor 5. Fusing Unit
❻ Registration Clutch 6. Duplex Unit
❼ By-Pass Feed Motor 7. Paper Trays
❽ BY-Pass Feed Clutch 8. Paper Feed Units
❾ Development Drive Motor 9. Toner Hopper

10. Development Unit
11. Cleaning Unit
A175/A176/A177 1-12 SM
6. PAPER PATH
6.1 STANDARD COPYING
Overall Machine
Information
[D]
[F]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[E]
[A]
Paper feed begins from the exterior LCT, by-pass feed table or paper feed
stations in the paper tray unit. The copy paper then follows one of two paths
inside the copier. The path followed depends on which mode the operator
has selected. For copy processing, all sheets follow the same paths from the
paper feed mechanism [A] through the registration rollers [B], transfer belt
[C], and fusing unit [D]. After that, copies are delivered to the sorter bins [E]
or proof tray [F], however, 2 sided copies are diverted for further processing.
SM 1-13 A175/A176/A177
6.2 MULTIPLE 2-SIDED COPYING
a. Front Side
[D]
[A] [C]
[B]
b. Rear Side
In this mode the junction gate [A] directs sheets exiting the fusing unit to the
duplex tray entrance. After that, all sheets follow the path through the duplex
entrance rollers [B].
After all front side copying is completed, the sheets on the duplex tray are
fed in order from the bottom to the top and follow the path through the duplex
feed mechanism and vertical transport rollers [C] to the registration rollers
[D]. After that, these sheets follow the same path as standard copying from
the registration rollers to the sorter.
A175/A176/A177 1-14 SM
7. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the attached
Overall Machine
Point to Point for symbols and index numbers.
Information
Symbol Name Function Index No.
Motors
Scanner Drive Drives the 1st and 2nd scanners (dc
M1 42
servo).
Exhaust Fan Removes the heat from around the
M2 43
fusing unit.
M3 Main Drives the main unit components. 44
M4 Development Drive Drives the development unit. 45
M5 By-pass Feed Drives the by-pass feed rollers. 46
M6 3rd Scanner Drive Drives the 3rd scanner (dc stepper) 47
Toner Bottle Drive Rotates the toner bottle to supply
M7 48
toner to the toner hopper.
Charge Wire Cleaner Drives the main charge wire cleaner
M8 49
Drive to clean the charge wire.
Jogger Drives the jogger fences to square the
M9 paper stack in the duplex tray (dc 50
stepper).
M10 Lens Horizontal Drive Shifts the lens horizontal position. 51
M11 Lens Vertical Drive Shifts the lens vertical position. 52
M12 Optic Cooling Fan Removes heat from the optics unit. 53
Fusing/Duplex Drive Drives the fusing unit, the duplex unit,
M13 54
and the paper exit rollers.
Paper Feed Drives all feed and transport rollers in
M14 90
the paper tray unit.
1st Lift Raises the bottom plate in the 1st
M15 91
paper tray.
2nd Lift Raises the bottom plate in the 2nd
M16 92
paper tray.
Toner Collection Transports the collected toner to the
M17 93
toner collection bottle.
3rd Lift Raises the bottom plate in the 3rd
M18 94
(4 Tray version only) paper tray.
Side Fence Drive Opens and closes the front and the
M19 95
(Tandem version only) rear side fences of the tandem tray.
Rear Fence Drive Moves the papers stacked in the left
M20 (Tandem version only) tandem tray to the right tandem tray. 96
LCT Motor Lifts and lowers the LCT bottom plate

(1,500 Tray version only) to bring paper to the feed position and
M21 127
allow loading of the paper.
SM 1-15 A175/A176/A177
AC Drive Cooling Fan Remove heat from around the AC
M22 (60/70 CPM version only) drive unit. 141
Optic Cooling Fan-2 Remove heat from the optic unit.

M23 (60/70 CPM version only) 142
Duplex Cooling Fan Cools the paper on the duplex tray to

M24 *143A, B
reduce the heat around the drum.
Drum Cooling Fan Cools the drum unit to remove the
M25 144
(70 CPM version only) heat from the duplex tray.
4th Lift Raises the bottom plate in the 4th
M26 151
(4 Tray version only) paper tray.
* (A: 60/70 CPM, B: 50/51 CPM)
Magnetic Clutches
Toner Supply Turns the toner supply roller to supply
MC1 57
toner to the development unit.
MC2 Registration Drives the registration rollers. 58
By-pass Feed Starts paper feed from the by-pass
MC3 60
feed table.
Duplex Transport Drives the duplex transport rollers to
MC4 transport the paper to the vertical 64
transport rollers.
Duplex Feed Starts paper feed from the duplex tray
MC5 65
to the duplex transport rollers.
1st Feed Starts paper feed from the 1st feed
MC6 99
tray.
2nd Feed Starts paper feed from the 2nd feed
MC7 101
tray.
3rd Feed Starts paper feed from the 3rd feed
MC8 104
tray.
4th Feed Starts paper feed from the 4th feed
MC9 152
(4 Tray version only) tray.
Switches
By-pass Table Detects if the by-pass feed table is
SW1 25
open or closed.
Front Door Safety Cuts the ac power line and detects if
SW2 29
the front door is open or not.
1st Tray Set Detects if the 1st tray is set or not.
SW3 (Non-Tandem version 66
only)
2nd Paper Size Determines what size paper is in the
SW4 67
2nd (universal) paper tray.
Toner Overflow Detects when the toner collection
SW5 75
bottle is full.
A175/A176/A177 1-16 SM
Toner Collection Bottle Detects if the toner collection bottle is
SW6 77
Set set or not.
Overall Machine
Information
SW7 Lower Front Door Safety Detects if the front door is open or not. 83
3rd Tray Set Detects if the 3rd tray is set or not.
SW8 84
(4 Tray version only)
SW9 Main Provides power to the copier 122
Tray Down Lowers the LCT bottom plate.
SW10 126
4th Tray Set Detects if the 4th tray is set or not.
SW11 149
Solenoids
Junction Gate Moves the junction gate to direct
SOL1 copies to the duplex tray or to the 55
paper exit.
Duplex Positioning Controls the up-down movement of
SOL2 56
the positioning roller.
By-pass Pick-up Controls the up-down movement of
SOL3 59
the pick-up roller for by-pass feed.
Guide Plate Opens the guide plate when a paper
SOL4 61
misfeed occurs around this area.
Transfer Belt Positioning Controls the up-down movement of
SOL5 62
the transfer belt unit.
Pressure Arm Presses the paper on the duplex tray
SOL6 63
against the duplex feed rollers.
Tandem Lock Locks the left tandem feed tray and
SOL7 separates the right and left tandem 97
trays.
1st Pick-up Controls the up-down movement of
SOL8 the pick-up roller in the 1st feed 98
station.
1st Separation Roller Controls the up-down movement of
the separation roller in the 1st feed
SOL9 100
station.
2nd Pick-up Controls the up-down movement of

the pick-up roller in the 2nd feed
SOL10 102
station.
2nd Separation Roller Controls the up-down movement of

the separation roller in the 2nd feed
SOL11 103
station.
3rd Pick-up Controls the up-down movement of

the pick-up roller in the 3rd feed
SOL12 105
station.
SM 1-17 A175/A176/A177
3rd Separation Roller Controls the up-down movement of
SOL13 the separation roller in the 3rd feed 106
station.
4th Pick-up Controls the up-down movement of
SOL14 (4 Tray version only) the pick-up roller in the 4th feed 153
station.
4th Separation Roller Controls the up-down movement of
SOL15 (4 Tray version only) the separation roller in the 4th feed 154
station.
Sensors
Scanner HP Informs the CPU when the 1st and
S1 2nd scanners are at the home 1
position.
Platen Cover Position-1 Informs the CPU that the platen cover
S2 is in the up or down position (related 2
to APS/ARE function).
Platen Cover Position-2 Informs the CPU that the platen cover
is in the up or down position to detect
S3 3
if the original has been removed or
not.
Lens Vertical HP Informs the CPU that the lens is at the
S4 4
full-size position.
Lens Horizontal HP Informs the CPU that the lens is at the
S5 5
horizontal home position.
3rd Scanner HP Informs the CPU when the 3rd
S6 6
scanner is at the home position.
By-Pass Paper End Informs the CPU that there is no
S7 7
paper in the by-pass feed table.
Guide Plate Position Informs the CPU if the registration
S8 8
guide plate is closed or not.
Jogger HP Detects if the duplex jogger fences
S9 9
are at the home position or not.
Vertical Transport Detects the leading edge of the paper
S10 to determine the paper feed timing of 10
the next sheet.
Duplex Exit Detects the leading edge of the paper
S11 to determine the duplex transport 11
clutch on timing.
Duplex Entrance Sensor Detects the leading edge of the paper
S12 to determine the duplex feed clutch 12
off timing.
S13 Duplex Paper End Detects paper in the duplex tray. 13
Duplex Transport Detects the leading edge of the paper
to control the jogger motor and the
S14 14
positioning solenoid on timing.
Exit Detects misfeeds.

S15 15
A175/A176/A177 1-18 SM
S16 Fusing Exit Detects misfeeds. 16
Paper Guide Detects misfeeds.
Overall Machine
S17 17
Information
Auto Image Density Senses the background density of the
S18 20
original.
S19 Original Length-1 Detects original length. 21
S20 Original Length-2 Detects original length. 22
S21 Original Width Detects original width. 23
By-Pass Paper Size Informs the CPU what size paper is in
S22 26
the by-pass feed table.
Toner Density Senses the amount of toner in the
S23 27
black developer.
Registration Detects misfeeds and controls
S24 28
registration clutch off-on timing.
S25 Toner Near End Detects toner end condition. 30
Auto-Response Returns the display from the screen
S26 34
saver.
S27 Drum Potential Detects the drum surface potential. 39
Image Density Detects the density of the ID sensor
S28 41
pattern on the drum.
1st Paper End Informs the CPU when the 1st
S29 68
cassette runs out of paper.
1st Paper Near End Informs the CPU when the 1st
S30 69
cassette is in near end condition.
1st Paper Feed Controls the 1st paper feed clutch
S31 off/on timing and the 1st pick-up 70
solenoid off timing.
2nd Paper Near End Informs the CPU when the 2nd
S32 71
cassette is in near end condition.
1st Lift Detects the correct feed height of the
S33 72
1st cassette.
2nd Paper End Informs the CPU when the 2nd
S34 73
Toner Collection Motor Detects the toner collection motor
S35 74
operation.
2nd Lift Detects the correct feed height of the
S36 76
2nd cassette.
3rd Lift Detects the correct feed height of the
S37 3rd cassette. 78
3rd Paper Near End Informs the CPU when the 3rd
S38 (4 Tray version only) cassette is in near end condition. 79
3rd Paper End Informs the CPU when the 3rd

S39 80
SM 1-19 A175/A176/A177
3rd Paper Feed Controls the 3rd paper feed clutch
off/on timing and the 3rd pick-up
S40 81
2nd Paper Feed Controls the 2nd paper feed clutch

S41 off/on timing and the 2nd pick-up 82
Base Plate Down Detects when the bottom plate is
S42 (Tandem version only) completely lowered to stop the 1st lift 85
motor.
Side Fence Positioning Informs the CPU when the tandem
S43 86
(Tandem version only) tray side fences are open.
Rear Fence Return Informs the CPU when the tandem
S44 87
(Tandem version only) tray rear fence is in the return position.
Rear Fence HP Informs the CPU when the tandem
S45 88
(Tandem version only) tray rear fence is in the home position.
Left Tandem Paper End Informs the CPU when the left
S46 89
(Tandem version only) tandem tray runs out of paper.
LCT Near End Detects the paper near end condition.
S47 123
(1,500 Tray version only)
Tray Down Detects when the tray is completely
S48 124
(1,500 Tray version only) lowered to stop the LCT motor.
Tray Paper Set Informs the CPU when the paper is
S49 125
(1,500 Tray version only) set on the LCT bottom tray.
Side Fence Close Detects whether the side fence close
S50 150
(Tandem version only) or not.
4th Lift Detects the correct feed height of the
S51 145
(4 Tray version only) 4th cassette.
4th Paper Near End Informs the CPU when the 4th
S52 146
(4 Tray version only) cassette is in near end condition.
4th Paper End Informs the CPU when the 4th
S53 147
(4 Tray version only) cassette runs out of paper.
4th Paper Feed Controls the 4th paper feed clutch
S54 (4 Tray version only) off/on timing and the 4th pick-up 148
PCBs
AC Drive Provides AC power to the exposure
PCB1 108
lamp and fusing lamp.
PCB2 Main Controls all machine functions. 109
PCB3 Optic Control Controls all optics components. 110
Development Bias Controls the output of development
PCB4 Control bias. 111
Paper Feed Control Controls all components in the paper

PCB5 bank. 112
A175/A176/A177 1-20 SM
DC Power Supply Unit Provides DC power.
PCB6 113
Overall Machine
Information
PCB7 Guidance Controls the guidance display. 120
Operation Panel Controls the LED matrix, and
PCB8 121
monitors the key matrix.
Lamps
Exposure Applies high intensity light to the
L1 18
original for exposure.
L2 Fusing Provides heat to the hot roller. 32
Quenching Neutralizes any charge remaining on
L3 37
the drum surface after cleaning.
Erase Discharges the drum outside the
L4 38
image area.
Pre-transfer Reduces the charge on the drum
L5 40
surface before transfer.
Power Packs
Transfer Provides high voltage for the transfer
PP1 belt and controls the transfer belt 117
positioning solenoid.
Charge Provides high voltage for the charge
corona wires, and the grid plate.
PP2 119
Controls QL, PTL, and charge wire
cleaner motor functions.
Others
Optics Thermoswitch Opens the exposure lamp circuit if the
TS1 19
optics unit overheats.
Fusing Thermofuse Opens the fusing lamp circuit if the
TF1 33
fusing unit overheats.
Fusing Thermistor Senses the temperature of the hot
TH1 24
roller.
Optics Thermistor Monitors the temperature of the optics
TH2 36
cavity.
Drum Thermistor Monitors the temperature of the OPC
TH3 (Located on the ID drum. 41
Sensor Ass’y)
Transfer Turns on when the main switch is off
H1 Anti-Condensation to prevent moisture from forming on 31
the transfer belt.
Optics Anti-Condensation Turns on when the main switch is off
H2 to prevent moisture from forming on 35
the optics.
Main Power Relay Controls main power.
RA1 107
SM 1-21 A175/A176/A177
Total Counter Keeps track of the total number of
CO1 114
copies made.
NF1 Noise Filter Removes electrical noise. 115
Circuit Breaker Provides back-up high current
CB1 protection for the electrical 116
components.
Lightening Arrestor Removes current surges from the AC
LA1 118
input lines.
A175/A176/A177 1-22 SM
SECTION 2
DETAILED SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
1. PROCESS CONTROL
1.1 OVERVIEW
Original Scale
Image Density Control ADS Pattern

(Fuzzy Control)
Detailed Section
VD Pattern
Descriptions
Latent Image Control
VL Pattern
VD Pattern VL Pattern
Original Exposure Glass
Latent image Lamp Voltage

Control
Exposure Control
Charge Control Grid Voltage

Erase Lamp
QL Drum Potential Sensor
Toner Supply On time
Development. Bias
Drum Thermistor
TD Sensor
Paper
Image Density Control

Main PCB ID Sensor
(Fuzzy Control)
Toner Supply Control
This model uses two process control methods. One compensates for
variation in the drum potential (latent image control) and the other controls
the toner concentration and toner supply amount (image density control).
SM 2-1 A175/A176/A177
1.1.1 Latent Image Control
QL Charge Exposure
Black White Erase
Potential
Sensor
Vo
VD
VR
VL
Drum
The figure shows the changes of the drum potential during the copy process.
VO: The drum potential just after charging the drum.
VD (Dark Potential): The drum potential just after exposing the black
pattern (VD pattern)
VL (Light Potential): The drum potential just after exposing the white
pattern (VL pattern)
VR (Residual Voltage): The drum potential just after the exposure of the
erase lamp.
After long usage following installation or a PM, drum potential will gradually
increase due to the following factors:
Dirty optics or exposure lamp deterioration
Dirty charge corona casing and grid plate
Change of the drum sensitivity
In this copier, the change in drum potential is detected by the drum potential
sensor and the following items are controlled to maintain good copy quality.
The grid bias voltage
The exposure lamp voltage
The development bias voltage.
A drum thermistor detects the drum temperature and this data is also used to
control the above voltages. It is impossible to explain simply because it is
controlled by methods developed in our laboratories using an artificial neural
network.
A175/A176/A177 2-2 SM
1.1.2 Image Density Control
Image density is controlled by the following sensors:

Toner density sensor (TD sensor)
Image density sensor (ID sensor)
Data from the TD sensor is used to keep the toner concentration in the
developer at a constant level. However, the image on the OPC drum varies
Detailed Section
Descriptions
due to the variation of toner chargeability (influenced by the environment)
even if the toner concentration is constant. By the ID sensor compensation,
toner concentration is changed to keep the image density on the OPC drum
constant.
The following items are controlled to maintain a constant copy image density:
Toner supply clutch on time
Toner supply level data (VREF ) of the TD sensor
SM 2-3 A175/A176/A177
1.2 PROCESS CONTROL DATA INITIAL SETTING
The following flow chart shows all the steps that will be performed whenever
the machine is turned on while the hot roller temperature is below 100°C.
This initializes all the process control settings.
Main SW On (Fusing Temp. < 100°C)
Charge wire cleaning (if more than 5 k copies are made since last
cleaning)
Drum Potential Sensor Calibration
①
Drum Conditioning Start (Fusing Temp. = 180°C)
VSG Adjustment
Transfer belt voltage detection
VR Measurement
VD/VL/VR Correction
TD Sensor Detection
②
ID Sensor Detection/Correction
③ ADS Adjustment
① : See Latent Image Control section

(Page 2-5) for details.
② : See Image Density Control section
(Page 2-12) for details.
③ : See Optics section (Page 2-39) for details.
A175/A176/A177 2-4 SM
1.3 LATENT IMAGE CONTROL
1.3.1 Drum Potential Sensor Calibration
Case
[A] Sensor
Output
Detailed Section
Descriptions
Amp.
Drum
[B]
Main PCB
The drum potential sensor [A] is located just above the development unit.
The sensor has a detector which detects the strength of the electric field
from the electric potential on the drum. The output of the sensor depends on
the strength of the electric field.
Since the output of the sensor is affected by environmental conditions, such
as temperature and humidity, the sensor output is calibrated during process
control data initial setting. (Hot roller temperature is less than 100°C at main
switch turn on.)
The High Voltage Control PCB [B] has two relay contacts. Usually RA602
grounds the drum. However, during the initial setting, the main PCB turns
RA601 on and RA602 off and applies the voltage to the drum shaft.
By measuring the output of the drum potential sensor when –100 V and
–800 V are applied to the drum, the sensor output is calibrated automatically.
(The machine recognizes the relationship between actual drum potential and
the potential sensor output.) To prevent toner attraction during potential
sensor calibration an equivalent bias voltage (-100 amp -800) is applied to
the development rollers.
SM 2-5 A175/A176/A177
1.3.2 Drum Conditioning
When the fusing temperature reaches 180°C, the machine starts the drum
conditioning process. In this mode, the main motor, main charge corona,
erase lamp and development bias are activated for about 30 seconds and
drum sensitivity and residual voltage (VR) are stabilized, as in continuous
copy runs.
1.3.3 VSG Adjustment

During drum conditioning, the ID sensor checks the bare drum’s reflectivity
and calibrates the output of the ID sensor to 4 ± 0.2 V.
1.3.4 VR Measurement
[–V] VO
VD New Drum
Used Drum
Drum
Potential VL
VR
Dark Original Density Light
The figure above shows the relationship between the drum potential and the
original density. To get consistant copy quality throughout the drum’s life,
this relationship must be maintained.
Since this relationship tends to change to the one represented by the dotted
line by various factors, compensations are required. Factor causing these
changes can occur in the optics and charge sections and in drum sensitivity.
The residual voltage (VR) cannot be compensated even if the exposure lamp
voltage is increased. Therefore, the VR change has to be compensated by
other means.
After drum conditioning the main control board turns on the erase lamps.
Then the drum potential is checked by the potential sensor. This measured
drum potential is in fact VR. This VR is used as the standard for the VD and
VL corrections.
NOTE: In the figure above, the residual voltage (VR) for the new drum is 0
V. Actually, there is some residual voltage even on the new drum.
A175/A176/A177 2-6 SM
1.3.5 VD Correction
Exposure
VD Pattern
Glass
[–V]
Detailed Section
VD
Descriptions
VR
VD Compensated
Drum
Potential
–770
After many copies
New Drum
VR
The drum potential just after the black pattern (VD Pattern) is exposed (VD:
Dark Potential) tends to lower during drum life due to a decrease in the
drum’s capacity to carry a charge.
To check the actual VD, the first scanner moves to the home position and the
VD pattern (Black) mounted on the bottom of the exposure glass bracket, is
exposed on the drum.
The main control board measures VD through the drum potential sensor and
adjusts it to a target value by adjusting the grid bias voltage (VGRID).
On the other hand, there is a change of the drum residual voltage (VR), so
that the target VD voltage is compensated as follows:
Target VD Value: VD = VR + (–770)
The adjusted grid bias voltage (VGRID) is kept in memory until the next
process control data initial setting.
SM 2-7 A175/A176/A177
1.3.6 VL Correction
Exposure
[–V] Glass
VD Only VD
VL Pattern
Compensated
VR VD and VL
Drum VL Compensated
Potential
New Drum
–770 VR
–140
VR
Dirty optics and/or exposure lamp deterioration decreases the intensity of the
light that reaches the drum. In addition to this, the drum sensitivity also
changes during the drum’s life. These factors change the drum potential just
after white pattern exposure (VL : Light Potential).
To check the actual VL, the lens moves to the VL pattern check position. The
VL pattern (White) mounted on the bottom of the exposure glass bracket is
exposed on the drum.
The main control board measures VL through the drum potential sensor and
adjusts it to a target value by adjusting the exposure lamp voltage (VLAMP).
The residual voltage (VR) change also affects VL, so that VL’s target voltage
is compensated as follows:
Target VL Value: VL = VR + (–140)
The adjusted exposure lamp voltage (VLAMP) is stored in memory until the
next process control data initial setting.
A175/A176/A177 2-8 SM
1.3.7 VR Correction
[–V]
VD
VR
VL Development Bias (VBB)
Detailed Section
Descriptions
Drum
Potential
VD and VL Compensated
–770 VR New Drum
–140
VR
Potentials (VR, VD, VL) are monitored by the potential sensor. (This is done
only when the fusing temperature is less than 100°C after the machine is
turned on.)
During the check cycle, the VD and VL patterns are exposed and the drum
potential of the area exposed by each pattern is checked by the potential
sensor.
Compare the curve of the VD and VL compensated drum potential with the
curve of the new drum, they are parallel but the compensated potential is still
higher (VR) than the new drum potential. To prevent dirty backgrounds due
to increased residual potential, development bias (VBB) is applied as follows:
VBB= VR + (–220)
The adjusted development bias (VBB) is stored in memory until the next
process control initial setting.
SM 2-9 A175/A176/A177
1.3.8 Initial Setting Sequence
The following graph shows the sequence of events during process control
data initial setting.
for the purpose

of ADS sensor
correction
Exposure
Lamp
V800 VD New VD
V100 VL New VL
Potential VR New VR
Sensor
Output
1. Potential 2. VR’, VD’, VL’ 3. VD, VL 4. ID sensor
sensor potential correction pattern
potential
Latent Image Control
1. Potential sensor calibration

By measuring the output of the drum potential sensor when –100 V and
–800 V are applied to the drum, the sensor output (V100 and V800) is
calibrated automatically (See page 2-5 for details).
2. VR, VD, VL potential detection
After about 30 seconds of drum conditioning, VD and VL Patterns are
developed by using the previous grid bias voltage (VGRID) data and
exposure lamp voltage (VLAMP) data to detect the VR, VD, VL data.
The machine calculates the new VGRID and VLAMP data using the
detected VR, VD, VL data.
A175/A176/A177 2-10 SM
3. VD and VL corrections
Using the calculated VGRID and VLAMP data, VR, VD, and VL patterns are
developed again and the new VR, VD, and VL data are detected.
If both VD and VL data are within specifications, the new VGRID, VLAMP
and development bias (VBB) are determined based on the new VD, VL ,
and VR values.
Detailed Section
Specifications:
Descriptions
VD = –770 + VR ± 20 V
VL = –140 + VR ± 20 V
If VD is outside specifications, VGRID is shifted one step. Then the VD
pattern is measured again and VD is detected again. The same is done for
VL and VLAMP.
The above process continues until both VD and VL fall within specifications.
The graph on the previous page shows the example when only VL was
outside specifications at the first VL detection and came within specifications
after one VL correction (VLAMP is changed 0.5V/step , VGRID is changed
20V/step).
If V100 or V800 at drum potential sensor calibration is outside specifications
or if VD or VL do not fall within specifications after VGRID or VLAMP are
shifted to the maximum or minimum level, the machine stops VD or VL
correction and uses the previous VGRID and VLAMP values during copying.
In this case, nothing is indicated on the machine but the SC counter is
incremented.
Related SC codes (see troubleshooting section for details):
Code Condition
361 Incomplete drum potential sensor calibration
364 Abnormal VD detection
365 Abnormal VL detection
366 VR abnormal
Development bias is also decided by using VR as follows.

VBB = VR + (–220)
4. ID sensor pattern potential detection
This is performed to determine ID Sensor Bias Voltage. The details are
explained in the development control section (see page 2-16).
SM 2-11 A175/A176/A177
1.4 IMAGE DENSITY CONTROL
1.4.1 Toner Density Sensor
A: VOUT (Gain data) is high.

B: VOUT is within the specification.
C: VOUT (Gain data) is low.
Main PCB
VIN VOUT
AGC
TD
VD (12 V)
Gain Sensor
VOUT = VIN x GND
256
Gain
= 12 x
256 Sensor
Output
Developer consists of carrier particles (iron) and toner particles (resin and
carbon). Inside the development unit, developer passes through a magnetic
field created by coils inside the toner density sensor. When the toner
concentration changes, the voltage output by the sensor changes
accordingly.
<Toner Density Sensor Initial Setting>

When new developer with the standard toner concentration (2.0% by weight,
20 g of toner in 1000 g of developer) is installed, developer initial setting
must be performed by using SP mode ( SP Adjustment - PAGE 1).
During this setting, the output voltage (VOUT) from the auto gain control
circuit (AGC) on the main control board PCB varies to change the output
voltage from the toner density (TD) sensor. This is done by changing the
gain data, see below.
Gain Data Gain Data
VOUT = VIN x = 12 x
256 256
If the data is high, VOUT becomes high, and the sensor output voltage
becomes high. As a result, the sensor characteristic becomes as illustrated
by curve A. If the data is low, VOUT becomes low, and the sensor output
voltage becomes low. As a result, the sensor characteristic shifts as
illustrated by curve C.
A175/A176/A177 2-12 SM
By selecting the proper gain data, the sensor output is set within the targeted
control level (VREF, VREF = 2.5 ± 0.1 V). Now, the sensor characteristic is
illustrated by curve B and the TD sensor initial setting is completed.
The selected gain data is stored in memory, and VOUT from the auto gain
control circuit stays constant during the toner sensor detection cycle.
<Toner Supply Criteria>
Detailed Section
At every copy cycle, toner density in the developer is detected once. The
Descriptions
sensor output voltage (VTD) during the detection cycle is compared with the
toner supply level voltage (VREF).
VTD ≥ VREF: Add more toner

VTD < VREF: Add little toner
SM 2-13 A175/A176/A177
<Toner Supply Clutch on Time>
To stabilize toner concentration, toner supply amount (toner supply clutch on
time) is controlled by referring to VREF and VTD.
The toner supply amount is calculated at every copy. The toner supply
amount is determined by using the following factors.
① VREF – VTD
② VREF – VTD’ (VTD’ = VTD of the previous copy cycle)
By referring to these factors, the machine recognizes the difference between

the current toner concentration (VTD) and the target toner concentration
(VREF). The machine also understands how much toner concentration has
changed and predicts how much the toner supply amount will probably
change.
By changing the toner supply amount precisely, toner concentration (image
density) is kept at a constant level.
Since the toner supply clutch on time updating is under fuzzy control, the
relation among VTD, VTD’, VREF cannot be expressed by a simple algebraic
formula.
<VREF Correction>
The image on the OPC drum changes due to variation of toner chargeability
(influenced by the environment) even if the toner concentration is constant.
The image density sensor (ID sensor) directly checks the image on the OPC
drum and shifts VREF data (under fuzzy control) to keep the image on the
OPC drum constant, as explained in the next section.
NOTE: 1) Toner end condition is detected by the toner end sensor (see the
development section for details).
2) The toner supply clutch turns on at the intervals between each
copy process while image development is not being performed.
A175/A176/A177 2-14 SM
1.4.2 Image Density Sensor Detection
[C]
[B]
Drum
[A]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
bias
VSG and VSP are checked by the ID sensor [A]. The ID sensor is located
underneath the drum cleaning section.
There is no ID sensor pattern in the optics, however, a pattern image is
made on the OPC drum by the charge corona unit [B] and the erase lamp [C].
VSG is the ID sensor output when checking the erased drum surface.
VSP is the ID sensor output when checking the ID sensor pattern image.
To compensate for any variation in light intensity from the sensor LED, the
reflectivity of both the erased drum surface and the pattern on the drum are
checked.
V SP Detection VSP Detection VSP Detection
2nd Series 3rd Series

1st Series of of Copies of Copies
Copies (8 copies) (5 copies) (17 copies)
VSG V SG V SG VSG
Detection Detection Detection Detection
VSG is detected every time the machine starts copying.

During VSG detection, the development sleeve rollers do not rotate and no
development bias is applied.
VSP is detected after copying is completed if 10 or more copies have been
made since VSP was last detected. Since the transfer belt must be released
when checking VSP, a VSP check cannot be done during continuous copying.
SM 2-15 A175/A176/A177
–700 V
①
VP
① Potential
Sensor Detection
VP ②
② ID Sensor ③
Bias Level –300
VIDB = VP +300 (V)
4.0 V
③ ID Sensor VSP
Output
While developing the ID sensor pattern, ID sensor bias is applied. ID sensor

bias is determined during process control data initial setting as follows:
1. Apply charge while grid voltage is –700 V to create the ID sensor pattern.
2. Check the drum potential (VP) of the latent image created by the charge
with –700 V grid. This area is the ID sensor pattern.
3. Adjust the ID sensor bias (VIDB) so that it satisfies the following formula.
VIDB = VP – (–300) (V)
= VP + 300 (V)
4. Change the bias to the calculated VIDB and detect VSP. VSG (detected
during VSG adjustment sequence in the process control data initial
setting) and VSP are used to determine VREF data at process control
data initial setting.
VIDB is not changed until the next process control data initial setting is
done.
<VREF correction timing>

After the series of copies is completed in the case that 10 or more copies
have been made, VREF is updated by referring to the previous VREF (VREF ’),
VSG, VSP and the current TD sensor output (VTD).
Since this VREF data updating is under fuzzy control, the relationship among
VREF, VREF’, VSG, VSP and VTD cannot be expressed by a simple algebraic
formula.
VREF is updated not only in the above case. But also during developer initial
setting and during process control data initial setting.
A175/A176/A177 2-16 SM
1.4.3 Sensor Abnormal Conditions
a. ID sensor (VSG,VSP) abnormal
Whenever VSG falls under 2.5 V or VSP rises over 2.5 V, the CPU fixes the
VREF data and toner concentration is controlled only by using TD sensor
output. This is the detect mode of toner supply.
VSG and VSP are still detected as usual during abnormal conditions and if
output returns to normal levels (VSG ≥ 2.5 V, VSP ≤ 2.5 V), the CPU returns
Detailed Section
the toner concentration control to normal mode.
Descriptions
b. TD sensor (VTD) abnormal
Whenever VTD rises over 4.0 V or VTD falls under 0.5 V, the CPU shifts the
toner supply to the fixed supply mode. In this condition, the CPU never stops
the toner supply. The fixed toner supply amount can be changed in four
steps (4%, 7%, 11%, 14%) by using SP mode. The default fixed toner supply
amount is 4%.
VTD is still detected as usual during the abnormal condition and if its output
returns to a normal level, the CPU returns the toner concentration control to
normal mode.
c. Drum Potential Sensor abnormal
Whenever V100 rises over 0.7 V or V100 falls under 0.1 V or whenever V800
rises over 4.2 V or V800 falls under 2.7 V, the CPU also shifts the toner
supply to the fixed supply mode, as for a TD sensor (VTD) abnormal
condition.
Related SC codes. (See troubleshooting section of details.):
Code Condition
351 Abnormal VSG Detection (VSG > 4.2 V)
352 Incomplete TD Sensor Initial Setting
353 Abnormal VSP Detection (VSP > 2.5 V)
354 Abnormal VSG Detection (VSG ≤ 2.5 V)
355 Abnormal VTD Detection (V TD > 4 V)
356 Abnormal VTD Detection (V TD < 0.5 V)
357 Abnormal VSP/VSG Detection (VSP/VSG ≥ 0.25)
358 Abnormal VSP/VSG Detection (VSP/VSG < 0.025)
361 Incomplete Drum Potential Sensor Calibration
SM 2-17 A175/A176/A177
2. DRUM UNIT
2.1 OVERVIEW
12 13 14 15 16 1
11
5
10
9
7/8 6
The drum unit consists of the components as shown in the above illustration.
An organic photoconductor drum (diameter: 100 mm) is used for this model.
1. OPC Drum 9. Cleaning Brush

2. OPC Drum Protective Shutter 10. Toner Collection Coil
3. Erase Lamp 11. Cleaning Blade
4. Drum Potential Sensor 12. Ozone Filter
5. Pre-transfer Lamp 13. Cleaning Filter
6. Pick-off Pawl 14. Charge Power Pack
7. Image Density Sensor 15. Quenching Lamp
8. Drum Thermistor 16. Main Charge Corona Unit
A175/A176/A177 2-18 SM
2.2 OPC DRUM CHARACTERISTICS
An OPC has the characteristics of:
1. Being able to accept a high negative electrical charge in the dark. (The
electrical resistance of a photoconductor is high in the absence of light.)
2. Dissipating the electrical charge when exposed to light. (Exposure to
light greatly increases the conductivity of a photoconductor.)
3. Dissipating an amount of charge in direct proportion to the intensity of
Detailed Section
Descriptions
the light. That is, where stronger light is directed to the photoconductor
surface, a smaller voltage remains on the OPC.
4. Being less sensitive to changes in temperature (when compared to
selenium F type drums).
5. Being less sensitive to changes in rest time (light fatigue). This makes it
unnecessary to compensate development bias voltage for variations in
rest time.
SM 2-19 A175/A176/A177
2.3 DRUM CHARGE
2.3.1 Overview
[A]
This copier uses a double corona wire scorotron system for drum charge.
Two corona wires are required to give sufficient negative charge on the drum
surface because of a rather high drum speed 330 mm/s ( A175) and
430mm/s (A176/A177). The stainless steel grid plate makes the corona
charge uniform and controls the amount of negative charge on the drum
surface by applying the negative grid bias voltage.
The charge power pack [A] gives a constant corona current to the corona
wires (–1100 µA) and bias voltage to the grid plate. The grid plate bias
voltage is automatically controlled to maintain proper image density
according to the change of the OPC drum potential due to dirty grid plate
and charge corona casing.
A175/A176/A177 2-20 SM
2.3.2 Air Flow Around the Drum
[D]
[A]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[C]
[B]
The exhaust fan [A] located above the fusing unit provides an air flow to the
charge corona unit to prevent uneven built-up of negative ions that can
cause an uneven charge of the drum surface as shown.
An ozone filter [B] absorbs the ozone (O3) around the drum.
The exhaust fan rotates slowly during stand-by and rotates quickly during
copying to keep the temperature inside the machine constant.
The 70 CPM machine has another fan [D] (drum cooling fan), which replaces
the inlet duct located at the right rear side of machine (front view). The drum
cooling fan cools the drum unit to remove the heat from the duplex tray. To
prevent foreign matters from entering the copier, a dust protection filter is
installed in the entrance [C] of the duct of the drum cooling fan.
SM 2-21 A175/A176/A177
2.3.3 Charge Wire Cleaning Mechanism
[A]
[C] [A]
[C]
[B]
The flow of air around the charge corona wire may deposit toner particles on
the corona wires. These particles may interfere with charging and cause low
density bands on copies.
The wire cleaner pads [A] automatically clean the wires to prevent such a
problem.
The wire cleaner is driven by a dc motor [B]. Normally the wire cleaner [C] is
located at the front end position (home position). After 5000 or more copies
are made and fusing temperature is less than 100°C after the main switch is
turned on, the wire cleaner motor turns on to bring the wire cleaner to the
rear end and then back to the home position.
When the wire cleaner moves from the rear to the home position (black
arrow in the illustration), the wire cleaner pads clean the wires.
There are no home position and return position sensors. The CPU monitors
the input voltage (5 V) to the wire cleaner motor. When the wire cleaner
reaches the end, it is stopped and the motor is locked. At this time, input
voltage slightly decreases (to about 4 V) and the CPU causes the motor to
rotate in reverse.
A175/A176/A177 2-22 SM
2.4 ERASE
2.4.1 Overview
EL
Detailed Section
LE
Descriptions
SE
ES
LO
LC
LE: Lead edge erase margin 3.5 ± 2.5 mm

SE: Side erase margin total of both sides 3 mm or less
Lo: Original width
Lc: Charged width of drum
EL: Lead edge erase
Es: Side erase
The erase lamp unit consists of a line of 123 LEDs extending across the full
width of the drum, the width of each being about 2.5 mm. In editing mode,
the appropriate LED’s turn on according to the customer’s designation.
SM 2-23 A175/A176/A177
2.4.2 Lead Edge and Trail Edge Erase
The entire line of LEDs turns on when the main motor turns on. They stay on
until the erase margin slightly overlaps the lead edge of the original image on
the drum (lead edge erase margin). It prevents the shadow of the original
lead edge from appearing on the copy paper. This lead erase margin is also
necessary for the lead edge of the copy paper to separate from the hot roller.
The width of the lead edge erase margin can be adjusted by SP mode
( SP Adjustment - PAGE 3).
When the scanner reaches the return position, the charge corona, the grid
bias, and the exposure lamp turn off. However, the charged area on the
drum surface is a little longer than the actual original length in order to have
the entire latent image of the original.
The entire line of LEDs turn on when the trail edge of the latent image has
passed under the erase lamp unit. This prevents developing unnecessary
parts of the drum surface, reducing toner consumption and drum cleaning
load.
The LEDs stay on to erase the lead edge of the latent image in the next copy
cycle. After the final copy, the erase lamps turn off at the same time as the
main motor.
2.4.3 Side Erase

Based on the combination of copy paper size and the reproduction ratio
data, the LEDs turn on in blocks. This prevents the shadow of the original
side edge and unexposed front and rear sides of the drum surface in
reduction mode from being developed. This reduces toner consumption and
drum cleaning load.
In the DJF mode, the horizontal original standard position on the exposure
glass is 5 mm away from the rear scale.
In the RDH mode, the horizontal center of the original is aligned with the
center of the exposure glass.
In the platen cover mode the horizontal original standard position on the
exposure glass is the rear scale edge.
To erase the shadow made by the edge of the rear scale in platen cover
mode, one more LED at the front side turns on. This is in addition to the
LED’s on in DJF and RDH modes.
A175/A176/A177 2-24 SM
2.5 CLEANING
2.5.1 Overview
[A]
[C]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[B]
[D]
4 mm
This copier uses the counter blade system for drum cleaning.
The blade [A] is angled against drum rotation. This counter blade system has
the following advantages:
• Less wearing of the cleaning blade edge.
• High cleaning efficiency.
Due to the high efficiency of this cleaning system, a pre-cleaning corona and
cleaning bias are not used for this copier.
The cleaning brush [B] is used to support the cleaning blade.
The brush collects toner from the drum surface and the cleaning blade
scrapes off any remaining toner and drops it into the cleaning brush. Toner
on the cleaning brush is scraped off by the mylar [C] and falls to the toner
collection coil [D]. Toner is transported to the toner collection bottle by the
toner collection coil.
To remove the accumulated toner at the edge of the cleaning blade, the
drum turns in reverse for about 4 mm at the end of every copy job. The
accumulated toner is then removed by the cleaning brush by this action.
SM 2-25 A175/A176/A177
2.5.2 Drive Mechanism
[C]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[D]
The drive force from the main motor is transmitted to the cleaning unit drive
gear via the timing belt [A] and the cleaning unit coupling [B]. The cleaning
unit drive gear [C] then transmits the force to the front side through the
cleaning brush [D]. The force at the front side is used for the toner collection
coil gear [E].
A175/A176/A177 2-26 SM
2.5.3 Cleaning Blade Pressure Mechanism and Side-to-Side Movement
[C]
[A]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[D]
[B]
The spring [A] always pushes the cleaning blade against the OPC drum. The
cleaning blade pressure can be manually released by pushing up the release
lever [B]. To prevent cleaning blade deformation during the transportation,
the release lever is locked in the pressure release (upper) position.
The pin [C] at the rear end of the cleaning blade holder touches the cam
gear [D] which gives a side-to-side movement to the blade. This movement
helps to disperse accumulated toner to prevent early blade edge
deterioration.
SM 2-27 A175/A176/A177
2.5.4 Toner Collection Mechanism
[E] [D]
[B]
[G]
[F]
[A]
[C]
Toner collected by the cleaning unit is transported to the toner collection

bottle [A] through the toner collection tubes. Three helical coils are used for
toner transport.
One coil [B] is driven by the main motor via drive belts, the second is driven
by the cleaning brush. and the third coil [C] is driven by an independent toner
collection drive motor [D].
The actuator disk [E] on the toner collection drive motor monitors the proper
rotation of the toner collection coil [C] to prevent the coil from being
damaged by toner clogged in the collection tube. The main PCB monitors
the sensor output and increases the motor speed if the sensor monitors that
the toner collection motor rotates at a speed lower than normal. Also, the
CPU will display an SC 342 if no signal changes (ON → OFF) are detected
for more than 2.55 seconds while the toner collection motor is turning.
When the toner collection bottle [A] becomes full, the toner pressure in the
bottle increases and presses the gear [F] against the toner overflow switch
[G]. After the toner overflow switch is activated, finishing of the copy job, or
up to 100 continuous copies, is allowed, then copying is prohibited and the
service call "full toner collection bottle" indication is displayed on the LCD.
This condition can be cleared by de-actuating the toner overflow switch while
de-actuating then actuating the toner collection bottle switch ([C] in next
page).
A175/A176/A177 2-28 SM
[B]
[D]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[A]
[C]
2.5.5 Pick-off mechanism

The pick-off pawls are always in contact with the drum surface with weak
spring pressure. They move side to side during the copy cycle. This
movement is made via a shaft [A] and an eccentric cam [B].
2.5.6 Pre-Transfer Lamp (PTL)

After the latent image is developed but before the image is transferred to
copy paper, the drum surface is illuminated by the pre-transfer lamp [D]. This
illumination reduces the negative potential on the drum surface. This
prevents toner particles from being re-attracted to the negatively charged
drum during the paper separation process. It also makes transfer and paper
separation easier.
2.5.7 Toner Collection Bottle Set Detection

The toner collection bottle set switch [C] prohibits machine operation by
indicating SC343 while the toner collection bottle is not set.
SM 2-29 A175/A176/A177
2.6 QUENCHING
[A]
In preparation for the next copy cycle, light from the quenching lamp (QL) [A]
neutralizes any charge remaining on the drum.
The quenching lamp consists of a line of 16 LEDs extending across the full
width of the drum.
Yellow colored LEDs are used for QL to reduce ultra violet light which would
cause light fatigue on the OPC drum.
A175/A176/A177 2-30 SM
3. OPTICS
3.1 OVERVIEW
[A]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[C]
[E] [B]
[D]
The optics unit reflects an image of the original on the exposure glass onto
the OPC drum. This forms a latent electrical image of the original.
On this model a halogen lamp (85 V 200 W: A175 copier, 225 W: others) is
used for the exposure lamp [A]. Lamp surface is frosted to ensure even
exposure.
Six mirrors are used to make the optics unit smaller and obtain the wide
reproduction ratio range (50 ~ 200%).
The lens [B] is driven by two stepping motors for (1) vertical direction
(parallel to the paper feed direction) and (2) horizontal direction movements.
To correct focal length change in reduction and enlargement modes, the
third scanner unit [C] (4th and 5th mirrors) position is changed by a stepping
motor.
The toner shielding filter [D] is green (a green filter partly absorbs red light) to
improve red original duplication.
The optic anti-condensation heater [E] (located on the optic base plate) turns
on while main switch is turned off to prevent the moisture from forming on
the optics.
SM 2-31 A175/A176/A177
3.2 SCANNER DRIVE
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
A dc servo motor is used as the scanner drive motor [A]. Scanner drive
speed is 330 mm/s (A175 coper) or 430 mm/s (others). during scanning, and
1,950 mm/s (50/51, 60 CPM versions) or 2,670 mm/s (70 CPM version)
when the scanner goes back.
The scanner drive motor drives the first [B] and second scanners [C] using
two scanner drive wires via the timing belt [D] and the scanner drive shaft
[E]. The second scanner speed is half of the first scanner speed.
The scanner drive wire is not directly wound around the pulley on the
scanner drive motor.
A175/A176/A177 2-32 SM
3.3 VERTICAL LENS DRIVE
[B]
[A]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
Enlarge HP (100%) Reduce
(Enlarge → HP)
(Reduce → HP)
(Enlarge → Enlarge)
(Reduce → Reduce)
(Enlarge → Reduce)
(Reduce → Enlarge)
30 30 30 30 steps
The lens vertical drive motor [A] changes the lens vertical position in
accordance with the selected reproduction ratio.
A stepping motor (approx. 0.095 mm/step) is used to drive the lens through
the lens drive belt. The maximum lens vertical shift distance is 290 mm (from
the position at 50% to the position at 200%).
The lens vertical home position sensor [B] detects the lens vertical position
for full size mode. The optic control PCB keeps track of the lens position
based on the number of pulses sent to the lens vertical drive motor.
SM 2-33 A175/A176/A177
3.4 HORIZONTAL LENS DRIVE
[A]
40 steps
Enlarge
40
HP
Reduce 40
The original horizontal position on the exposure glass varies depending on

the mode (such as platen, DJF and RDH modes) for easy original handling.
However, the center is the standard position for paper feed.
Therefore, the lens horizontal position has to be changed according to paper
size, reproduction ratio, original feed modes and the edit modes (centering,
margin adjust, etc.).
A stepping motor (approx. 0.07 mm/step) is used to drive the lens through
the lens drive belt.
The lens horizontal home position sensor [A] is used to detect the lens
horizontal position for A4/LT sideways, in full size and platen mode.
The other positions are determined by counting the number of motor drive
pulses.
Since this model has a horizontal lens drive mechanism, side-to-side
registration adjustment for each feed station can be done easily by using SP
mode ( SP Adjustment - PAGE 4).
A175/A176/A177 2-34 SM
3.5 HORIZONTAL LENS POSITIONING
3.5.1 For Original Position
Platen
DJF [A]
[C]
Copy Paper
RDH
Detailed Section
Descriptions
(Center)
Horizontal
Lens Position
[B]
There are three standard original positions for the platen, DJF and RDH
modes.
In platen mode, the original is aligned with both the rear [A] and the left [B]
original scales (rear left corner [C] is the standard position).
In RDH mode, the original position is the center of the left scale [B].
In DJF mode, the original position is 5 mm to front of the platen mode
original position to maintain the original transport path (5 mm from the rear
scale).
The above figure shows the lens horizontal positions for each original mode
when identical size paper is used.
3.5.2 For Paper Size

Copy Paper
Original Rear Edge
Lens Position
Horizontal
To keep high paper feed performance, the center is assigned as the paper
feed standard position. Therefore, the lens horizontal position is changed
according to the paper size.
The figure shows the lens horizontal position for each paper size in full size
mode.
SM 2-35 A175/A176/A177
3.5.3 For Reproduction Ratio
Original Rear Edge
Original 200% 100% 50% Copy Paper
50%
100% 200%
3rd Scanner Position
When the reproduction ratio is changed, the vertical position of the lens is
changed. At the same time, the total focal length has to be changed to adjust
the image focusing. For this focal length change, the horizontal position of
the 3rd scanner is also adjusted. The maximum 3rd mirror shift distance is
50 mm (from the position at 100% to the position at 50, 200%).
The figure shows the lens horizontal position for 50, 100 and 200%.
A175/A176/A177 2-36 SM
Rev. 1/16/97
3.6 3RD SCANNER DRIVE
[B]
[A]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
(Initialize)
(Reduce/Enlarge → HP)
(Reduce/Enlarge → Reduce/Enlarge)
(Reduce/Enlarge → Reduce/Enlarge)
(Reduce/Enlarge → Enlarge/Reduce)
40 steps 40 steps
To compensate the focus for reproduction and lens position changes, the 3rd
scanner (4th and 5th mirrors) position is changed.
A stepping motor [A] (approx. 0.095 mm/step) is used for the 3rd scanner
drive.
The 3rd scanner home position sensor [B] is used to detect the unit position
for full size mode. The optic control PCB keeps track of the unit position
based on the number of motor drive pulses.
SM 2-37 A175/A176/A177
3.7 OPTICS CONTROL CIRCUIT
Sensors
Encoder
Data
Bus Scanner Drive
Main
Control Optics Control Board Horizontal Lens
Board Drive
Vertical Lens
Optics Drive
Control 3rd Scanner
Main
CPU Drive
CPU
Optic Cooling
Fan
Exposure Lamp
AC Drive Optic Thermistor

Board
The optic control board communicates with the main board through a data
bus. The optics control board monitors all the sensor signals, encoder
output, thermistor output and controls all motors in the optics.
At the programmed time, the main CPU sends a scanner start signal to the
optics control CPU.
The CPU generates a pulse-width modulation (PWM) signal. The PWM
signal goes to a driver circuit, which sends drive pulses to the scanner drive
motor.
An encoder in the scanner drive motor generates pulse signals.
A speed/direction control circuit monitors the scanner speed and the
direction of the signals, and uses this data to regulate the motor speed.
The home position sensor monitors the position of the scanner. When the
main switch is turned on, the main CPU confirms the position of the scanner
by moving the scanner out of the home position and back again. This data is
sent to the optics control CPU.
A175/A176/A177 2-38 SM
3.8 AUTOMATIC IMAGE DENSITY CONTROL SYSTEM (ADS)
[B]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[A]
In ADS mode the original background density is sensed by the ADS sensor
[A] and the main CPU determines an appropriate development bias voltage
for the original to prevent dirty backgrounds from appearing on copies.
The ADS sensor board is mounted on the rear side of the optics side plate.
The sensor board is covered by the sensor housing cover which has a small
hole to direct the reflected light from the original to the ADS sensor.
The ADS sensor standard voltage is adjusted to 2.7 V when process control
data initial setting is performed. The exposure lamp turns on with ID level 4
at the home position and the light reflected by the ADS pattern [B] (white
painted) reaches the ADS sensor. The main CPU adjusts the ADS gain data
automatically to make the output 2.7 V. This gain data is stored in the RAM
board.
SM 2-39 A175/A176/A177
90 mm
9.7
A= (mm)
M
M = 1.0 (m = 50 ~ 100)
20 mm
m
M= (m = 101 ~ 200)
100
A B 8.25
B= x 100 (mm)
m
m: reproduction ratio
[V] (50 ~ 200)
ADS
ADS Original
Sensor Voltage
Output
Peak hold
For the first scanning of an original in ADS mode, the CPU starts sampling of
the ADS sensor output while exposing the ADS pattern at the scanner home
position. Then the CPU stores the maximum ADS sensor output as a
reference voltage. This means that every ADS check cycle, the first
scanning for the original, the ADS reference voltage is renewed by the latest
exposure light reflected by the ADS pattern.
In the full size mode, the CPU samples the ADS sensor output when the
scanner scans the original from 9.7 mm to 18 mm from the left scale edge.
The CPU takes the maximum ADS sensor output during the sampling period
and compares it with the ADS reference voltage to determine the proper
development bias voltage. (See development bias control section for details.)
The sampling length of ADS sensor output for the original differs depending
on the reproduction ratio because the scanner speed is different.
A175/A176/A177 2-40 SM
3.9 MANUAL IMAGE DENSITY CONTROL
When the image density is set manually, the voltage applied to the exposure
lamp changes as shown in the table below.
Lighter Darker
VBB –90
Dev. Bias
Detailed Section
Voltage (VBM) VBB –60
Descriptions
(negative)
VBB
VLAMP +4.5
V LAMP +3.0
V LAMP +0.5
V LAMP
Exposure
V LAMP –1.5
Lamp Voltage
VLAMP –3.5
VLAMP –5.5
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Manual ID
Position
VLAMP: Exposure lamp voltage at ID level 4.

This value is determined at process control data initial setting.
VBB: Development bias (negative) voltage at ID level 4.
This value is determined at process control data initial setting.
SM 2-41 A175/A176/A177
3.10 UNEVEN LIGHT INTENSITY CORRECTION
[D]
[D]
[D]
exposure
intensity
original
illumination
distribution
Shading plate
[A] [B] [C]
The entire exposure lamp surface is frosted to ensure even exposure.

To compensate for reduced light at the edge of the lens, a shading plate is
placed in front of the lens. The shading plate is fixed to the lens unit.
The shading plate compensates the light intensity when the lens horizontal
position is shifted ([A] to [C]).
Also three shading mylars [D] intercept any diffused reflected light from
outside the light path.
A175/A176/A177 2-42 SM
3.11 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION IN PLATEN MODE
[B]
[C]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[A]
[E]
[D]
There are three reflective sensors (APS sensors) in the optics cavity for the
original size detection. Original width Sensor [A] is used for sensing the
original width and Original Length Sensor-1 [B] and Original Length Sensor-2
[C] sense the original length.
Inside each APS sensor, there is an LED [D] and three photoelectric devices
[E]. The light generated by the LED is broken up in three beams and each
beam scans a different point of the exposure glass. If the original or platen
cover is present over the scanning point, the beam is reflected and each
reflected beam exposes a photoelectric device and activates it.
While the main switch is on, these sensors are active and the original size
data is always sent to the main CPU. However, the main CPU checks the
data only when the platen cover is opened.
SM 2-43 A175/A176/A177
[A]
Width Sensor Length Sensor 2 Length Sensor 1

9 8 7 6* 5 4* X2* 3 2 1 X1*
11 x 17 O O O 1 O 1 O O O O O
81/2 x 14 1 O O 1 O 1 O O O 1 O
81/2 x 11 1 O O 1 O 1 O 1 1 1 O
11 x 81/2 O O O 1 O 1 O 1 1 1 O
51/2 x 81/2 1 1 1 1 O 1 O 1 1 1 O
81/2 x 51/2 1 O O 1 1 1 O 1 1 1 O
NOTE: -1: Active -0: Inactive

*Sensors #4 and #6 are not used for LT/DLT version machines.
Their values are always 1.
Sensors #X2 and X1 are not used for LT/DLT version machines.
Their values are always ∅.
The check is done when the platen position sensor [A] turns on. This is when
the platen is positioned about 15 cm above the exposure glass. At this time,
only the sensor(s) located underneath the original receive the reflected light
and are on. Other sensor(s) are off. Through the on/off data of the nine
(seven for LT/DLT version machine) sensors, the main CPU can recognize
the original size.
In case the copy is made with the platen open, the main CPU decides the
original size only through the data when the Print key is pressed.
This original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan
and increases the machine’s productivity.
A175/A176/A177 2-44 SM
3.12 HALF TONE MODE
Detailed Section
Descriptions
This machine has a half tone mode. In this mode, which can be select in the
operation panel, the charge corona grid voltage is decreased by 200 V but
the charge corona grid voltage might blank out low density areas of the
original. To correct this, the exposure lamp voltage is decreased by 3 V. As a
result, the image density is lowered for picture or half tone original.
SM 2-45 A175/A176/A177
4. DEVELOPMENT
4.1 OVERVIEW
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
This copier uses a double roller (diameter 20 mm each) development (DRD)

system. This system differs from single roller development systems in that
(1) it develops the image in a narrower area, (2) it develops the image twice,
and (3) the relative speed of each development roller against the drum is
reduced. Also, finer toner (Approx. 9 µm) and developer (Approx. 70 µm) are
used. Both the DRD system and new supplies improve the image quality,
especially of thin horizontal lines, the trailing edges of the half-tone areas,
and black cross points.
The paddle roller [A] picks up developer in its paddles and transports it to the
upper development roller [B]. Internal permanent magnets in the
development rollers attract the developer to the development roller sleeve.
The upper development roller carries the developer past the doctor blade
[C]. The doctor blade trims the developer to the desired thickness and
creates backspill to the cross mixing mechanism.
The development rollers continues to turn, carrying the developer to the
OPC drum [D]. When the developer brush contacts the drum surface, the
negatively charged areas of the drum surface attract and hold the positively
charged toner. In this way, the latent image is developed.
The development roller is given a negative bias to prevent the toner form
being attracted to the non-image areas on the drum surface that may have a
slight residual negative charge.
After turning another 100 degrees, the developer is returned to the paddle
roller [A].
A175/A176/A177 2-46 SM
4.2 DRIVE MECHANISM
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[C]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B]
The gears of the development unit are driven by the development drive gear
[A] when the development motor [B] (dc servomotor) turns.
The gears of the toner hopper are driven by the toner supply roller drive gear
[C] when the toner supply clutch [D] activates.
The above gears are helical gears. Helical gears are more quiet than normal
gears. The teeth of the development drive gear are chamfered so that they
smoothly engage with the development roller gear [E] when the unit is
installed.
SM 2-47 A175/A176/A177
4.3 CROSSMIXING
[B] [C]
[E]
[F]
[D]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[B]
[F]
[D]
[A]
This copier uses a standard cross-mixing mechanism to keep the toner and
developer evenly mixed. It also helps agitate the developer to prevent
developer clumps from forming and helps create the triboelectric charge.
The developer on the turning development rollers [A] is split into two parts by
the doctor blade [B]. The part that stays on the development rollers forms the
magnetic brush and develops the latent image on the drum. The part that is
trimmed off by the doctor blade goes to the backspill plate [C].
As the developer slides down the backspill plate to the agitator [D], the
mixing vanes [E] move it slightly toward the rear of the unit. Part of the
developer falls into the auger inlet and is transported to the front of the unit
by the auger [F].
The agitator moves the developer slightly to the front as it turns, so the
developer stays level in the development unit.
A175/A176/A177 2-48 SM
4.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS
4.4.1 Overview
[A]
[B]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[C]
The high voltage control Board [A] applies the negative development bias to
the lower sleeve roller through the receptacle [B] and the lower sleeve roller
shaft [C]. Then the bias is applied to the upper sleeve roller through the rear
sleeve roller holder made of conductive resin.
The development bias prevents toner from being attracted to the background
area of the non-image area on the OPC drum where there is residual
voltage. Also, the development bias is used to adjust image density
according to the conditions the customer selected.
SM 2-49 A175/A176/A177
4.4.2 Bias Control In Copy Cycle
The bias output is determined by five factors.
The total bias is described as;
ADS Mode: VB = VBB + VBU + VBMG + VBA
Manual ID Mode: VB = VBB + VBU + VBMG + VBM
VB: Total bias
VBB: Base bias
VBA: ADS Compensation
VBU: User Tool mode ID Selection Compensation
VBMG: Magnification Compensation
VBM: Manual ID Selection Compensation
1) Base Bias (VBB)
VD
VBB
Drum
Potential
VL V
R
As explained in the process control section, the base bias for development is
determined by the residual voltage (VR) measured in process control data
initial setting.
VBB = VR + (–220)
2) ADS Compensation (VBA)
1.02 V
V BA –300
(negative)
0
1 2 2.3
Dark VADS (V) Light
According to the original background density, the bias is compensated. The

compensation value is determined with the voltage measured by the ADS
sensor (ADS sensor output: VADS) as follows:
VBA = 234 x (VADS –2.3)
NOTE: VBA has a limited range from 0 V to –300 V.
A175/A176/A177 2-50 SM
3) Manual ID Selection Position Compensation (VBM)
According to the manual ID selection position, the bias is compensated as
follows:
Lighter Darker
V BB –90
Dev. Bias
Detailed Section
V BB –60
Descriptions
Voltage (VBM)
(negative)
VBB
V LAMP +4.5
V LAMP +3.0
V LAMP +0.5
VLAMP
Exposure
V LAMP –1.5
Lamp Voltage
VLAMP –3.5
V LAMP –5.5
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Manual ID
Position
VLAMP: Exposure lamp voltage at ID level 4. This value is determined at

process control data initial setting.
4) User Tool Mode ID Selection Compensation (VBU)

In the User Tool mode, the image density level can be selected from five
steps. The VBU is determined by the User Tool ID position setting as follows:
Lighter Darker
–90
VBU
(negative) –60
+60
+90
User Tool
ID Position
SM 2-51 A175/A176/A177
5) Magnification Compensation (VBMG)
VBMG is determined by the selected reproduction ratio as follows:
–100
Dev. Bias
Voltage
(negative) –60
–40
–30
–20
81% 123% 142% 161%

62% 116%
50% 61% 80% 115% 122% 141% 160%
4.4.3 Bias Control Out of Copy Cycle

To hold the toner on the sleeve rollers while the development sleeve rollers
are rotating without image development, a constant –300 V bias is applied.
A175/A176/A177 2-52 SM
4.4.4 ID Sensor Pattern Bias
–700 V ①
① Potential VP
Sensor Detection
VP ②
③
Detailed Section
② ID Sensor
Descriptions
Bias Level –300
VIDB = VP +300 (V)
VSG
4.0 V
③ ID Sensor
Output VSP
While developing the ID sensor pattern, ID sensor bias is applied. ID sensor

bias is determined during process control initial setting as follows:
1. A charge is applied while grid voltage is –700 V to create the ID sensor

pattern.
2. The drum potential (VP) of the ID sensor pattern is checked.
3. The ID sensor bias (VIDB) is adjusted so that it satisfies the following
formula:
VIDB = VP – (–300)
= VP + 300 (V)
4. Change the bias to the calculated VIDB and detect VSP. VSG (detected
during VSG adjustment sequence in the process control data initial
setting) and VSP are used to determine VREF data at process control
data initial setting. VIDB is not changed until the next process control data
initial setting is done.
SM 2-53 A175/A176/A177
4.5 TONER SUPPLY
4.5.1 Toner Supply Mechanism
[A]
[B]
[E]
[B]
[F]
[C]
[D]
[F]
When the toner supply clutch [A] turns on, the agitator [B] moves the toner
from front to rear and sends the toner to the toner supply roller.
The toner supply clutch [A] located inside the development motor assembly
[C] applies the rotation from the development motor to the toner supply roller
gear [D], which drives the agitator gear [E]. Toner is caught in the grooves
on the toner supply roller [F]. Then, as the grooves turn past the opening, the
toner falls into the development unit.
A175/A176/A177 2-54 SM
4.5.1a Toner Density Detection
Developer consists of carrier particles (iron) and toner particles (resin and
carbon). Toner concentration is measured by the toner density sensor.
Inside the developer unit, developer passes through a magnetic field created
by coils inside the toner density sensor (A). When the toner concentration
falls, the voltage output by the toner density sensor changes accordingly and
the toner supply clutch is activated.
New developer has a standard toner concentration of 2% by weight, 20g of
Detailed Section
Descriptions
toner within the 1000g of developer. When new developer is installed,
developer initial setting must be performed.
[A]
SM 2-55 A175/A176/A177
4.5.2 Toner End Detection
[A]
The toner end sensor [A] detects if sufficient toner remains in the toner
hopper. The toner end sensor monitors the toner end condition each time the
toner supply clutch turns on. When there is little toner inside the toner
hopper and toner pressure on the toner end sensor becomes low, the toner
end sensor outputs a pulse signal for each copy cycle (one detection pulse
per copy).
The toner near end indication is displayed on the LCD after receiving the
pulse signal 150 times (If no pulse signal is output twice continually, the
pulse count is canceled).
Fifty copies are allowed after entering toner near end condition. After fifty
copies are made in toner near end condition, the machine enters the toner
end condition and copying is prohibited.
When the main switch is turned off and on, or the front door is opened and
closed, the machine drives toner supply mechanism and monitors the toner
end sensor output. If the toner end sensor does not output the pulse signal
twice continually, the toner end condition is canceled.
A175/A176/A177 2-56 SM
4.5.3 Toner Supply Control
By using an SP mode ( SP Adjustment - PAGE 7), the following 3
kinds of toner supply controls can be selected.
• Auto Process Control Mode
• Detect Mode
• Fixed Mode
Detailed Section
1) Auto Process Control Mode
Descriptions
Originals have various image proportions and image densities. For the
best toner supply control, it is necessary to link the amount of toner
supplied on each copy cycle to the amount of toner consumed for each
copy.
Fuzzy control is used in this model to provide this kind of toner supply
control.
Fuzzy Control 1
According to data of the TD sensor, the CPU checks the following at
every copy cycle:
1. The results of toner supply control (TD sensor output) in the

previous copy cycle.
2. How quickly the toner density is changing.

Then the CPU decides the most suitable toner supply amount (toner
supply clutch on time) for the next copy cycle by using fuzzy logic.
SM 2-57 A175/A176/A177
Fuzzy Control 2
The image on the OPC drum changes due to variations in toner
chargeability (influenced by the environment) even if toner
concentration is constant.
The ID sensor directly checks the image on the OPC drum and shifts
the VREF data under fuzzy control to keep the image on the OPC
drum constant.
NOTE: The toner supply amount is changed at every copy cycle.
The target toner density sensor output is updated under the
following conditions:
1. During toner density sensor initial setting
2. During process control data initial setting
3. After the copy job is completed in case that 10 or more copies
have been made since the last update. (VSP check)
(Refer to section 2.1.4 "Image Density Control" for details.)
2) Detect Mode
In this mode, only the TD sensor is used to control the toner
concentration (VREF data is fixed). The machine performs only fuzzy
control 1.
In ID sensor abnormal condition, the machine automatically enters this
mode.
3) Fixed Mode
In this mode, a fixed amount of toner is supplied every copy cycle as
determined (4%, 7%, 11%, 14%) by SP mode ( SP Adjustment -
PAGE 7). There is no overtoning detection mechanism.
In TD sensor abnormal condition or Drum Potential sensor abnormal
condition, the machine automatically enter this mode.
A175/A176/A177 2-58 SM
4.5.4 Bottle Drive Mechanism
[C]
[D]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[E]
[A]
[B]
For easy access, the toner bottle is just inside the front cover. The bottle is
positioned horizontally.
The bottle drive mechanism transports toner from the bottle to the toner
hopper [A]. A worm gear [B] on the bottle drive motor drives this mechanism.
The toner bottle has a spiral groove [C] that helps move the toner to the
toner hopper.
To prevent toner from scattering when the toner bottle is removed from the
holder, toner shutter [D] which covers the hole [E] is installed on the toner
bottle.
When the toner is set on the holder and the lever is lowered, the toner
shutter [D] opens to supply toner to the toner hopper.
The bottle drive motor turns on 0.7 seconds when the toner end sensor turns
on five times continually.
SM 2-59 A175/A176/A177
5. IMAGE TRANSFER
5.1 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP
[A]
The pre-transfer lamp [A] located in the drum unit is used to prevent
incomplete toner transfer.
After the latent image is developed but before the image is transferred to the
copy paper, the drum surface is illuminated by the pre-transfer lamp. This
illumination reduces the negative potential on the drum surface charged by
the main charge corona and partially discharged by the exposure. This
makes image transfer easier.
The pre-transfer lamp is turned on and off by the charge power pack at the
same time as when the main motor turns on and off.
A175/A176/A177 2-60 SM
5.2 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
OVERVIEW
[A] [B]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[F]
[E]
[C]
[D]
This model uses a unique transfer belt unit instead of the transfer and
separation corona unit. The transfer belt unit consists of the following parts:
[A] Transfer belt
A belt (length: 321 mm) with high electrical resistance which holds a high
negative electrical potential and attracts the toner on the OPC drum onto
the paper. Also the electrical potential attracts the paper itself and helps
paper separation from the OPC drum.
[B] Transfer bias roller
Applies transfer voltage to the transfer belt.
[C] Transfer belt lift lever (driven by a solenoid)
Lifts the transfer belt to contact the transfer belt with the OPC drum.
[D] Transfer power pack
Generates the constant transfer current.
[E] Transfer belt cleaning blade
Removes toner attached on the transfer belt to prevent the rear side of the
paper from being stained.
[F] Discharge plate
Discharges the remaining negative charge on the transfer belt and feeds it
back to the transfer power pack to control the transfer current and keep it
constant.
SM 2-61 A175/A176/A177
5.3 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
MECHANISM
The registration rollers [A] starts
feeding the paper [B] to the gap
[C] [A]
between the OPC drum [C] and
the transfer belt [D] in proper
timing. [D]
[A] [B]
Immediately when the leading

edge of the paper reaches the
gap between the transfer belt
and the OPC drum, the transfer
belt lift lever [E] raises the
transfer belt to contact the
OPC drum. The lift lever is
driven by a solenoid.
[E]
Then a negative transfer bias is

--800 V
applied to the transfer bias roller
[F] and attracts the positively
charged toner [G] from the
OPC drum. It also attracts the
paper and separates the paper [F]
from the OPC drum.
[G]
A175/A176/A177 2-62 SM
After the image transfer is
completed, the charge on the
transfer belt holds the paper to
the transfer belt.
After separating the paper
from the transfer belt, the
transfer belt is discharged by
the discharge plate [A].
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[A]
[B]
The transfer power pack [B]

inside the transfer belt unit
monitors the current fed back
from the discharge plate to
adjust the transfer current. [B]
This way, the current stays
constant even if the paper,
environmental conditions, and
the transfer belt surface
resistance are changed.
[A]
SM 2-63 A175/A176/A177
5.4 TRANSFER BELT UNIT LIFT MECHANISM
[E]
[C]
[E]
[A]
[B]
[F]
[D]
The transfer belt lift solenoid [A] located inside the transfer belt unit turns on
to raise the transfer belt to contact the OPC drum at the appropriate timing.
The front lever [B] and the rear lever [C] are connected to the solenoid by
links [D] and push up the stays [E] when the solenoid turns on.
The support spring [F] helps the solenoid to raise the transfer belt.
The solenoid turns off after the copy job is finished.
The transfer belt must be released from the OPC drum for the following
reasons:
1. To prevent the ID sensor pattern on the OPC drum from being rubbed by
the transfer belt because the transfer belt is located between the
development unit and the ID sensor.
2. To decrease the load to the transfer belt cleaning blade, it is better to
keep toner on the non-image area (for example VD, VL, ID sensor pattern
developed during process control data initial setting) from being
transferred onto the transfer belt.
3. To prevent change of OPC drum characteristics by the influence of
additives inside the rubber belt.
A175/A176/A177 2-64 SM
5.5 PAPER TRANSPORTATION AND BELT DRIVE
MECHANISM
[C]
[A]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[E]
[B]
[F]
[F]
[D]
[D]
[E]
The transfer belt is driven by the main drive motor [A] through belt and gears.
Since the transfer belt electrically attracts the paper [B], the transport fan is
not required.
The charge on the transfer belt is discharged by the discharge plate to
reduce paper attraction and paper is separated by the paper stiffness above
the transfer belt drive roller [C] where the transfer belt is turning.
The tapered parts [D] at both sides of the roller [E] help keep the transfer belt
[F] at the center position.
SM 2-65 A175/A176/A177
5.6 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING MECHANISM
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
Some toner may adhere to transfer belt when paper jams occur, or when the
by-pass feed table side fences are set in the wrong position causing the
erase lamp to miss some toner. The adhered toner must be removed to
prevent the rear side of the copy paper from being stained.
The cleaning blade [A] scrapes off any toner remaining on the transfer belt.
A counter blade system is used for the transfer belt cleaning. The surface of
the transfer belt is coated to make it smooth and so prevent the cleaning
blade from being flipped by the transfer belt.
The lever [B] on the front end of the cleaning blade releases the cleaning
blade when the transfer belt unit is lowered and the lever is pushed by the
transfer belt unit support prop. (The transfer belt unit is lowered when the
lever [C] is turned anti-clockwise)
When the cleaning blade is released, the edge of the cleaning blade rubs the
seal so that the seal [D] removes the toner or paper dust on the cleaning
blade edge.
A175/A176/A177 2-66 SM
5.7 TONER COLLECTION MECHANISM
[B]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[A]
Through idle gears [A], transfer belt drive is transmitted to the toner
collection coil [B]. The toner collection coil transports the collected toner to
the toner collection bottle. See cleaning section 2.5 for details.
SM 2-67 A175/A176/A177
6. PAPER FEED
6.1 OVERVIEW [B] [A]
[B]
[A]
[C]
This model has three or four drawer tray paper feed stations.
The following table shows the configuration of each feed stations of the
copiers.
Feed station A175 copier A176/177 copiers
550 sheets tray 500 + 500 sheets tandem feed
1st
tray
2nd 550 sheets universal tray 550 sheets universal tray
3rd 550 sheets tray 1500 sheets built-in LCT
4th 550 sheets tray ----
Paper can also be fed using the by-pass feed table which has an
independent feed mechanism. The by-pass feed table can hold 50 sheets of
paper.
All feed stations use an FRR feed system. Rotation of the pick-up roller [A]
drives the top sheets of paper from each tray to the feed [B] and the
separation [C] rollers. The feed and separation rollers then take over paper
drive. If more than one sheet is fed by the pick-up roller, the separation
rollers rotate in the opposite direction and prevents all but the top sheet from
passing through to the registration rollers.
A175/A176/A177 2-68 SM
6.2 FRR FEED SYSTEM
[B]
[A]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[C]
This copier uses an FRR paper feed system using three rollers.
6.2.1 Pick-up Roller

The pick-up roller [A] is not in contact with the paper stack before it starts
feeding paper. Shortly after the Start key is pressed, the pick-up roller drops
down and feeds the top sheet between the feed [B] and the separation
rollers [C]. At almost the same time that the paper’s leading edge arrives at
the feed roller, the pick-up roller lifts off the paper stack so that it does not
interfere with the operation of the feed and separation rollers. The feed and
separation rollers then take over the paper feed process.
6.2.2 Feed and Separation Rollers

There is a one-way bearing inside the feed roller so it can turn only in one
direction. The separation roller is driven in the opposite direction to the feed
roller. The separation roller, however, is driven through a slip clutch (torque
limiter clutch) which allows it to turn in either direction depending on the
friction between the rollers. The separation roller solenoid keeps the
separation roller in contact with the feed roller.
SM 2-69 A175/A176/A177
[B] [B]
F2 F2
F3
F1 F1
F2 F1
[A] F3 F1 [A]
The direction in which the separation roller [A] turns depends on the frictional
forces acting on it. The slip clutch applies a constant clockwise force (F1).
When there is a single sheet of paper being driven between the rollers, the
force of friction between the feed roller [B] and the paper (F2) is greater than
F1. So, the separation roller turns counterclockwise.
If two or more sheets are fed between the rollers, the forward force on the
second sheet (F3), becomes less than F1 because the friction between the
two sheets is small. So, the separation roller starts turning clockwise and
drives the second sheet back to the tray.
A175/A176/A177 2-70 SM
6.3 SLIP CLUTCH MECHANISM
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[A]
[G] [F]
[D]
[B]
[C]
[E]
The slip clutch [A] consists of the input hub [B] and the output hub [C] which
is the case of the clutch as well. The magnetic ring [D] and the steel spacers
[E] are fitted onto the input hub. The ferrite ring [F] is fitted into the output
hub. Ferrite powder [G] packed between the magnetic ring and the ferrite
ring [F] generates a constant torque due to magnetic force. The input hub
and the output hub slip when the rotational force exceeds the constant
torque.
This type of slip clutch does not require lubrication.
SM 2-71 A175/A176/A177
6.4 FRR FEED DRIVE MECHANISM
[D]
[K]
[C]
[L]
[J]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[G]
[F]
[B]
[E]
[H]
[I]
The rotation of the paper feed motor [A] is transmitted to the gear [B] via the
timing belt [C], and then transmitted to the separation roller via the feed
clutch gear [D], gear [E], gear [F] and gear [G].
If the paper feed station is not selected, the separation roller solenoid [H]
de-activates and the separation roller [I] rotates freely in the reverse direction
of paper feeding.
Gear [B] also transmits the drive to the vertical transport roller [J] via gear
[D], idle gear [K] and gear [L].
A175/A176/A177 2-72 SM
[A] [F]
[D]
Detailed Section
[B]
Descriptions
[C] [E]
[G]
[I]
[H]
When the paper feed station is selected and the start key is pressed, the
feed clutch [A], separation roller solenoid [B], and the pick-up solenoid [C]
turn on at once.
When the feed clutch [A] activates to rotate the feed roller [D], the feed roller
and the pick-up roller [E] turn together because they are linked by the idle
gear [F].
When the separation roller solenoid [B] turns on, the separation roller [G]
contacts the feed roller [D] then rotates together with the feed roller in spite
of the separation roller’s drive in the opposite direction due to the torque
limiter function in the separation roller [G].
When the pick-up solenoid [C] activates, the pick-up roller [E] lowers to make
contact with the top sheet of the paper stack and send it to the feed and
separation rollers.
When the paper feed sensor [H] detects the leading edge of the paper [I], the
pick-up solenoid de-energizes to lift the pick-up roller and the paper feed
clutch de-energizes at a certain time to wait until it is ready to feed to the
registration roller.
SM 2-73 A175/A176/A177
6.5 SEPARATION ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
[C]
In this model, the separation roller [A] is normally away from the feed roller
[B]. When the paper feed station is selected and the start key is pressed, the
separation roller solenoid [C] moves the separation roller into contact with
the feed roller as explained in the previous two pages.
This contact/release mechanism has the following three advantages:
1. When the paper feed motor turns on, all separation rollers in each feed
stations rotate. If the separation roller is away from the feed roller, it
reduces the mechanical load to the paper feed motor and drive
mechanism, and also reduces wear of the rubber surface of the
separation roller due to the friction between the separation roller and the
feed roller.
2. After paper feeding is completed, paper sometimes remains in the gap
between the feed roller and the separation roller.
If the feed tray is drawn out in this condition, it is possible for the
remaining paper to be torn.
When the separation roller is away from the feed roller, remaining paper
is released from the gap between the feed and the separation rollers.
3. When paper misfeeds occur around this area, the customer can easily
pull out the jammed paper between the feed and the separation rollers
because the separation roller is away from the feed roller.
A175/A176/A177 2-74 SM
6.6 PAPER RETURN MECHANISM
[D]
[A] [C]
[B]
[E]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[C]
[F]
[C]
3 mm
When the paper feed clutch [A] activates and the feed roller drive shaft [B]
rotates, the lever [C] rotates together with the shaft. However, the lever is
immediately stopped by the stopper [D].
After paper is fed and the paper feed clutch turns off, the paper feed motor
still rotates to turn the separation roller [E] in the reverse direction. The
separation roller, still contacting the feed roller, turns the feed roller in the
reverse direction until the lever hits the rubber cushion [F].
By this feed roller reverse mechanism, the paper remaining in the gap
between the feed and the separation rollers returns 3 mm to the paper feed
tray.
After that, the separation roller solenoid turns off to move the separation
roller away from the feed roller. This releases the leading edge of the paper
and drops the paper to the paper feed tray.
This prevents remaining paper from being torn when the feed tray is drawn
out.
SM 2-75 A175/A176/A177
6.7 PAPER SKEW PREVENTION MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[B]
In this model, paper corner holders [A] are not used to facilitate paper
loading.
Instead of the corner holders, both paper press arms [B] press down both
paper side edges, especially in the case of paper with a face curl. This helps
to keep paper from being guided by the tray side fences to prevent paper
skew or jam.
A175/A176/A177 2-76 SM
6.8 PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
[A]
[D] [B]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[C]
[F]
[E]
When the tray is set in the machine, the machine detects this condition by
using several detection methods as shown in the table:
Feed station A175 copier A176/A177 copiers
Tray set switch Tray set signal through the
1st
connector
2nd Paper size switch Paper size switch
Tray set switch LCT set signal through the
3rd
connector
4th Tray set switch ----
When the machine detects that the paper tray is set in the machine, the lift
motor [A] rotates and the coupling gear [B] on the tray lift motor engages the
pin [C] of the lift arm shaft [D], then turns the tray lift arm [E] to lift the tray
bottom plate [F].
SM 2-77 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[E]
[C]
[D]
[B]
[F]
[G]
[I]
[H]
When the lift motor turns on, the pick-up solenoid [A] activates to lower the
pick-up roller [B]. When the top sheet of paper reaches the proper paper
feed level, the paper pushes up the pick-up roller and the actuator [C] on the
pick-up roller supporter [D] activates the lift sensor [E] to stop the lift motor.
After several paper feeds, the paper level gradually lowers then the lift
sensor is de-activated and the lift motor turns on again until the lift sensor is
activated again.
When the tray is drawn out of the feed unit, the lift motor coupling gear [F]
disengages the pin [G] of the lift arm shaft [H], then the tray bottom plate [I]
drops.
A175/A176/A177 2-78 SM
6.9 PAPER NEAR END/PAPER END DETECTION
[B]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[A]
[C] [D]
[E]
A feeler [A] on the lift arm shaft rotates counterclockwise in accordance with
the change of the top paper level. When almost 50 sheets are left in the tray,
the feeler activate the paper near end sensor [B] and informs the copier CPU
of the paper near end condition.
If paper is loaded in the paper tray, the paper end feeler [C] is raised by the
paper stack and the paper end sensor [D] is deactivated. When the paper
tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops in the cut out [E] of the tray
bottom plate and the paper end sensor is activated.
SM 2-79 A175/A176/A177
6.10 TANDEM FEED TRAY (A176/A177/A191/A192 Copiers
Only)
6.10.1 OVERVIEW
[A]
[B]
[A]
[B]
500 sheets of paper can be set in each of the left [A] and right trays [B].
Paper is fed from the right tray. When the paper in the right tray runs out, the
paper in the left tray is automatically transported to the right tray. After the
paper is transported to the right tray, paper feeding resumes.
Normally both the right and the left trays are joined together.
During copying, if there is no paper in the left tray, only the left tray can be
pulled out to load paper, as shown. During that time, paper feed continues.
A175/A176/A177 2-80 SM
6.10.2 Fences Drive Mechanism
[A]
[D]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[A]
[C]
[E]
[B]
The side fences [A] of the right tray are normally closed. They open only
when paper in the left tray is transported to the right tray.
The side fences are driven by the side fence drive motor [B] (stepping
motor). When the paper loaded in the left tray is transported to the right tray,
the side fence drive motor turns counterclockwise to open the side fences
until the side fence positioning sensor [C] is activated.
When the rear fence [D] in the left tray pushes paper into the right tray, the
side fence drive motor turns clockwise to close the side fences.
When the side fence close sensor [E] is actuated after the tandem tray is
pushed in, a message is displayed advising the user to set the paper at the
correct position in the tandem tray.
SM 2-81 A175/A176/A177
6.10.3 Rear Fence Drive Mechanism
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E] [A]
When the paper end sensor [A] in the left tray detects paper and the paper
end sensor in the right tray detects the paper end condition, the rear fence
drive motor [B] (dc motor) in the left tray rotates counterclockwise to drive the
rear fence [C] to push the paper into the right tray.
When the actuator on the rear fence activates the return position sensor [D],
the rear fence drive motor rotates clockwise until the actuator activates the
rear fence home position sensor [E].
A175/A176/A177 2-82 SM
6.10.4 Tray Lock Mechanism
[B]
Detailed Section
[G]
Descriptions
[D]
[F]
[C]
[E]
[A]
Normally the left (supply) tray lock lever [A] in the right tray [B] fits in the hole
[C] in the left tray [D]. During copying, if there is no paper in the left tray, the
tray lock solenoid [E] turns on to release the tray lock lever so that the left
tray can be separated from the right (feed) tray. The lock lever solenoid also
lowers the right tray lock lever [F] to hook itself in the hole [G] on the right
tray. Therefore, only the left tray is pulled out to load paper.
SM 2-83 A175/A176/A177
6.11 PAPER SIZE DETECTION
[A]
[B]
SW L: Lengthwise
Paper size
Actuate....0 S: Sideways
De-actuate....1
A4/A3 LT/DLT
Version version
01111 A3-L 11 x 17-L

00111 B4-L 81/2 x 14-L
10011 A4-L 81/2 x 11-L
01001 A4-S 81/2 x 11-S
00100 81/2 x 13 51/2 x81/2-S
00010 ---- 8 x 10-S
00001 A5-S 8 x 10-L
10000 8 k-L (*) 8 x 13-L
11000 16 k-L (*) 10 x 14-L
11100 16 k-S (*) 11 x 15-L
11110 A5-L 51/2 x81/2-L
For the first and the third feed trays, the paper size is stored by using the SP
mode ( SP Special Feature - PAGE 5).
For the second feed tray (universal tray), the paper size switch [A] detects
the paper size. The paper size switch has five microswitches inside. The
paper size switch is actuated by an actuator plate [B] located on the rear of
the tray. Each paper size has its own unique combination as shown in the
table and the CPU judges the paper size by this combination of activated
switches.
(*) It is necessary to set SP Adjustment - PAGE 17 No. 6 to 1.
A175/A176/A177 2-84 SM
6.12 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[C]
[D]
The vertical transport rollers [A] in each feed unit is driven by the paper feed
motor. The vertical transport rollers and the driven vertical transport rollers
[B], on the upper and the lower vertical guide plates, transport the paper
from each feed unit to the registration roller.
The upper [C] and lower [D] vertical transport guides can be opened to
access jammed paper in the vertical transport area.
The lower vertical transport guide separates from the upper guide to gain
wider jam removal space.
To reduce the first copy time, the paper feed motor rotates at a quicker
speed (430 mm/s.) than normal (330 mm/s). This quick rotation is performed
only in the case of the first copy from the first feed station.
SM 2-85 A175/A176/A177
6.13 TRAY POSITIONING MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
- Tray Lock Mechanism -
When the feed tray is set in the paper feed unit, the lock lever [A] drops
behind the lock plate [B] on the Accuride support bracket to lock the tray in
the proper position.
- Side-to-side Positioning Mechanism (tandem and built-in LCT trays) -

When the feed tray is set in the paper feed unit, the side-to-side positioning
plate [C] presses the feed tray against the rubber stopper [D]. By moving the
positioning plate, the tray position can be changed to adjust the side-to-side
registration.
A175/A176/A177 2-86 SM
[A]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[A]
[B]
- Side-to-side Positioning Mechanism (except for tandem and built-in

LCT trays) -
Side plates [A] are fixed on the positioning plate [B]. By moving the
positioning plate (fixed by four screws), the paper position can be changed to
adjust the side-to-side registration.
SM 2-87 A175/A176/A177
6.14 BUILT IN LCT
6.14.1 Paper Tray Lift Mechanism
[E]
[I]
[J] [K]
[H]
[E]
[G]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[F]
[E] [B]
[L]
Drive from the reversible LCT motor [A] is transmitted through a worm gear
[B] to the drive pulley shaft [C]. The tray wires [D] are fixed in the slots [E] at
the ends of the tray support rods [F] and [G].
When the LCT motor rotates forward and the drive pulley shaft [C] turns
counterclockwise, the tray support rods and the tray bottom plate [H] move
upward. The tray goes up until the top paper pushes up the pick-up roller
and the lift sensor in the third feed unit is activated.
The paper near end sensor [I] detects the paper near end condition when it
is activated by the actuator [J] on the rear end of the right support rod [G].
To lower the tray bottom plate [H], the LCT motor rotates in reverse and the
drive pulley shaft [C] turns clockwise, the tray support rods and the tray
bottom plate move downward. The tray goes down until the tray down
sensor [K] is activated by the actuator.
When paper is present and the tray is up, the tray paper set sensor [L] is
blocked. When paper runs out and the tray lowers it can not raise again until
the tray paper set sensor is unblocked by the addition of paper.
A175/A176/A177 2-88 SM
6.14.2 Tray Lock Mechanism
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[C]
[A]
[B]
When the tray starts moving up, the tray lock lever [A] drops in the hole on
the base plate to engage the stopper [B], locking the tray in position. This
prevents the tray from being pulled out while in the up position.
When the bottom plate is lowered to the bottom position, the bottom plate
presses down the pin [C] on the lock lever. The opposite end of the lever
then moves up, allowing the tray to be pulled out.
SM 2-89 A175/A176/A177
6.15 BY-PASS FEED TABLE
6.15.1 Feed Mechanism/Paper End Detection
[C]
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[F]
The by-pass feed table uses the FRR feed system. The by-pass feed motor
[A], pick-up solenoid [B], and by-pass feed clutch [C] control paper feeding
from the by-pass feed table.
The by-pass paper end sensor [D] detects if there is paper on the by-pass
feed table.
When there is no paper on the by-pass feed table, the paper end feeler [E]
drops in the cut out [F] of the lower guide plate and the paper end sensor [D]
deactivates. When paper is present on the by-pass feed table, the paper
pushes up the end feeler [E] to activate the paper end sensor [D]. The CPU
turns off the paper end indicator on the LCD panel and turns the start key
from red to green.
A175/A176/A177 2-90 SM
6.15.2 Table Open/Close Detection
[A]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[B]
When the by-pass feed table is opened, the by-pass table switch [A] is
activated by part of the feed table [B]. Then the CPU turns on the by-pass
feed indicator on the operation panel.
On this model, opening the by-pass feed table does not shift the copier into
interrupt mode. The selected modes and input data before opening the
by-pass feed table remain. Also other paper trays can be selected while the
by-pass feed table is open.
SM 2-91 A175/A176/A177
6.15.3 Paper Size Detection
[C]
[A]
[B]
The paper width detection is necessary to decide the lens horizontal position
because the standard position of the optics (rear left corner) and the paper
(center) is different.
The by-pass paper size sensor [A] (variable resistor) monitors the paper
width. When the paper side fences [B] and [C] are positioned according to
the paper width, the rear side fence is connected to the lever of the by-pass
paper size sensor. The electrical resistance of the sensor changes in
accordance with the side fence position, This informs the CPU of the paper
width.
At the first copy from the by-pass feed table, the scanner makes a full
distance scan. The registration sensor monitors the length of this paper
(between the ON timing by the leading edge and the OFF timing by the
trailing edge). From the following copies, the copier is controlled according to
this paper length data.
A175/A176/A177 2-92 SM
6.16 PAPER REGISTRATION
[A]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[B]
The registration rollers [A] have two functions. One is aligning the lead edge
of the paper with the leading edge of the latent image on the OPC drum.
When the CPU receives the signal from the registration sensor, the
registration clutch turns on. It turns off 90ms after the trailing edge of the
paper is detected by the registration sensor.
The other function is to correct skewing of paper fed from the trays. When
the leading edge of the paper reaches the registration rollers, the vertical
transport rollers [B] continuously turn to transport the paper. On the other
hand, the registration roller is not turning. The leading edge of the paper is
pushed against the registration roller. This makes a little buckle on the paper
between the vertical transport rollers and the registration rollers to correct
paper skew.
Shortly after the leading edge of the paper reaches the registration roller, the
registration clutch activates to feed the paper.
SM 2-93 A175/A176/A177
6.17 REGISTRATION DRIVE MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[G]
Through the timing belt [A], main motor [B] rotation is transmitted to the
registration clutch [C]. When the registration clutch activates, the main motor
drive is transmitted to the lower registration roller [D], then to the upper
registration roller [E] via two gears [F] at the front side.
A paper dust cleaner [G] is located at the center of the upper registration
roller [E]. This is in line with the feed rollers where most paper dust is
generated.
A175/A176/A177 2-94 SM
6.18 GUIDE PLATE RELEASE MECHANISM
[C]
[D]
[B]
Detailed Section
[E]
Descriptions
[F]
[H]
[G]
[A]
When a paper misfeed occurs between the vertical transport rollers and the
registration rollers, the lower paper guide plate [A] automatically opens.
When the registration sensor is not activated at a certain jam check timing,
the guide plate solenoid [B] turns on. The lever [C] raises the lock lever [D]
on the guide plate to release the pin [E] on the rear side frame. Then, the
guide plate falls open.
The actuator [F] on the guide plate activates the guide plate position sensor
[G] when the guide plate opens.
To prevent the guide plate from being left open, if the guide plate position
sensor is activated, copying is prohibited and a caution guidance is
displayed on the LCD panel.
An additional sensor is located in the vertical transport unit. The vertical
transport sensor [H] detects the lead edge of the paper to determine paper
feed timing for the next sheet.
SM 2-95 A175/A176/A177
7. IMAGE FUSING
7.1 OVERVIEW [E]
[F] [D] [A]
[C]
[G]
[K]
[L]
[M]
[I]
[N]
[J]
[H] [B]
After the image is transferred, the copy paper enters the fusing unit. Then
the image is fused to the copy paper by a heat and pressure process
through the use of a hot roller [A] and pressure roller [B].
The fusing lamps [C] located inside the hot roller turn on and off to maintain
the operating temperature of 185°C. The CPU monitors the hot roller surface
temperature through a film type thermistor [D] which is in contact with the hot
roller’s surface. A thermofuse [E] protects the fusing unit form overheating.
The hot roller strippers [F] separate the copy paper from the hot roller and
direct it to the fusing exit rollers [G]. The exit sensor [H] monitors the
progress of the copy paper through the fusing unit and acts as a misfeed
detector while the exit rollers drive the copy paper to the inverter section.
The oil supply roller [K] applies a light coat of silicon oil to the hot roller. The
oil supply cleaning roller [L] and oil supply cleaning blade [M] remove the
paper dust accumulated on the cleaning roller. The pressure roller [B] also
has a cleaning roller [N] which removes paper dust and toner from the
pressure roller.
The hook positions of the tension springs [I] on the pressure lever [J] adjusts
the roller pressure.
A175/A176/A177 2-96 SM
7.2 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[A]
The entrance guide [A] for this machine is adjustable for thick or thin paper.
With thin paper, set the entrance guide in the upper position. This slightly
lengthens the paper path which prevents the paper from creasing in the
fusing unit. With thick paper, set the entrance guide in the lower position.
This is because thick paper does not bend as easily, and is therefore less
prone to creasing. Also, the lower setting allows more direct access to the
gap between the hot and pressure rollers. This prevents thick paper from
buckling against the hot roller, which can cause blurring at the leading edge
of the copy.
In this model, the transfer belt improves paper transport and the paper path
to the fusing entrance is stabilized. This reduces the chance of paper
creasing due to paper skews in the fusing unit.
Therefore, the guide plate standard position is the lower position. (Standard
position on previous models was the upper position).
Since there are very few reasons to change the guide plate position, there is
no guide plate position adjustment lever for customer use.
SM 2-97 A175/A176/A177
7.3 FUSING DRIVE MECHANISM
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[E]
The fusing drive gear [A] transmits the drive from the fusing/duplex drive
motor to the gear [B] which drives the hot roller gear [C]. Rotation passes
from the gear [B] through the idle gear [D] to the exit roller drive gear [E]. The
pressure roller is driven by the friction between the two fusing rollers.
A175/A176/A177 2-98 SM
7.4 FUSING LAMP CONTROL Rev. 5/6/97
°C
200 °C
200
180 °C 185°C
150 { : Main SW on
| : Process control data
initial setting start
100
} : Idling start
Detailed Section
~ : Get ready
Descriptions
50
*1
{
| } ~
When the main switch is turned on the CPU starts sending a trigger pulse to
the fusing control circuit to turn on the fusing lamp.
When the CPU detects a fusing temperature of 200°C through the
thermistor, the copier starts fusing idling. This idling period can be adjusted
by SP mode ( SP Adjustment - PAGE 1). When the fusing idling
finishes, the warm-up period is completed and the Ready indicator turns on.
After this, fusing temperature is controlled at 185°C. If the fusing temperature
is above 100°C when the main switch is turned on, the copier does not go
into the fusing idling mode.
When the fusing temperature reaches 180°C (in the case that the main
switch is turned on while the fusing temperature is less than 100°C), the
machine starts the process control data initial setting.
The CPU also changes the fusing lamp on period at every check cycle. The
change is calculated according to the result of the previous check. This
keeps the fusing temperature as close as possible to the target temperature.
If the fusing lamps (550 W) are turned on or off while the exposure lamp is
on, the power supplied to the exposure lamp may fluctuate, possibly
degrading the copy image. To prevent this, the fusing lamp does not change
while the exposure lamp is on: it stays either on or off.
The standard fusing temperature control mode is:
On-off control ....... European version
Phase control ....... Other versions
⇒ A175/A176:
By cutting the JP501 on the optics control board, the control mode changes
to the alternate mode.
A177:
This model does not have JP501. Instead, ',36: can be used to
change to the alternate mode. 21 2))
212)) 3+$6(
SM 2-99 A175/A176/A177
7.5 INVERTER AND PAPER EXIT
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C]
[F]
[E]
[H]
[F] [G]
After passing the fusing unit, copies enter the inverter unit where paper is
distributed to the paper exit rollers [A] or the duplex unit.
The junction gate solenoid changes the position of the junction gate [B]. In
duplex mode, the junction gate solenoid turns on to raise the junction gate so
that the junction gate guides the paper into the duplex unit.
The fusing exit sensor [C] and exit sensor [D] monitor paper misfeeds.
The duplex entrance sensor [E] is used not only to monitor paper misfeed
detection, but also to activate the duplex jogger motor.
When the paper passes the duplex entrance rollers [F], the paper pushes the
paper guide [G] up, and the actuator on the rear end of the paper guide shaft
de-activates the paper guide sensor [H]. The paper guide sensor also
monitors paper misfeeds.
A175/A176/A177 2-100 SM
7.6 INVERTER AND EXIT DRIVE MECHANISM
[D]
[B]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[A]
[C]
The gear [A] transmits the drive from the fusing/duplex drive motor [B] to the
next gear [C]. This gear [C] transmits the drive to the paper exit and the
inverter section through the timing belt [D].
SM 2-101 A175/A176/A177
8. DUPLEX
8.1 OVERVIEW
[A]
[B]
[F] [C]
[E]
In this mode the junction gate [A] directs sheets exiting the fusing unit to the
duplex tray entrance. After that, all sheets follow the path through the
entrance rollers [B]. After all front side copying is completed, the sheets in
the duplex tray are fed out in order from the bottom to the top. The sheets
then follow the path through the duplex feed mechanism, to the duplex
transport sensor [E], the duplex exit sensor [F] and vertical transport rollers
[C] to the copier registration rollers.
A175/A176/A177 2-102 SM
8.2 DRIVE MECHANISM
[B] [E]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[A] [D]
[C]
The duplex drive gear [A] transmits drive from the fusing/duplex drive motor
[B] to the duplex unit. This drive is transmitted to the duplex paper feed
section under the control of the duplex feed clutch [C] and transmitted to the
duplex transport section under the control of the duplex transport clutch [D].
The duplex positioning roller is driven by the gear [E], so this roller
continuously rotates while the fusing/duplex drive motor is on.
SM 2-103 A175/A176/A177
8.3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE TO DUPLEX TRAY
[D]
[A]
[B]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[C]
After paper passes through the junction gate, it pushes the feeler [A] up. The
feeler and the paper guide [B] form one part, so that when the feeler is
pushed up, the paper guide is moved out of the paper path.
The paper then enters the duplex unit. After the paper’s trailing edge passes
the feeler, nothing holds it up and the paper guide falls back into place and is
ready to guide the paper under brush roller.
(If the paper is caught on top of the brush roller [C], the guide pushes it
under as it falls.)
The paper guide sensor [D] is responsible for misfeed detection during
duplex copying. Movement of the paper guide assembly is detected by the
paper guide sensor [D].
A175/A176/A177 2-104 SM
8.4 DUPLEX STACKING
[B] [D]
[C]
[A]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[B]
10 mm
[C]
10 mm
The jogger motor (stepping motor) [A] drives the side fence drive wire [B] to
move the side fences [C] inward or outward.
When the main switch is turned on, the jogger motor rotates to place the
jogger fences at the home position by monitoring the signal of the jogger
home position sensor [D].
When the start key is pressed, the jogger motor rotates to position the side
fences according to the selected paper size. 30 ms after the duplex entrance
sensor detects the leading edge of the paper (OFF → ON), the jogger motor
rotates to position the jogger side fences 10 mm away from the selected
paper size. When the copy paper is delivered in the duplex tray, 150 ms after
the duplex entrance sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper (ON →
OFF), the jogger fences move inward to square the paper. 30 ms after the
duplex entrance sensor detects the leading edge of the next copy paper, the
jogger fences move back to the previous positions (10 mm away from the
paper size) again.
The jogger fences move inward to square the paper stack for every copy in
the paper stack at the same timing as before. After the last copy of the first
side copying enters the duplex tray, the jogger fences remain against the
paper stack.
SM 2-105 A175/A176/A177
8.5 DUPLEX PICK-UP ROLLER MECHANISM
[D]
[A]
[C]
[A]
[B]
[E]
[C]
The positioning roller [A] is normally in the upper position. 150 ms after the
duplex entrance sensor [B] detects the trailing edge of the paper (ON →
OFF), the positioning solenoid [C] turns on to lower the positioning roller until
it contacts the paper. The positioning roller continuously rotates clockwise
while the fusing/duplex motor [D] rotates. The positioning solenoid stays on
until the leading edge of the paper hits the separation belts [E].
30 ms after the duplex entrance sensor [B] detects the leading edge (OFF →
ON) of the next paper, the positioning roller solenoid turns off to raise the
positioning roller so that the positioning roller does not disturb the next sheet
as it enters.
A175/A176/A177 2-106 SM
8.6 DUPLEX PAPER FEED
[B]
Detailed Section
Descriptions
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[F]
The paper on the duplex tray is fed in order from the bottom to the top sheet.
After all copies are stacked on the duplex tray, the duplex pressure solenoid
[A] turns on to lower the pressure arm [B] so that the pressure arm presses
the paper against the pick up roller [C].
Then, the duplex feed clutch [D] turns on to rotate the pick-up roller [C],
separation belts [E] and the feed roller [F].
The separation belts [E] and the feed roller [F] rotate in opposite directions.
Only the bottom sheet of paper is fed because the separation belt prevents
any other paper from feeding.
The feed roller [F] advances the bottom sheet past the separation belts
because the force of the feed roller is greater than the resistance of the
separation belts. The separation belts prevent multiple feeds because the
resistance of the separation belt is greater than the friction between the
pages.
SM 2-107 A175/A176/A177
[H]
[C]
[D]
[B] [G]
[A]
[F]
[G] [A] [E]

When the duplex transport sensor [A] detects the trailing edge of the last
sheet, the pressure solenoid [B] turns off to raise the pressure arm [C].
200 ms after the duplex transport sensor [A] detects the leading edge of the
paper, the duplex feed clutch [D] turns off and the duplex transport clutch [H]
turns on. The paper is then transported by the duplex transport rollers [E].
When the paper activates the duplex exit sensor [F], the duplex transport
clutch [H] turns off and the paper waits there until the feed timing is adjusted
to match the registration clutch on timing of the previous paper. The duplex
transport clutch then turns on and feeds the sheet to the vertical transport
section.
The duplex paper end sensor [G], which is a reflective type photo sensor,
detects the duplex paper end condition.
A175/A176/A177 2-108 SM
9. ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES
(North American version only)
In conjunction with the modification for the Energy Star compliance, field
technicians are requested to understand the changes in operation modes so
as to configure the machine for the customer specific environment/
requirements. This bulletin refers to all differences between the Energy Star
compliant machines and the other machines produced previously.
Detailed Section
Mode Non-Energy Star Energy Star
Descriptions
Auto Off Mode When the copier is used after the The copier turns off after the
weekly timer has turned it off, the selected time after the last copying
copier will turn itself back off after job.
the selected time. The time can be adjusted from 1 to
The auto off time can be set from 1 120 minutes. This mode cannot be
to 999 minutes, or the function can canceled.
be turned off. Default: 90 minutes
Default: Off
Simplex/Duplex Single sided original to single sided Single sided original to two sided
Mode copy is default setting mode at the copy is default setting mode at the
factory. factory.
Note: Program #5 which the
copier refers to at initialization
holds the mode.
Weekly Timer Available Because the auto off mode is a
mandatory standard feature of the
Energy Star standards, the weekly
timer is no longer available.
Anticondensation All plugged in All unplugged. (CN2, 4, and 5 on
heaters the lightening arrestor PCB)
Lightening
Arrestor
CN5
CN4
CN2
Note: All anti-condensation heaters

are still on the machine.
Because the attached "Energy Star Information" will be available together

with the Operating Instructions, make sure that the customer understands
how the machine operates to save energy.
SM 2-109 A175/A176/A177
The energy star feature will automatically turn the copier off after a
pre-programmed period of inactivity. The time interval is accessible by the
customer through the User Tools function. When the time interval is set
(default is 90 min.) the machine will automatically turn OFF after that period.
A relay built into the ON/OFF switch will move the switch to the OFF position.
This is accomplished when the main switch trigger signal at CN115-2 is set
to a low level by the copier main control PCB.
120 Volts 120 Volts

to DC Power Input
Supply
A175/A176/A177 2-110 SM
10. ENERGY SAVING INFORMATION
As an Energy Star Partner, we have determined that this

copier model meets Energy Star Guidelines for energy
efficiency.
This product was designed to reduce the environmental

impact associated with copying equipment by means of energy saving feature
such as AUTO OFF and DUPLEX DEFAULT MODES.
Detailed Section
Descriptions
10.1 About The Energy Saving Features of this Copier
10.1.1 Auto Off Mode
NOTE: There is an explanation of Auto Off mode in your Operating
Instructions. The explanation of Auto Off mode described below is a
supplement/correction of that given in your Operating Instructions.
NOTE: The Weekly Timer is not available on this copier because of the
Auto Off mode.
To conserve energy, this copier model automatically turns off 90 minutes

after the last copying job has been completed. Power consumption is
reduced from 0.25 kW (standby) to less than 0.01 kW.
To exit the Auto Off Mode, turn on the main switch. The main switch for this
copier has three positions, press it all the way and hold for 1 - 2 seconds.
Changing The Auto Off Timer

1. Press the Clear Modes key.
2. Press the Clear/Stop key for
more than 3 seconds until the
User Tools Menu appears on
the touch panel display.
3. Touch the [1] Auto reset/
Auto off key.
SM 2-111 A175/A176/A177
4. Adjust the Auto off timer following
the instructions on the display.
• Time can be adjusted from 1 to
120 minutes in 1 minute steps.
• You cannot cancel the Auto off
mode. The [OFF] key cannot
be selected.
5. To return to the User Tools Menu,
touch the [Menu] key.
6. To exit from the User Tools
condition, touch the [Exit] key.
10.1.2 Low Power Modes

Note: There is an explanation of the Low Power (Energy Saver) mode
in your operating instructions.
The copier will automatically enter a low power condition after the last copy
is made or when the operator manually activates this feature by pressing the
Clear Modes/Energy Saver key for more then one second.
Time required to return to the ready condition from the Low Power (Energy
Saver) mode is less than 30 seconds. In the Low Power (Energy Saver)
mode, power consumption is reduced from 0.22kW (standby) to less than
0.19kW.
Changing the Low Power (Energy Saver) Timer
2. Press the Clear Stop key for more than
3 seconds or until the User Tools Menu
appears on the touch panel display.
3. Touch the [1] Auto reset/Auto off key.
4. Adjust the Energy Saver Reset (Low
Power) Function following the
instructions on the display.
• Time can be adjusted from 1 to
120 minutes in 1 minute steps.
• You cannot cancel the Low Power
(Energy Saver) mode.
5. To return to the User Tools Menu touch
the [Menu] key.
6. To exit the User Tools Modes, touch the
[Exit] key.
A175/A176/A177 2-112 SM
10.1.3 Duplex Default Mode
NOTE: There is an explanation of the Duplex mode in your Operating
Instructions. The explanation of the Duplex mode described below is
a supplement/correction of that given in your Operating Instructions.
The factory (Default) setting in Menu 5 (Set operation modes) of the User
Tools has been set at "PROGRAM 5" rather than "NORMAL". This allows
Detailed Section
copy modes stored in Program 5 be set as the default. (For detail, refer to
Descriptions
Page 10 and 65 of your Operating Instruction Book.)
To save paper resources, the following Duplex mode has been selected as
the factory (default) setting using Program 5;
• Copiers with the document feeder and the sorter stapler are set for two
sided copies from an even number of originals.
• Copiers with the recirculating document handler and the finisher are set
for two sided copies from one sided originals.
Canceling The Duplex Default Mode

To cancel the Duplex Default mode,
store one-sided copy mode in Program
5 as follows:
2. Touch the [Duplex/Series Copies]
key to cancel the duplex mode.
Note: The illustration on the right shows

display for the document feeder
and the sorter stapler system.
3. Press the Program key.

4. Touch the [Store Program] key.
4
5. Touch the [5] key.
Then, the display shows "Program
5 has been stored. Do you want to
revise the program?".
5
6. Touch the [Yes] key to overwrite
a new program.
7. Touch the [5] key again to enter
a new program.
SM 2-113 A175/A176/A177
Changing Duplex Default Mode
To change a duplex mode set at the factory as a default to an another
duplex mode you need as a default, select the appropriate duplex mode and
overwrite it in Program 5 as follows;
2. Touch the [Duplex/Series Copies]
key to cancel the duplex mode.
Then, touch the [Duplex/Series
Copies] key again and select the
appropriate duplex mode as a
default.
• For the sorter stapler system, you
can select either "Two sided copies
from an odd number of originals"
or "Two sided copies from two Note: The illustration on the right shows
sided originals". display for the document feeder
and the sorter stapler system.
• For the finisher system, you can
select "Two sided copies from two
sided originals".
3. Press the Program key.

4. Touch the [Store Program] key. 4
5. Touch the [5] key.

Then, the display show "Program 5
has been stored. Do you want to
revise the program?". 5
6. Touch the [Yes] key to overwrite

a new program.
7. Touch the [5] key again to enter
a new program.
Recycled Paper
Please contact your sales or service representative for recommended
recycled paper types that may be used in this copier.
A175/A176/A177 2-114 SM
SECTION 3
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)
2. Humidity Range: 15% to 90% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (Do not expose to direct
sunlight.)
4. Ventilation: Room air should turn over at least 3 times/hour.)
5. Ambient Dust: Less than 0.15 mg/m3 (4 x 103 Oz/yd3)
6. Room Size: More than 10 m3 (13.4 yd3)
7. If the place of installation is air-conditioned or heated, do not place the
Installation
machine.
a) where it will be subjected to sudden temperature changes.
b) where it will be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner.
c) where it will be directly exposed to heat from a heater.
8. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gasses.

9. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 feet)
above sea level.
10. Place the copier on a strong and level base.
11. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

1. Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
2. Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
NOTE: The machine legs may be screwed up or down in order to level
the machine. Set a carpenter’s level on the exposure glass.
SM 3-1 A175/A176/A177
1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Place the copier near the power source, providing clearance as shown:
More than 4 inches
More than 8 inches (See NOTE: *2) More than 4 inches

(See NOTE: *1)
Your machine
More than 28 inches
NOTE: *1. If the LCT is not installed, the distance between the wall and the
edge of the by-pass feed table must be more than 30 cm.
*2. Copier only: 128.0 cm (with LCT 134.7 cm)
Copier + S/S: 125.6 cm (with LCT 156.8 cm)
Copier + Finisher: 136.1 cm (with LCT 167.3 cm)
A175/A176/A177 3-2 SM
1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
1. Input voltage level: 120 V/60 Hz: More than 20 A
220 ~ 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 10 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: 10%
3. Permissible extension cord:
At least 300 V/30 A capacity and less than 5 m (16.4 feet) long.
NOTE: a) be sure to ground the machine. (Do not ground it to a gas
pipe.)
b) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
c) Avoid multi-wiring.
4. Do not set anything on the power cord.
Installation
SM 3-3 A175/A176/A177
2. COPIER INSTALLATION
2.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box according to
the following list:
Description Q’ty
1. Sensor Cover .................................................................... 1
2. Flat Head Screw 4 x 6....................................................... 1
3. Leveling Foot .................................................................... 2
NOTE: This copier requires a 20 Amp service with a USA 20A plug
socket. The shape of the 20A socket is different from that of the
standard 15A. The two are not interchangeable. If there is no
20A socket at the customer location, the electrical supply line
must be changed as well as the socket. Contact the local electric
company for more information
A175/A176/A177 3-4 SM
2.2 COPIER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
NOTE: Since the installation procedure is not packed with the copier as
an accessory, always bring this manual with you.
Installation
[B]
[A]
CAUTION
When installing the copier, make sure that the copier is unplugged.
NOTE: Insert the leveling shoes [A] under the leveling feet [B] for the front
side, and level the machine before starting the installation. (The
leveling feet [B] can be screwed up or down.) Extra leveling shoes
(AH013008) and leveling feet (AH011004) are available as spare
parts.
1. Remove the tape strips.
SM 3-5 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[H]
[E]
[G]
[F]
2. Open the front doors.

3. Remove the tape strips.
4. Remove the scanner clamp [A] (1 screw) and install the cap [B] taped to
the paper exit bracket.
5. Remove the transfer belt lock plate [C] (1 screw).
6. Turn the cleaning unit lock pin [D] about 180°, then remove.
7. Remove the strip of filament tape [E] of the fusing unit. Pull out the fusing
unit. Lower the lever [F], remove the oil supply unit [G], and remove the
front and rear clamps [H]. Reinstall the oil supply unit and push in the
fusing unit.
A175/A176/A177 3-6 SM
[C]
[A] [E]
[B]
[A]
Installation
[F]
[D]
[G]
[F]
[H]
[J]
[I]
8. Remove the shutter cover [A] by releasing the hook [B].

9. Remove the shutter inner cover [C] (1 screw).
10. Open the toner bottle holder [D].
NOTE: To open the toner bottle completely, while lowering the shutter
lever [E], push the bracket [F] to the right.
11. Close the toner hopper cap [G].
12. Remove the screw [H] fixing the drum stay [I].
13. Remove the drum stay knob [J] and the drum stay [I].
SM 3-7 A175/A176/A177
[B]
[A]
[E]
[F]
[C]
[D]
14. Disconnect two connectors [A].

15. Pull out the development unit [B].
NOTE: 1. To prevent drum scratches, push the development unit to the
right while pulling it out.
2. Place the development unit on the sheet [C] attached with the
new developer to prevent foreign matter from being attracted
to the sleeve rollers.
3. When pulling out the development unit, do not pull the knob
[D].
16. Remove two screws [E] fixing the toner hopper [F].
17. Turn the toner hopper 90 degree, then, move it up to remove it from the
development unit.
A175/A176/A177 3-8 SM
[A]
[B]
[C]
Installation
[I]
[H]
[G]
[D]
[E]
[F]
18. Evenly pour in one pack of developer [A] while turning the knob [B].
19. Install the toner hopper [C] to the development unit (2 screws).
20. Install the development unit to the machine.
21. Connect two connectors [D].
22. Install the drum stay [E] and replace the drum stay knob [F] and one
screw [G].
NOTE: When installing the drum stay, be careful not to pinch the
harness and keep the harness away from the gear [H].
23. Open the toner hopper cap [I].
SM 3-9 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[C]
[B]
24. Install the shutter inner cover [A] (1 screw).

25. While pushing the lever [B], install the shutter cover [C].
26. Set a toner bottle by following the instructions on the decal.
NOTE: Before plugging in the power cord, install the guidance ROMs.
(-26, -27 machines) (See page 3-13)
27. Plug in the power cord, then turn on the main switch. The machine
automatically enters the process control data initial setting mode.
NOTE: Do not make any copy until completing developer initial setting.
Do not turn off the main switch during the process control data
initial setting mode.
A175/A176/A177 3-10 SM
28. Enter SP mode as follows:
1) Press the clear modes key.
2) Enter "107".
3) Press the clear/stop key for more than 3 seconds.
[C]
29. Press the "SP Adjustment" key [A].
[D]
[B]
[A]
Installation
30. Press the "Start" key [B] of the developer initial setting.
NOTE 1:Do not make any copies until developer (TD sensor) initial setting is
complete
NOTE 2:Developer initial setting must be performed whenever developer is
replaced or the TD sensor is replaced. When TD sensor is
replaced. The developer must also be replaced.
NOTE 3:Developer initial setting stops automatically.
31. Press the "Index" key [C].
32. Press the "Quit" key [D] to exit SP mode.
NOTE: If the developer initial setting is not completed, you cannot exit the
SP mode by pressing the "Quit" key. If this occur, turn the main
switch off and on then repeat steps 27 to 31 again. If the result is
the same, see the troubleshooting section "SC352" (Page 6- 9).
SM 3-11 A175/A176/A177
33. (Only in France)
This step is for the 50 CPM version
machine only.
a) Enter SP mode and press
"SP Adjustment" key.
b) Open page 17 and enter
"1" into No. 7 entry.
c) Exit SP mode.
34. Check copy quality and machine operation.
A175/A176/A177 3-12 SM
2.3 GUIDANCE ROM, INSTALLATION (OPTION: EUROPE
VERSION ONLY)
[B]
Installation
[A]
1. If necessary, replace the three guidance ROMs on the operation panel

PCB with the optional guidance ROMs as follows:
1) Remove three screws [A].
2) Remove the two screws [B] securing the protective earth wires.
SM 3-13 A175/A176/A177
[H]
[G]
[F]
[L]
[I]
[K] [J]
3) Insert the screw driver from the hole [F] and push the operation panel
[G] up.
4) Disconnect the connector [H].
5) Replace the guidance ROMs (IC111 [I], IC112 [J], IC113 [K]) on the
operation panel PCB [L].
6) Re-install the operation panel, the left inner cover and the left front
door.
NOTE: Be carful not to touch the grouding wire terminal with the circuit
pattern on the operation panel when re-installing the operation
panel.
2. After installing the new guidance ROMs, plug in the power cord and turn
on the main switch then perform the "touch panel display position
adjustment" as follows.
1) Press the interrupt key then press the clear/stop key more than three
seconds.
2) Follow the guidance on the LCD.
A175/A176/A177 3-14 SM
2.4 PLATEN COVER (OPTION) INSTALLATION
[B]
[F]
[D]
[H] [C]
[G]
[A] [H]
Installation
[E]
Install the optional platen cover as follows:

1. Install the sensor ass’y [A] which is an accessory of the platen cover [B]
as follows:
1) Connect the red connector [C] to the rear sensor [D].
2) Connect the white connector [E] to the front sensor [F].
3) Secure the sensor assembly with a screw [G].
2. Install the platen cover hooks [H].

3. Install the platen cover [B].
SM 3-15 A175/A176/A177
2.5 PAPER SIZE CHANGE
[C]
[B]
[B]
[A]
At the factory, all paper cassettes are set as A4 sideways. According to the
customer’s request, change the paper size as follows.
2.5.1 550 Sheets Paper Tray

1. Draw out the paper feed tray [A].
2. Change the position of the front and the rear side fences [B] (2 screws
each) and end fence [C] (one screw) according to the paper size.
3. Stick a size decal on the tray.
A175/A176/A177 3-16 SM
1) Press the mode clear key.
2) Enter "107".
3) Press the clear/stop key more than 3 seconds.
5. Press the "SP Special Feature"

key [A].
[D]
Installation
[A]
[B] [C]
6. Press the "Next" key [B] 6 or 7
times to select the paper tray size
setting mode (page 7 or 8) and
press the appropriate paper size
key of the appropriate feed station.
7. Press the "Index" key [C].

8. Press the "Quit" key [D] to exit SP mode.
9. Check copy quality and machine operation.
SM 3-17 A175/A176/A177
2.5.2 1,500 Sheets Paper Tray
[B]
[C]
[A]
1. Draw out the third feed tray [A].

2. Change the position of the front and the rear side fences [B] (1 screw
each) and the end fence [C] (one screw) according to the paper size.
3. Perform steps 3 to 9 from the previous page.
A175/A176/A177 3-18 SM
2.6 KEY COUNTER HOLDER INSTALLATION (OPTION)
[C]
[A]
Installation
[B] [E]
[D]
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
NOTE: The Key Counter Bracket Set includes the following parts. The key
counter holder and key counter should be procured locally.
1. Key Counter Bracket ................................................................. 1

2. Key Counter Plate Nut .............................................................. 2
3. Key Counter Cover ................................................................... 1
4. Accessory Harness ................................................................... 1
5. Screws....................................................................................... 4
6. Stepped Screw.......................................................................... 1
1. Remove the two plastic caps [A] and [B] on the right upper cover of the
copier.
2. Replace the short-circuit connector [C] with the connector of the
accessory harness [D].
3. Install the stepped screw [E].
SM 3-19 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[H]
[G]
[F]
4. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter
bracket [B] and insert the key counter holder [C].
5. Fix the key counter holder [C] to the bracket [B] (2 screws).
6. Install the key counter cover [D] (2 screws).
7. Connect the connector [E] of the key counter holder.
8. Hook the key counter holder assembly [F] to the stepped screw [G].
9. Secure the key counter holder assembly [F] with a screw [H].
A175/A176/A177 3-20 SM
2.7 IMAGE DENSITY ADJUSTMENT
The copy image density is already adjusted to the standard level at the
factory. If a customer requests to have the image density adjusted, it can be
done through the User Tool mode.
1. Enter the User Tool mode as follows:
1) Press the clear mode key.
2) Press the clear/stop key more than 3 seconds.
2. Press the "Set operation modes"

key [A].
Installation
[A]
3. Press the "Next" key once [B].
[B]
SM 3-21 A175/A176/A177
4. Select appropriate Image Density
level (5 steps) adjustment:
1) Press appropriate ID level [C]
key [A].
2) Press the enter key [B].
[B]
5. Press the "Menu" key [C].
[A]
6. Press the "Exit" key [D] to exit

User Tools mode.
[D]
7. Check copy quality.
A175/A176/A177 3-22 SM
3. DUAL JOB FEEDER (A610)
3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories against the following list:
Description Q’ty
1. Stepped Screw .................................................................. 2
2. Sponge Retainer ............................................................... 1
3. Philips Pan Head Screw with Washer - M5 x 10............... 2
4. Hinge Stopper Bracket...................................................... 2
5. Philips Pan Head Screw - M4 x 6 ..................................... 2
6. Feed-out Guide Mylar ....................................................... 1
Installation
7. Decal ................................................................................. 1
SM 3-23 A175/A176/A177
3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
[A]
[B]
[A]
CAUTION
1. Remove the tape strips and the cushions [A] as shown.
2. Remove the sensor [B], if installed (1 screw).
NOTE: Sensor [B] is not installed with the copier. It is an accessory of
the platen cover (option).
A175/A176/A177 3-24 SM
[B]
[A]
[B]
[C]
Installation
[E]
[D]
[B]
3. Install the cover [A] with the screw (if necessary). The cover and screw
are supplied as an accessory with the copier.
4. Install two stepped screws [B].
NOTE: There is one screw hole on the left side for the stepped screw.
However, there are two screw holes on the right where the
stepped screw is to be installed. Install the stepped screw into
the inner screw hole [C], as shown in the illustration.
5. Mount the DF to the copier [B] by inserting the screws into the holes of
the DF hinge [D], then slide the DF to the front as shown.
6. Secure the DF to the copier by using the screw hole as shown
(2 screws - M 5 x 10 [E]).
SM 3-25 A175/A176/A177
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
Face up
[G]
Mit der Schriftseite
nach oben
[E]
Face imprimée
deuuus
Faccia in su
Boca arriba
A610I515.wmf [H] [F]
7. Remove the small cap on the upper rear cover, then connect the
main connector [A] and the fiber optic cable connector [B].
CAUTION
When connecting the fiber optic cable, make sure to mount it over
the main connector to prevent it from being bent.
8. Attach the sponge retainer [C] to the top cover as shown.
9. Secure the hinge stopper bracket [D], as shown (2 screws - M4 x 6).
10. Attach the feed-out guide mylar [E] under the original table. Attach it
between the 3rd [F] and 4th [G] ribs (counting from the rear).
11. Apply appropriate decal at [H].
12. Plug in the copier and turn on the main switch.
NOTE: The copier automatically recognizes that the DF has been
installed.
13. Make copies using the DF and confirm the machine functions
properly.
14. Explain to the customer that some settings may now be changed,
according to the characteristics of each original.
A175/A176/A177 3-26 SM
4. SORTER STAPLER (A606)
4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the contents of the box according to the following list.
Description Q’ty
1. Front connection Bracket .......................................................... 1
2. Rear Connecting Bracket .......................................................... 1
3. Cushion ..................................................................................... 1
4. Entrance Guide Mylar ............................................................... 1
5. Proof Tray ................................................................................. 1
6. Caster Stopper .......................................................................... 2
Installation
7. Relay Guide .............................................................................. 1
8. Philips Pan Head Screw - M4 x 12 .......................................... 4
9. Philips Pan Head Screw - M4 x 6 ............................................. 4
10. Punch Position Decal (Punch version only) .............................. 1
SM 3-27 A175/A176/A177
[B]
[A]
[A]
[A] [A]
[B]
[E] [A]
[D]
[F]
[D]
[C]
CAUTION
1. Remove the strips of tape [A] and the cushions [B].
2. Open the front door and remove the inner cover [C] (3 screws).
3. Remove the strips of tape [D] and remove the cushion [E]. Then re-install
the inner cover [C]. Remove the shipping retainer [F] (1 screw, punch
version only).
A175/A176/A177 3-28 SM
[A]
[A]
Installation
[C]
[B]
[D]
[E]
4. Remove five plastic caps [A] on the copier’s left cover.

5. Install the front connecting bracket [B] (2 screws - M4 x 12) and the rear
connecting bracket [C] (2 screws - M4 x 12) on the copier.
6. Stick the entrance guide mylar [D] on the upper edge of the copier exit
area as shown.
NOTE: Align the edge [E] of the cover and the mylar. The edge of the
mylar will go between the left side cover and the static brush.
SM 3-29 A175/A176/A177
[C] [G]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[H]
[I] [F]
[E]
[F]
7. Secure the protective earth (ground) wire [A]* (1 screw) and the wire [B]
(1 screw).
NOTE*: For all models other than those intended for North America, the
green wire is intended as a functional earth (ground) and should
be connected as shown.
8. Connect the 4P connector [C] and the fiber optic connector [D].
9. Open the front door of the sorter stapler and remove the screw [E] fixing
the locking lever [F], then lower the locking lever.
10. Stick the cushion [G] on the proof tray upper cover. Install the relay guide
[H] (2 screws).
11. Align and press the sorter stapler against the copier and fix them by
raising the locking lever [F].
12. Secure the locking lever (1 screw).
13. Install the proof tray extention [I].
A175/A176/A177 3-30 SM
[A]
Installation
[B]
14. If the gap between the top of the sorter stapler and the copier is too
great, adjust by placing caster stoppers [A]. Under the left side castors.
15. Stick the punch position decal [B] on the DF entrance cover (punch
version only).
16. Plug in the copier.
17. Turn on the main switch of the copier and test the operation of the sorter
stapler.
NOTE: The copier automatically recognizes that the sorter stapler has
been installed.
SM 3-31 A175/A176/A177
5. RECIRCULATING DOCUMENT HANDLER
(A607)
5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories in the box according to the following list:
Description Q’ty
1. Switch Actuator ................................................................. 1
2. Hinge Stopper ................................................................... 2
3. Shoulder Screw (+) - M5 ................................................... 2
4. Shoulder Screw (+) - M5 ................................................... 2
5. Shoulder Screw (+) - M4 ................................................... 2
7. Truss Screw - M4 x 6 ........................................................ 1
A175/A176/A177 3-32 SM
[A]
[A]
[B]
[A]
Installation
[C]
CAUTION
When installing the Recirculating Document Handler (RDH), make
sure that the copier is unplugged.
1. Remove the tape strips [A] and the cushion [B] clamping the belt unit.
2. Remove the sensor [C] from the copier (1 screw).
NOTE: Sensor [C] is not installed to the copier when it is packed in its
box.
Sensor [C] is an accessory of the platen cover (option).
SM 3-33 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[F]
[E]
3. Install the cover [A] with a screw (if necessary). The cover and screw are
supplied as an accessory with the copier.
4. Replace the front two screws with M4 shoulder screws [B] and install the
6 mm collar M5 shoulder screws [C] to hook the RDH.
NOTE: There is one screw hole available on the left side for one of the
stepped screw. However there are two screw hole available on
the right where the stepped screw is to be installed.
Install the stepped screw into the outer screw hole [D] as shown
in the illustration.
5. Mount the RDH to the two stepped screws [E] by aligning the holes in the
RDH hinge [F] and the stepped screws, then slide the RDH to the right
as shown.
A175/A176/A177 3-34 SM
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
Installation
[E]
6. Secure the RDH to the copier with two 2 mm collar M5 shoulder screws
[A].
7. Remove a small cap on the upper rear cover of the copier then connect
the connector [B] and the fiber optic cable connector [C].
CAUTION
Place the fiber optic cable [C] over the electrical cable [B] so as not to
bend the fiber optic cable [C] while opening and closing the RDH.
8. Install the switch actuator [D] (1 screw).
9. Close the RDH then install the two angle stoppers [E].
10. Plug in the copier and turn on the main switch.
NOTE: The copier automatically recognizes that the RDH has been
installed.
11. Make copies using the RDH and confirm the copy image.
SM 3-35 A175/A176/A177
6. FINISHER (A608)
6.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories in the box according to the following list.
Description Q’ty
1. Front Connecting Bracket ................................................. 1
2. Rear Connecting Bracket .................................................. 1
3. Relay Guide ...................................................................... 1
4. Entrance Guide ................................................................. 1
5. Shift Tray........................................................................... 1
6. Cushion - 5 x 10 x 345 ...................................................... 1
7. Cushion - 5 x 10 x 125 ...................................................... 1
8. Cushion - 5 x 10 x 637 ...................................................... 1
9. Philips Truss Head Screw - M4 x 8 .................................. 4
10. Philips Pan Head Screw - M4 x 12 .................................. 4
12. Caster Stopper .................................................................. 2
A175/A176/A177 3-36 SM
[B]
[A]
[C]
Installation
[D]
[G] [D]
[G]
[F]
[C]
CAUTION
Unplug the power cord before beginning the following procedure.
1. Remove the strips of tape [A] and the cushions [B].
2. Open the front door and remove the strips of tape [C] and cushions [D].
3. Extend the staple unit [F].
4. Remove the strip of tape [G].
SM 3-37 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
[D] [E]
5. Remove five plastic caps [A] on the copier’s left cover.

6. Install the front connecting bracket [B] (2 screws - M4 x 12) and the rear
connecting bracket [C] (2 screws - M4 x 12) on the copier.
7. Stick the entrance guide mylar [D] on the copier exit area as shown.
NOTE: Align the edge [E] of the cover and the mylar.
A175/A176/A177 3-38 SM
[F] [C]
[K]
[L]
[N]
[I]
[J]
[D]
[A]
[B]
[E]
Installation
[G]
[N]
[H]
[M]
8. Open the front door of the finisher and remove the screw [A] fixing the
locking lever [B], then lower the locking lever.
9. Stick the cushions [C] (middle), [D] (short), [E] (long) as shown.
NOTE: Stick the cushion [C] on the metal stay (not on the cover).
Align the upper edge of the cushion [D] with the edge of the
stay [F].
Align the lower edge of the cushion [E] with the edge of the
stay [G].
10. Install the relay guide [H] (2 screws).
11. Secure the protective earth (ground) wire [I]* (1 screw) and the wire [J] (1
screw).
*NOTE: For all models other than those intended for North America, the
green wire is meant to be used as a functional earth (ground)
and should be connected as shown.
12. Connect the fiber optics connector [K] and the 4P connector [L].
13. Align and press the finisher against the copier and fix them by raising the
locking lever [B].
NOTE: At this time, confirm that the mylar [M] is located between the
guides [N].
14. Secure the locking lever (1 screw).
SM 3-39 A175/A176/A177
[A] [D]
[B]
[C]
[E]
15. Install the shift tray [A] with 4 screws - M4 x 8 (remove tape [B]).
16. Adjust the height of the copier by using the leveling foot [C] so that the
difference in level between the copier [D] and the finisher will be
30 ± 1 mm.
17. To ensure grounding between the copier and finisher, insert caster
stoppers [E] under the caster as shown.
18. Plug in the copier.
19. Turn on the main switch of the copier and test the operation of the
finisher.
NOTE: The copier recognizes automatically that the finisher is installed.
A175/A176/A177 3-40 SM
7. LCT (A609)
7.1 ACCESSORY CHECK
Check the accessories in the box according to the following list:
Description Q’ty
1. LCT feed unit ............................................................................ 1
2. Small cover - left cover.............................................................. 1
3. Philips pan head screw - M4 x 6 ............................................... 3
4. Philips pan head screw - M4 x 16 ............................................. 3
5. Tapping screw - M4 x 8............................................................. 1
Installation
SM 3-41 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[B]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
[F]
CAUTION
1. Remove the four strips of tape [A].
2. Open the LCT cover [B] and remove the tape [C] fixing the paper trailing
edge stopper.
3. Remove the tray cushion [D] secured with three strips of tape [E].
4. Remove the LCT connector [F] (3 screws).
A175/A176/A177 3-42 SM
[A]
[D]
[E]
[B]
[C]
[C]
Installation
[H]
[F]
[G]
5. Open the by-pass table [A] approximately 45 degrees and push the
stoppers [B] of the feed unit cover [C] by using a small flat head screw
driver [D], then remove the feed unit cover.
6. Remove the harness cover [E].
7. Remove the shipping retainers [F].
8. Install the LCT feed unit [G] to the copier (3 screws - M 4 x 6).
CAUTION
Do not pinch the harness [H] located below the by-pass table.
SM 3-43 A175/A176/A177
[D]
[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[G]
[E]
[F]
9. Install the LCT connector [A] to the copier.

1) Remove the three caps [B].
2) Set the two pins [C] of the LCT connector into the two holes [D] on the
LCT feed unit.
3) Install the LCT connector to the copier (3 screws - M4 x 16).
10. Remove the screw fixing the upper cover hinge [E] then slide and
remove the LCT cover [F].
11. Remove the rear upper cover [G] (2 screws).
A175/A176/A177 3-44 SM
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
Installation
12. Hold the upper stay [A] of the LCT and place the LCT on the plates [B] of
the LCT connector.
CAUTION
Properly place the LCT on the plate [B] of the LCT connector.
13. Insert the two pins [C] on the LCT connector into the two holes on the
LCT.
14. Secure the LCT to the LCT connector (3 screws - M 4 x 8).
15. Set the cap [D] in the front screw access hole.
SM 3-45 A175/A176/A177
[A]
16. Connect the connectors.

1) Between the copier and the LCT (3 connectors).
• 13P white
• 13P red
• 16P white
2) Between the LCT and the LCT feed unit (2 connectors).
• 10P white
• 8P white
17. Secure the protective earth (ground) wire [A] on the copier.
A175/A176/A177 3-46 SM
[B]
[A]
Installation
18. Install the rear upper cover [A] (2 screws).
19. Install the LCT cover [B] (1 screw).
20. Plug in the copier and check machine operation.
NOTE: The copier automatically recognizes that the LCT has been
installed.
SM 3-47 A175/A176/A177
7.2.1 PAPER SIZE CHANGE
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
[D]
Change the paper size, if the customer requests it.

NOTE: A4/Letter sideways is the factory setting.
1. While covering two sensors [A] with your hand, press the tray down key
[B] to lower the bottom tray.
2. Remove the screws [C] fixing the front and the rear side fences [D].
3. Tilt the side fences to the right (front view) and lift to remove.
4. Position the side fences according to the paper size.
5. Fix the side plates (1 screw each).
A175/A176/A177 3-48 SM
[C]
[A]
[B]
[B] B5 A4 LT
Installation
6. Remove the clip [A] and pull out the shaft [B]. Position the paper trailing
edge stopper [C] according to the paper size.
7. Re-install the shaft [B] and the clip [A].
2) Enter "107".
3) Touch the clear/stop key for more than 3 seconds.
9. Touch the "SP Special Features" key

[D].
[D]
SM 3-49 A175/A176/A177
[A] [C]
10. Touch the "Next" key [A] seven times
to select the paper size setting mode
(page 8), then touch the appropriate
paper size of "LCT" [B].
11. Touch the "Index" key [C]. [B]
[D]
12. Touch the "Quit" key [D].
13. Check the copy quality and machine operation.
A175/A176/A177 3-50 SM
[B]
[A]
Installation
18. Install the rear upper cover [A] (2 screws).
19. Install the LCT cover [B] (1 screw).
20. Plug in the copier and check machine operation.
NOTE: The copier automatically recognizes that the LCT has been
installed.
SM 3-47 A175/A176/A177
7.2.1 PAPER SIZE CHANGE
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
[D]
Change the paper size, if the customer requests it.

NOTE: A4/Letter sideways is the factory setting.
1. While covering two sensors [A] with your hand, press the tray down key
[B] to lower the bottom tray.
2. Remove the screws [C] fixing the front and the rear side fences [D].
3. Tilt the side fences to the right (front view) and lift to remove.
4. Position the side fences according to the paper size.
5. Fix the side plates (1 screw each).
A175/A176/A177 3-48 SM
[C]
[A]
[B]
[B] B5 A4 LT
Installation
6. Remove the clip [A] and pull out the shaft [B]. Position the paper trailing
edge stopper [C] according to the paper size.
7. Re-install the shaft [B] and the clip [A].
2) Enter "107".
3) Touch the clear/stop key for more than 3 seconds.
9. Touch the "SP Special Features" key

[D].
[D]
SM 3-49 A175/A176/A177
[A] [C]
10. Touch the "Next" key [A] seven times
to select the paper size setting mode
(page 8), then touch the appropriate
paper size of "LCT" [B].
11. Touch the "Index" key [C]. [B]
[D]
12. Touch the "Quit" key [D].
13. Check the copy quality and machine operation.
A175/A176/A177 3-50 SM
SECTION 4
SERVICE TABLES
1. SERVICE REMARKS
1.1 HANDLING THE DRUM
The organic photoconductor drum is comparatively more sensitive to light
and ammonia gas than a selenium drum.
1. Never expose the drum to direct sunlight.
2. Never touch the drum surface with bare hands. When the drum surface
is touched with fingers or becomes dirty, wipe with a dry cloth or clean
with wet cotton. Wipe with a dry cloth after cleaning with wet cotton.
3. Never use alcohol to clean the drum; alcohol dissolves the drum surface.
4. Store the drum in a cool, dry place away from heat.
5. Take care not to scratch the drum as the drum layer is thin and is easily
damaged.
6. Never expose the drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas.
7. Always keep the drum in its protective sheet when out of the copier. Also
always close the protective shutter on the drum unit when keeping the
drum unit out of the copier. Doing so avoids exposing the drum to bright
light or direct sunlight. This will protect the drum from light fatigue.
Service
Tables
8. Process control data initial setting ( SP Adjustment - PAGE 1)
must be performed when a new drum is installed.
1.2 DRUM UNIT

1. Make sure that the drum unit is set in position and the drum stay is
secured with a screw before the main switch is turned on. If the drum unit
is loose, poor contact of the drum connectors may cause electrical noise,
resulting in unexpected malfunctions (RAM data change is the worst
case).
2. To prevent drum scratches, remove the development unit before
removing the drum unit.
SM 4-1 A175/A176/A177
1.3 CHARGE CORONA
1. Clean the corona wires with a dry cloth. Do not use sandpaper or solvent.
2. Clean the charge corona casing with water first to remove NOX based
compounds. Then clean it with alcohol if any toner still remains on the
casing.
3. Clean the end blocks with a blower brush first to remove toner and paper
dust. Then clean with alcohol if any toner still remains.
4. Do not touch the corona wires with bare hands. Oil stains may cause
white bands on copies.
5. Make sure that the corona wires are correctly positioned between the
cleaner pads and that there is no foreign material (iron filings, etc.) on
the casing.
6. When installing new corona wires, do not bend or scratch the wire
surface to avoid any uneven charge. Also be sure that the corona wires
are correctly positioned in the end blocks. (See charge corona wire
replacement.)
7. Clean the charge grid plate with a blower bush (not with a cloth).
8. Do not touch the charge grid plate with bare hands. Also, do not bend
the charge grid plate or make any dent in it. Doing so may cause uneven
charge.
1.4 OPTICS
1. When installing the exposure glass, make sure that the white mark on
the edge of the glass faces up. This side has received special treatment
to make it smoother and generate less static electricity.
2. When moving the 1st or 2nd scanners, always hold them at the center.
Move them slowly, carefully, and gently.
3. Do not bend or crease the exposure lamp flat cable.
4. Do not touch the following parts with bare hands:
a) Reflectors
b) Exposure lamp
c) Mirrors and lens
d) VD, ADS, and VL patterns
A175/A176/A177 4-2 SM
5. To clean the mirrors and lens, use only a clean soft cloth dampened with
alcohol or water.
6. Do not turn the vertical lamp position adjusting cam. Adjusting the
vertical lamp position is very difficult because the filament cannot be
seen clearly as the lamp is frosted.
7. The mirror surface with the reflective coating must face the light path.
The spring plates must contact the reverse side of the mirror (the side
without the reflective coating).
8. Because the toner shielding filter is coated with an anti-static solution
(which is removed when wiped with water or alcohol) clean the toner
shielding filter very gently to avoid generating static electricity, and wipe
with a dry cloth.
1.5 ERASE LAMP

1. A narrower lead edge erase margin increases the possibility of fusing
jams. The margin should be at least 1.0 mm.
2. After cleaning the erase lamp unit, rub it gently with your finger to
discharge any static electricity on the unit surface.
Service
Tables
3. Use only a dry cloth to clean the potential sensor.
SM 4-3 A175/A176/A177
1.6 DEVELOPMENT UNIT
1. Be careful not to nick or scratch the development roller sleeves.
2. Place the development unit on a sheet of paper after removing it from the
copier. This prevents any small metal objects (staples, clips, E-rings,
etc.) from being attracted to the development roller and getting inside the
unit.
3. Be careful not to bend the terminals on the rear side.
4. Clean the drive gears after removing the used developer.
5. Never load different types of developer or toner into the development
unit. Doing so will cause poor copy quality and toner scattering inside the
copier.
6. Developer initial setting is necessary when new developer is loaded.
Do not perform the developer initial setting with used developer.
Do not make any copy before initial setting.
7. When removing the development unit, push it to the right to prevent the
drum from being scratched by part of the development unit.
8. The doctor gap and the development roller position must not be adjusted
in the field as they are precisely adjusted at the factory using special
tools. Do not loosen any screws covered with white paint.
9. Before pulling out the development unit, disconnect two connectors.
10. When pulling out the development unit, do not pull the knob.
11. When setting the development unit in the machine, do not forget to
connect the two connectors.
1.7 TRANSFER BELT UNIT

1. Do not touch the transfer belt with bare hands.
2. When servicing the transfer belt cleaning unit, be careful not to damage
the edge of the cleaning blade.
3. Apply setting powder or toner to the new cleaning blade.
A175/A176/A177 4-4 SM
Rev. 4/14/97
1.8 CLEANING SECTION
1. When servicing the cleaning section, be careful not to damage the edge
of the cleaning blade.
2. Do not touch the cleaning brush with bare hands.
3. Before disassembling the cleaning section, place a sheet of paper under
it to catch any toner falling from it.
4. Empty the used toner collection bottle at every PM.
5. Apply setting powder to the new cleaning blade.
1.9 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP

1. After cleaning the pre-transfer lamp filter, rub it gently with your finger to
discharge any static electricity on the filter.
1.10 PAPER FEED

1. Do not touch the pick-up, feed, and separation rollers and the friction
pads with bare hands.
2. The side fences and the rear fence of the paper trays should be
positioned correctly to align with the actual paper size. Otherwise, paper
misfeeds may occur.
3. Be careful when reinstalling the paper feed (pick-up, feed, separation)
rollers in the paper tray unit. They are not interchangeable with the feed
rollers of the by-pass feed tray and 3.5 k LCT because the feeding
Service
direction is different.
Tables
4. When actuating the front door safety switch to check the machine
operation while the front doors are open, also actuate the lower front
door safety switch. Otherwise, the paper feed motor does not activate,
causing SC501.
1.11 FUSING UNIT

1. Be careful not to damage the edges of the hot roller strippers or their
tension springs.
2. Do not touch the fusing lamps with bare hands.
3. Make sure that the fusing lamps are positioned correctly (the green
connector must be at the rear) and that they do not touch the inner
surface of the hot roller.
4. The oil supply roller must be level while it is stored, otherwise the silicone
oil in the oil supply roller will leak out.
⇒ Amachine
smeared image appears on the leading edge at about 10 mm on the 1st copy at
installation.
Silicon oil may soak into the surface of the Hot Roller during machine storage. The
silicon oil may stick to the surface of the Pressure Roller when the Hot Roller was is
in contact with the Pressure Roller at installation. The Pressure Roller may slip due
to the oil because the Hot and Pressure Rollers are new.
Therefore, a smeared image may appear on the leading edge at about 10 mm on
the 1st copy. This is because the Hot Roller is rubbing the leading edge of the copy
against the Pressure Roller.
This symptom occurs only at the 1st copy after installation. Make sample copies
and make sure that the symptom does not re-occurred after several copies.
SM 4-5 A175/A176/A177
2. SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
2.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change
modes, and adjust values.
2.1.1 Service Program Access Procedure

1. Press the clear modes key.
2. Enter "107".
3. Hold down the clear/stop key for more than 3 seconds until the service
program menu appears on the touch panel display.
4. Touch a number [A] on the

display to access the desired
function.
This copier has 9 service [D]
program modes
(mode is not used).
Only 5 service program modes [A]
are visible on the touch panel
display at one time. [C]
Use the down key [B] or the up
key [C] to see other service [B]
program mode menus.
2.1.2 To Exit SP Mode

1. Touch the key [D].
A175/A176/A177 4-6 SM
2.1.3 To Return to the Index Menu
[C] [B] [A]
1. Return to the index menu by
touching [A]
on the display. [F]
[D]
[E]
2.1.4 Change the Menu Screen

1. To move to the next page, touch [B].
2. To move to the previous page, touch [C].

NOTE: For the adjustments for which the settings are entered by using
[D], the default value is "00".
Service
Tables
2.1.5 Access to "Copy in SP" Mode
1. Press [F] to
access "Copy in SP" mode. The
LCD changes as shown on the [G]
right.
2. Select the appropriate copy

mode and make trial copies.
3. Return to the SP mode by
pressing [G].
SM 4-7 A175/A176/A177
2.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLE
1 SP ADJUSTMENT
PAGE 1
❶
❷
❸
Item Function Note

Both the TD sensor toner supply target With new developer, do not make any
voltage (VREF) and the TD sensor gain copy before performing the developer
value are set automatically by using new initial setting.
❶ developer.
This mode is required when new
developer is installed or the TD sensor is
replaced.
Starts the process control data initial Perform this program when the following
setting. parts have been replaced (or cleaned).
Drum potential sensor/

❷ Exposure lamp/Drum/
Charge corona wire and casing/
Mirrors/Lamps around the drum/
Charge P.P./RAM etc.
Increases the period to sufficiently heat Perform this only if poor fusing occurs
❸ the pressure roller at power on. just after the power is turned on.
Default: 5 min
Adjusts the fusing temperature Increase only when thick paper is used
(1°C/step). and poor fusing occurs. Default: 185°C
Procedure:
❹ 1) Touch .
2) Enter the appropriate number by using
the number keys.
3) Press the enter key.
A175/A176/A177 4-8 SM
1 SP ADJUSTMENT
PAGE 2
❶
❷
① ⑤
② ⑥
③ ⑦
④ ⑧
Item Function Note

Enables or disables the automatic Select OFF only when a cleaning
❶ charge corona wire cleaning mechanism. mechanism malfunction occurs.
Default: ON
Changes the paper feed clutch on timing Refer to "6.6 Paper Feed Timing
to adjust the paper buckle at the Adjustment" in section 5.
registration roller (1 mm/step). ① First paper feed clutch ON timing at the
first copy
② First paper feed clutch ON timing after
Service
Tables
the first copy.
❷ ③ 2nd paper feed clutch ON timing.
④ 3rd paper feed clutch ON timing.
⑤ 4th paper feed clutch ON timing.
⑥ By-pass feed clutch ON timing.
⑦ Duplex feed clutch ON timing.
⑧ LCT feed clutch ON timing.
SM 4-9 A175/A176/A177
1 SP ADJUSTMENT
PAGE 3 PAGE 4
❶ ❺
❷
❸
❹ ❻
Item Function Note

Changes the ON timing of the Adjustment standard: 0 ± 2 mm
❶ registration clutch (0.5 mm/step).
Changes the OFF timing of the erase Adjustment standard: 3.5 ± 2.5 mm
❷ lamp to adjust the leading edge erase
margin (0.5 mm/step).
Adjusts magnification in the paper feed Perform this adjustment when the optic
❸ direction by adjusting the scanner motor control PCB has been replaced.
speed (0.1%/step). Adjustment standard: 100 ± 1%
Adjusts magnification perpendicular to Perform this adjustment when the optic
the direction of the paper feed. The lens control PCB has been replaced.
❹ position in the full size mode is changed Adjustment standard: 100 ± 1%
(0.1%/step).
Adjusts the lens horizontal stop position Refer to "8.6.2 Side-To-Side Registration
❺ for each paper feed section Adjustment" in Section 5.
(0.1 mm/step).
Adjusts the lens horizontal stop position
❻ to compensate for variations in the side
to side positioning of the original.
A175/A176/A177 4-10 SM
1 SP ADJUSTMENT
PAGE 5 PAGE 6
❶ ❺
❷ ❻
❸ ❼
❹ ❽
Item Function Note

Adjusts the lens position to correct Input only the value marked on the lens.
❶ magnification in enlarge/reduce modes.
Adjusts the 3rd scanner home position to
❷ correct the focus.
❸ Factory use only Do not change the setting.
Adjusts the ADS sensor output to 2.7 ± This mode is also performed during the
❹ 0.1 V while scanning the ADS pattern. process control data initial setting.
Service
Tables
Adjusts the original stop position (thin Refer to the DJF section.
original mode) against the original side
❺ scale in one-sided original mode
(0.5 mm/step).
Adjusts the original stop position against Refer to the DJF section.
❻ the original side scale in two-sided
original mode (0.5 mm/step).
Adjust the original stop position (thick
original mode) against the original side
❼ scale in one sided original mode
(0.5 mm/stop).
Adjust the gap between the 1st original
❽ and 2nd original in combine 2 original
mode (1.3 mm/step).
SM 4-11 A175/A176/A177
1 SP ADJUSTMENT
PAGE 7 PAGE 8
❶ ❺
❷ ❻
❼
❸ ❽
❹ ❾
Item Function Note

Selects toner supply mode. Select "Auto Mode" in the field.
(See the process control section for
❶ details about each supply mode.)
Default: Auto Mode
❷ Factory use only Select "N" in the field.
Changes the toner supply ratio in fixed Be careful, there is no overtoning
❸ toner supply mode. Default: 4% protection system.
Enables and disables the auto process Normally select "Set". Select "Reset"
control (V R, V L, VD corrections). only to check if the cause of the problem
❹ (See the process control section for is related to process control or not.
details.) Default: Set
Inputs the grid bias voltage when auto Enter the setting using the number keys,
process control is disabled or after RAM then touch "Enter".
❺ is cleared (1 V/step).
Default: 870 V
Inputs the development bias voltage Enter the setting using the number keys,
when auto process control is disabled or then touch "Enter".
❻ after RAM is cleared (1 V/step).
Default: 220 V
❼ Factory use only Do not change the setting in the field.
❽ Factory use only Do not change the setting in the field.
❾ Factory use only. Do not change the setting in the field.
A175/A176/A177 4-12 SM
1 SP ADJUSTMENT
PAGE 9 PAGE 10
❶ ❻
❷ ①
❸ ②
❹
❺
Item Function Note

Inputs the exposure lamp voltage when Enter the setting using the number keys,
auto process control is disabled or RAM then touch .
❶ is cleared (0.5 V/step).
Default: 65.0 V
Selects whether or not the transfer Default:
voltage detected in the process control H: Tfr current setting (2nd) x 1.0 x paper
data initialization is used for size compensation
❷ compensation of transfer current output M: Tfr current setting (2nd) x 0.9 x paper
Service
Tables
control. size compensation
L: Tfr current setting (2nd) x 0.8
Adjusts the transfer current for the 1st Standard Data:
side (1 µA/step). 40 µA (A175), 45 µA (others)
❸ Default: 40 µA (A175), 45 µA (others) Enter the setting using the number keys,
then touch .
Adjusts the transfer current for the 2nd Standard Data:
side (1 µA/step). 50 µA (A175), 55 µA (others)
❹ Default: 50 µA (A175), 55 µA (others) Enter the data by using the number keys,
then touch .
Adjusts VSG to 4.0 ± 0.2 V. This mode is also performed during the
❺ process control data initial setting.
Initializes the by-pass paper size sensor. Procedure:
1. Set the by-pass table side fence to the
A4/81/2 x 11 position, then touch
the key ①.
❻ 2. Set the by-pass table side fence to the
A6/51/2 x 81/2 position, then
touch the key ② .
Perform this mode when the by-pass
paper size sensor has been replaced.
SM 4-13 A175/A176/A177
1 SP ADJUSTMENT
PAGE 11 A4/A3 VERSION PAGE 12 T/DLT VERSION
Item Function Note

Adjusts the duplex jogger fence position Press to decrease the distance
for each paper size between the side fences.
(0.3 mm/step). Press to increase the distance
between the side fences.
Procedure:
1. Enter SP mode then press Copy in SP.
Note: Press Copy in SP after changing
the setting to correctly store the
changed setting in memory.
If not, sometimes the setting will
not be stored in memory.
❶ 2. Feed a sheet of paper to the duplex
tray.
3. Take out the duplex unit then check
the paper and jogger fence
position.
4. Return to SP mode (touch the SP
mode key).
5. Touch the or key to
adjust the jogger fence position so that
the distance between the fences
becomes 1 mm wider than the paper
width.
A175/A176/A177 4-14 SM
1 SP ADJUSTMENT
PAGE 13
NOTE: PAGE 16 is for factory use
only.
❶
①
②
❷
PAGE 14 A4/A3 VERSION PAGE 15 T/DLT VERSION
❸ ❸
Service
Tables
Item Function Note
Adjusts the staple position. ① This mode affects only the
Sorter Stapler (horizontal
① Adjusts the vertical and vertical) and the
staple position. Finisher (horizontal only).
❶
② Adjusts the horizontal ②
staple position
(0.5 mm/step).
Adjust the vertical punch ② This mode affects only the

holes position sorter stapler with punch
(1 mm/step). machine.
Changes the duplex positioning roller up timing to Adjust the timing so that
adjust the paper buckle at the separation roller the paper leading edge
❸ (5 ms/step). just touches the separation
belt without any buckle.
SM 4-15 A175/A176/A177
1 SP ADJUSTMENT
PAGE 17
❶
❷
Item Function Note

Selects whether the Taiwanese paper European and Asian versions only
❶ sizes (8 k, 16 k) are detected in the 2nd Not detected: 0 (Default)
tray or not. 8 k, 16 k paper sizes are detected: 1
Selects the machine version. 50 CPM version in France ....... 1
❷ Others (Default) ....................... 0
A175/A176/A177 4-16 SM
2 SP TEST MODE
PAGE 1 PAGE 2
❶ ❺
❷
❸
Item Function Note

Operates the copier without feeding Place sheets of white paper (A3 or 11" x
❶ paper. 17") on the exposure glass.
Operates the copier without feeding Do not operate the machine in this mode
❷ paper or turning on the exposure lamp. for a long time because a lot of toner is
used.
Service
Tables
Disables jam detection. This mode is only effective in the "Copy
❸ (Not effective for peripherals.) in SP" mode.
Indicates the paper width detected by the
❹ by-pass paper size sensor.
Rotates the main and development Toner is supplied under the following
motors and turns on the toner supply conditions.
clutch to supply toner to the development 1. Toner supply ratio: 25%
❺ unit. 2. Repeats 0.5 s ON and 1.5 s, OFF.
The T.D. sensor toner supply target 3. Continues for 30 s.
voltage (VREF) and detected voltage (V T) Check the image after this SP mode is
are indicated. completed.
SM 4-17 A175/A176/A177
2 SP TEST MODE
PAGE 3 PAGE 4
❶ ❹
❺
❷
① ③
❸
②
Item Function Note

Use to check if the original size sensors Status 0 ------ de-activated (no paper)
❶ are correctly activated and de-activated. Status 1 ------ activated (paper)
Use to check if the sensors or switches Status 0 ------ de-activated (no paper)
are correctly activated and de-activated. Status 1 ------ activated (paper)
Access this mode as follows:
1. Touch the input mode key ①.
❷ 2. Enter the sensor/switch/signal
number by using the number keys on
the operation panel. (Refer to the
input check mode on page 4-40.)
3. Touch the enter key ③.
Use to check that the copier electrical Touch to activate and
components are functioning properly. touch to de-activate the electrical
Access this mode as follows: component.
1. Touch the output mode key ② .
❸ 2. Enter the electrical component
number by using the number keys on
the operation panel (refer to the
output check mode on page 4-46).
3. Press the enter key ③.
Operates the DF without copier operation. Procedure:
❹ 1. Set originals on the table.
2. Touch .
Operates the sorter stapler or finisher The sorter operates as if 3 copies are
❺ without copier operation. made from five originals in sort and
staple mode. No stapling is actually done.
A175/A176/A177 4-18 SM
2 SP TEST MODE
PAGE 5
Item Function Note

Operates the toner collection drive After touching the key, the toner
❶ mechanism. collection motor turns on for 1 minute.
Service
Tables
SM 4-19 A175/A176/A177
3 DATA OUT MODE
PAGE 1 PAGE 2
❻
❶
❷ ❼
❸ ❽
❹
❺
Item Function Note

Indicates the drum potential sensor Standard: 0.1 ~ 0.7 V
❶ output when –100 V is applied to the
drum.
Indicates the drum potential sensor Standard: 2.7 V ~ 4.2 V
❷ output when –800 V is applied to the
drum.
Indicates the drum potential when Standard: V R + 770 ± 20 V
❸ detecting the VD pattern.
Indicates the drum potential when Standard: V R + 140 ± 20V
❹ detecting the VL pattern.
Indicates the drum potential when Standard: 0 ~ 200 V
❺ detecting the bare drum surface.
Indicates the charge corona grid bias Works only when auto process control is
voltage decided during process control enabled.
❻ data initial setting. ( SP Adjustment - PAGE 7)
Standard: 870 ~ 1,200 V
Indicates the development bias voltage Works only when auto process control is
decided during process control data enabled.
❼ initial setting. ( SP Adjustment - PAGE 7)
Standard: VR –220 V
Indicates the ID sensor bias voltage Works only when auto process control is
decided during process control data enabled.
❽ initial setting. ( SP Adjustment - PAGE 7)
Standard: 300 V ~ 400 V
NOTE: ❸ ~ ❺ are absolute values.
A175/A176/A177 4-20 SM
3 DATA OUT MODE
PAGE 2 PAGE 3
❸
❹
❶
❷
Item Function Note

Indicates the exposure lamp voltage Works only when auto process control is
(ID Level 4) decided during process enabled ( SP Adjustment - PAGE
❶ control data initial setting. 7.)
Standard: 50 ~ 80 V
Indicates the toner supply level by image
area ratio on the original surface.
❷ This value changes every copy through
fuzzy control.
Service
Tables
Indicates the transfer voltage detected in L: 0 ~ 3 kV
❸ the process control data initialization. M: 3 ~ 5 kV
H: 5 kV ~
Indicates the current toner supply mode: A: Auto Mode
T: Detected Mode (Drum potential sensor
❹ or ID sensor abnormal)
C: Fixed Mode (TD sensor abnormal,
constant mode)
SM 4-21 A175/A176/A177
3 DATA OUT MODE
PAGE 4
Item Function Note

Indicates the TD sensor output: Standard: 0.5 ~ 4.0 V
V T: Current detected voltage
Initial: TD sensor output at last process
control data initial setting.
Previous: Previous detected voltage
❶ during ID sensor
compensation.
V TP: Last detected voltage during ID
sensor compensation.
V REF: Toner supply level target voltage.
Indicates the ID sensor output VSGP is not used for auto image density
V SGP: ID sensor output while detecting control.
the bare drum surface (with dev.
bias and development roller Abnormal condition:
rotation). VSGP < 2.5 V
❷ V SP: ID sensor output while detecting the VSP > 2.5 V
ID sensor pattern image. VSG < 2.5 V
V SG: ID sensor output while detecting the
bare drum surface (without
development bias and without
development roller rotation).
Indicates the drum potential while Standard: 600 ~ 700 V
❸ detecting the ID sensor pattern
(grid voltage = –700 V).
A175/A176/A177 4-22 SM
3 DATA OUT MODE
PAGE 5
❷
❸
❹
Item Function Note

Indicates the ADS sensor output at every Standard: 2.7 ± 0.1 V
scan. Present: Output at last detection.
❶ Initial: Output at ID sensor initial
setting.
Indicates the fusing temperature based Standard: Around 185°C
❷ on the fusing thermistor output.
Indicates the drum temperature based on
❸ the drum thermistor output.
Service
Tables
Indicates the optics temperature based
❹ on the optics thermistor output.
SM 4-23 A175/A176/A177
4 SP SPECIAL FEATURES
PAGE 1
❶
❷
Item Function Setting Default

Selects copy count up or down. Count up
❶
Count down
Counts once or twice when an A3 or 11" Count twice
x 17" copy is made.
❷
Count once
A175/A176/A177 4-24 SM
PAGE 2
❶ [B]
❷ [A]
❸

Enables user code mode. Enable
* See the note below.
❶
Disable
Enables the PM alarm. Enable
❷
Disable
Service
Tables
Selects the PM alarm interval after the
❸ counter was cleared (using PM 120 k
Counter Clear - PAGE 1)
NOTE: 1) To enable user code mode, perform the following procedure.
CAUTION:
When is selected, at least one user code should have been
already entered.
1. Register at least one user code by using user tool No. 8.

2. Enter SP mode then enable the user code mode by selecting .
3. Turn off the main switch.
4. Remove the plastic cap [A] on the right upper cover.
5. Disconnect the key counter short-circuit connector [B].
6. Return the plastic cap [A].
7. Turn on the main switch and check the operation.
SM 4-25 A175/A176/A177
PAGE 3
❶
❷
❸
❹

Enables automatic sort mode selection Enable
when 2 or more is entered in the copy
❶ counter and an original is set on the DJF
feed tray. Disable
Enables automatic feed-out of the last Enable
copy on the duplex tray without copying
❷ when an odd number of originals is set
on the DJF feed tray. Disable
Changes the maximum copy quantity 40
limit in staple mode.
❸ Default: 50
50
Changesthe maximum copy quantity limit 40
in sort mode and in stack mode.
❹ Default: 50
50
A175/A176/A177 4-26 SM
PAGE 4
❶
❷

Enables automatic access to the Enable
border/center erase mode in platen cover
❶ mode.
Disable
Enables automatic selection of a right Enable
margin (5 mm, 0.2") for the duplex back
❷ side when making two-sided copies from
one-sided originals. Disable
Service
Tables
Enables the duplex and sorter function
from the by-pass feed.
The paper size is detected by the
by-pass paper size sensor and
registration sensor (±5 mm).
The following sizes are used for this
mode:
Enable
A3, A4, B4, B5
❸ "11 x 17", 81/2 x 11"
The following modes are available:
Disable
One-sided original to two-sided copy
Two-sided original to two-sided copy
Sort, Stack, Staple, Punch
• Skew problems may occur in duplex

mode.
SM 4-27 A175/A176/A177
PAGE 5
❷
①

Enables the separation of two different
sort or stack jobs into two different blocks
of the bins.
1st block: from 1st to 10th bins, 2nd
block: from 12th to 20th bins.
If a job selected requires 11 bins or
more, 1st to 20th bins are used for the Enable
❶ 1st block.
If a different sort or stack mode is Disable
selected after the 1st sort or stack job is
finished in the 1st block, the 2nd block is
used for the job. After the job, when a
different job is selected again, a
message will appear advising operators
to remove the copy paper from the bins.
Limits user access to User Tools No. 10
and 11 to only those who know the
access code.
Procedure:
❷ 1. Touch the Key.
2. Input the access code with the number
keys.
3. Touch the enter key ①.
*See the caution below.
CAUTION:
After enabling this mode, be sure to instruct the key operator not to
forget the access code.
A175/A176/A177 4-28 SM
PAGE 6

Selects the fusing lower temperature
limit. During a copy run, when the fusing
temperature drops to a certain
temperature, the copy speed will reduce
to keep good fusing conditions. If
customers complain of poor fusing of
copies, change the setting. In standard
mode, CPM down does not occur except
Service
Tables
for the Japanese 70 CPM version.
❶
Standard:
No CPM down
65 CPM at less than 150°C (Japanese
70 CPM version)
High:
40 CPM at less than 150°C
V High:
40 CPM at less than 170°C
Adjusts the trailing edge erase for
transport to the duplex tray to solve the
❷ problem of the paper rolling around the
pressure roller from the duplex feed (1
mm/step).
SM 4-29 A175/A176/A177
PAGE 7 PAGE 8
❶ ❶
PAGE 9
Item Function Note

Selects the paper size for each paper 1. The default is A4 or 81/2 x 11
feed station. sideways.
❶ Refer to section 3 for details of the paper 2. B4 or 81/2 x 14 for LCT is used for the
size change procedure. Japanese version only. Do not select
these sizes.
Holds the service center telephone Entering procedure:
number. This telephone number is 1. Touch .
❷ indicated on the LCD with the SC 2. Enter the phone number by pressing
number when a problem occurs. the number keys.
Holds the copier’s serial number. (Touch if you wish to enter a
hyphen)
❸
3. Touch .
This is for the Japanese version only. Default:
❹ Do not select "post card".
A175/A176/A177 4-30 SM
PAGE 10 PAGE 11
❶ ❸
❷

Selects the staple mode for the 1st job Enable
when the staple mode is selected for the
❶ 2nd job in the pre-set mode.
Disable
The original size detection system for
this model cannot distinguish between Enable
A4 and 81/2 x 11. This mode enables
❷ recognition of A4 and 81/2 x 11 originals
Service
Tables
as A4 size for the A4/A3 version or as Disable
81/2 x 11 for the LT/DLT version.
Indicates the part number, with ROM
❸ suffixes, on each PCB.
*See the note below.
NOTE: Only the production date is indicated for the operation panel
(guidance) ROMs.
SM 4-31 A175/A176/A177
6 JAM/SC COUNTERS
PAGE 1
Item Function Note

Indicates the total number of Press to scroll up.
occurrences of each SC code.
Press to scroll down.
❶ See Section 6 for details of each SC
code.
The counters for SCs that have not
occurred are not displayed.
A175/A176/A177 4-32 SM
6 JAM/SC COUNTERS
PAGE 2 PAGE 3
❶
❷
❸ ❹
PAGE 4
Service
Tables
Item Function Note
Indicates the total number of jams in the
❶ copier and all peripherals.
❷ copier only.
Indicates the total number of jams at Locations:
each location.
Indicates the total number of jams for

❹ each feed station.
Indicates the total number of jams at
❺ each location in the DF.
❻ DF.
SM 4-33 A175/A176/A177
7 COPY COUNTERS
PAGE 1 PAGE 2
❶ ❺
❷
❸
❹ ❻
Item Function Note

Indicates the total main motor rotation
❶ time.
Indicates the total number of originals fed
❷ by the DF.
❸ Indicates the total number of copies.
Indicates the total number of copies for
❹ each paper size.
❺ each magnification.
❻ each edit image mode.
A175/A176/A177 4-34 SM
7 COPY COUNTERS
PAGE 3 PAGE 4
❶ ❶
PAGE 5 PAGE 6
❸ ❺
Service
Tables
Item Function Note
❶ each copy mode.
Indicates the total number related to
❷ consumables.
Indicates the total number of staples for
❸ each staple position.
❹ Indicates the total number of punches.
Indicates the total number of copies
❺ broken down by paper feed station.
SM 4-35 A175/A176/A177
8 COUNTER CLEAR
PAGE 1

PAGE 2
Item Function Note

Clears all SC counters. Procedure to clear:
1. Touch .
Clears all paper jam counters.
The display changes as shown above
Clears all original jam counters. right.
Clears all copy counters except the total 2. Touch .
copy counter. (Touch to cancel.)
Clears all counters (~) except the The display returns to the one shown
above left and the beeper sounds four
total copy counter.
times.
NOTE: The total copy counter can be cleared only by the RAM clear
procedure. Test copies in the factory increment the initial total copy
counter in SP mode. Therefore, the start count is not zero.
A175/A176/A177 4-36 SM
9 PM COUNTER CLEAR
PAGE 1
PAGE 2
Service
Tables
PAGE 3
Item Function Note

1. Indicates the total number of copies Procedure to clear:
since the last PM (PM counter). 1. Touch .
2. Clears the PM counter. The display changes as shown above
1. Indicates the total number of copies right.
since the last PM for each unit 2. Touch .
(unit counter). (Touch to cancel.)
2. Clears each unit counter. The display returns to the one shown
above left.
SM 4-37 A175/A176/A177
9 PM COUNTER CLEAR
PAGE 4
PAGE 5
Item Function Note

1. Indicates the total number of copies Procedure to clear:
since the last PM for each unit. 1. Touch .
(unit counter) The display changes as shown above
2. Clears each unit counter. right.
2. Touch .
(Touch to cancel.)
The display returns to the one shown
above left.
A175/A176/A177 4-38 SM
10 MEMORY CLEAR
PAGE 1
Item Function Note

Returns all settings to the default settings. Procedure to clear:
1. Touch and open the door.
The display changes as shown above
right.
2. Touch .
(Touch to cancel.)
The display returns to the one shown
above left and the beeper sounds
Service
Tables
twice.
3. Turn the main switch off and on.

After clearing all memory, do at least the
following:
1. Perform the process control data initial
setting.
2. Install new developer and then perform
the Toner Density sensor (Developer)
initial setting.
3. Input the Lens Error Correction setting
SM 4-39 A175/A176/A177
2.3 SENSOR/SWITCH/SIGNAL DATA CHECK (INPUT MODE)
– How to check the sensor/switch/signal –
2) Enter "107"
3) Hold down the clear/stop key for more than 3 seconds.
2. Touch [A] on the display to

access SP test mode.
[A]
3. Touch [B] on the display

[B]
twice.
NOTE: Many input mode checks will

require specific copier
operations to be selected.
For this "copy in SP mode"
may be used.
4. 1) Touch [C].
2) Enter the input
sensor/switch/signal number
by using the number
keys (refer to the table on the
following pages). [D]
3) Press the Enter key [D].
[C]
A175/A176/A177 4-40 SM
Input Status
Sensor/Switch/|Signal
No 0 1
1 Registration Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
2 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
3 Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
4 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
5 1st Tray Set Switch (A175 only) Not set Set
6 By-pass Paper End Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
7 2nd Paper End Paper detected Paper not detected
8 3rd Paper End Paper detected Paper not detected
9 Built-in LCT Tray Down Key Pressed Not pressed
10 2nd Paper Near End Sensor Not near end Near end
11 3rd Paper Near End Sensor Not near end Near end
12 Built-in LCT Paper Set Paper detected Paper not detected
13 2nd Paper Size Switch (All SW) Set Not set
14 2nd Tray Set Detection Not set Set
15 3rd Tray Set Switch (4-tray version only) Not set Set
Built-in LCT Set Detection/4th Tray Set
16 Not set Set
Switch
17 1st Paper Feed Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
18 2nd Paper Feed Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
Service
Tables
19 3rd Paper Feed Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
20 4th Paper Feed Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
21 2nd Lift Sensor Not lifted Lifted
22 3rd Lift Sensor Not lifted Lifted
Built-in LCT Tray Down Sensor/4th Lift
23 Tray down Tray not down
Sensor
24 Fusing Set Detection. Not set Set
25 Drum Unit Set Detection Not set Set
26 Right Tandem Paper End Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
27 Left Tandem Paper End Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
28 Right Tandem Tray Set Detection Not set Set
29 Left Tandem Tray Set Detection Not set Set
Rear Fence Return Sensor Not at return
30 At return position
position
31 Rear Fence HP Sensor Not at HP At HP
32 Base Plate Down Sensor (Tandem) Not down Down
33 1st Paper Near End Sensor (Tandem) Not at near end Near end
34 1st Lift Sensor (Tandem) Not lifted Lifted
35 Side Fence HP Sensor At HP Not at HP
36 3.5 k LCT Paper End Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
37 3.5 k LCT Set Detection Not set Set
38 3.5 k LCT Lift Sensor Not lifted Lifted
39 3.5 k LCT Tray Down Key Not pressed Pressed
40 3.5 k LCT Feed Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
41 3.5 k LCT Tray Down Sensor Tray not down Tray down
SM 4-41 A175/A176/A177
Input Status
No 0 1
42 3.5 k LCT Door Switches Closed Open
43 3.5 k LCT Paper Position Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
44 Duplex Jogger HP Sensor Not at HP At HP
45 Duplex Entrance Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
46 Duplex Transport Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
47 Duplex Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
48 Duplex Unit Set Detection Not set Set
49 Duplex Paper End Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected
50 Toner End Sensor Toner present No toner
51 Toner Overflow Switch No overflow Overflow
52 By-Pass Table Switch Closed Open
53 Front Door Safety Switch Closed Open
54 Toner Collection Bottle Set Switch Not set Set
55 By-Pass Feed Motor Lock Detection Not detected Detected
56 Development Motor Lock Detection Not detected Detected
57 Main Motor Lock Detection Not detected Detected
58 Not used — —
59 Paper Feed Motor Lock Detection Not detected Detected
Fusing/Duplex Drive Motor Lock
60 Not detected Detected
Detection
By-pass Paper Feed Motor Lock
61 Not detected Detected
Detection
62 Duplex Paper Guide Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected
63 Not used — —
64 Not used — —
3.5 k LCT Paper Near End Sensor Paper not detected
65 Paper detected
(Near end)
66 Guide Plate Position Sensor Closed Open
67 3.5 k LCT Motor Lock Not detected Detected
68 Side Fence Closed Detection
Input Nos. 69 ~ 90 are not used.
91 Auto Response Sensor Not detected Detected
92 Key Counter Connector Open Short
Entrance Sensor (S/S) Paper detected Paper not detected
101
Entrance Sensor (Finisher) Paper detected Paper not detected
Proof Exit Sensor (S/S) Paper detected Paper not detected
102
Exit Sensor (Finisher) Paper detected Paper not detected
Jam Sensor (Phototransistor) (S/S) Paper detected Paper not detected
103
Shift Tray Half Turn Sensor (Finisher) At HP Not at HP
Bin Sensor (Phototransistor) (S/S) Paper detected Paper not detected
104
Stack Height Sensor 2 (Finisher) At HP Not at HP
Bin HP Sensor (S/S) Not at HP At HP
105
Stack Height Sensor 1 (Finisher) Not at HP At HP
A175/A176/A177 4-42 SM
Input Status
No 0 1
Wheel Sensor (S/S) Not interrupted Interrupted
106 Shift Tray Lower Limit Sensor (Finisher) Not at lowest
At lowest position
position
Bin Rear Plate Release Sensor (S/S) Not at release
At release position
107 position
Jogger Unit Entrance Sensor (Finisher) Paper detected Paper not detected
Bin Rear Plate HP Sensor (S/S) Not at HP At HP
108
Jogger Unit Paper Sensor (Finisher) Paper not detected Paper detected
Jogger HP Sensor (S/S) Not at HP At HP
109
Jogger HP Sensor (Finisher) Not at HP At HP
Grip HP Sensor (S/S) Not at HP At HP
110
Staple Unit HP Sensor (Finisher) Not at HP At HP
Staple Unit HP Sensor (S/S) Not at HP At HP
111
Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor (Finisher) At HP Not at HP
Staple HP Sensor (S/S) At HP Not at HP
112
Staple Hammer HP Sensor (Finisher) At HP Not at HP
Staple End Sensor (S/S) Present Empty
113
Staple End Sensor (Finisher) At HP Not at HP
Paper Sensor (S/S) Paper detected Paper not detected
114
Service
Tables
Not Used — —
Door Safety Switch (S/S) Closed Open
115
Front Door Safety Switch (Finisher) Closed Open
Sorter Main Motor Encoder
116 — —
(S/S)
Punch Unit Set Detection (S/S with
117 Not Detected Detected
punch version)
Punch Home Position Sensor (S/S with
118 At HP Not at HP
punch version)
Punch Rubbish (Waste) Overflow Sensor
119 Not Overflow Overflow
(S/S with punch version)
120 Cartridge Set Sensor (S/S) Cartridge not Set Cartridge Set
121 Staple Unit Set Detection (S/S) Not Detected Detected
Staple Unit Pull-out Position Sensor (S/S) Not at Pull-out
122 At Pull-out Position
Position
131 Scanner HP Sensor Not at HP At HP
132 Lens Vertical HP Sensor At HP Not at HP
133 Lens Horizontal HP Sensor At HP Not at HP
134 3rd Scanner HP Sensor Not at HP At HP
135 Platen Cover Position Sensor 1 Not interrupted Interrupted
136 Platen Cover Position Sensor 2 Not interrupted Interrupted
137 Optics Thermistor Low Temp. High Temp.
Not Used (DJF) — —
151
One Turn Sensor (RDH) At HP Not at HP
SM 4-43 A175/A176/A177
Input Status
No 0 1
Original Set SN (DJF) Original not
Original detected
152 detected
Pulse Generator Sensor (RDH) Interrupted Not interrupted
Original Feed SN (DJF) Original not
Original detected
detected
153
Original Set Sensor (RDH) Original not
Original detected
detected
154 Recycle Sensor (RDH) Original not
Original detected
detected
Lift Switch (DJF) Down Sifted
155 Original Width Sensor (RDH) Original not
Original detected
detected
Feed-out Motor Encoder Pulse (DJF) — —
156 Registration Sensor (RDH) Original not
Original detected
detected
Belt Drive Motor Encoder Pulse (DJF) — —
157 Inverter Sensor (RDH) Original not
Original detected
detected
Feed-in Motor Encoder Pulse (DJF) — —
158 Feed-out Sensor (RDH) Original not
Original detected
detected
Registration SN 2 (DJF) Original not
Original detected
159 detected
Not used (RDH) — —
Original Width SN 1 (DJF) Original not
Original detected
detected
160
Transport Belt Motor Encoder Pulse
— —
(RDH)
Original detected
161 detected
Feed-in Motor Encoder Pulse (RDH) — —
Original detected
162 detected
Inverter Motor Encoder Pulse (RDH) — —
Registration SN 1 (DJF) Original not
Original detected
163 detected
Feed-out Motor Encoder Pulse (RDH) — —
Feed-out SN (DJF) Original not
Original detected
164 detected
Lift Switch (RDH) Down Lifted
Not used (DJF) — —
165
RDH Position Sensor (RDH) Lifted Down
DF Position SN (DJF) Open Closed
166
Feed Cover Switch (DJF) Closed Open
167
A175/A176/A177 4-44 SM
Input Status
No 0 1
168
Original Length SN (DJF) Interrupted Not interrupted
169
Service
Tables
SM 4-45 A175/A176/A177
2.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT CHECK (OUTPUT MODE)
NOTE: The motors keep turning in this mode regardless of the upper or
lower limit sensor signals. To prevent mechanical or electrical
damage, do not keep an electrical component on for a long time.
– How to check the sensor/switch/signal –

2) Enter "107".
3) Hold down the clear/stop key for more than 3 seconds.
2. Touch [A] on the display

to access SP Test mode.
[A]
3. Touch [A] on the display

twice.
[A]
A175/A176/A177 4-46 SM
4. 1) Touch [B].
2) Enter the electrical component
number by using the number
keys on the operation panel.
(Refer to the table on the [C]
following pages.)
3) Press the Enter key [C].
4) Press [D] to activate
and press [E] to
de-activate the electrical
component.
[B] [D] [E]
NOTE: When listening for the activation sound, keep the front door open.
If the front door is closed, when is touched, mechanical
noise caused by home positioning obscures the actual
de-activation sound.
Service
Tables
SM 4-47 A175/A176/A177
Output Check Mode Table
Output No. Electrical Component
1 Not used
2 Junction Solenoid
3 LCT Feed Clutch
4 By-pass Feed Clutch
5 Duplex Transport Clutch
6 Toner Supply Clutch
7 By-pass Pick-up Solenoid
8 Guide Plate Solenoid
9 LCT Pick-up Solenoid
10 Toner Bottle Motor
11 Duplex Transport Clutch
12 Pressure Arm Solenoid
13 Duplex Positioning Solenoid
14 LCT Down Key LED
15 Not used
16 Main Motor Forward
17 Main Motor Reverse
18 Fusing/Duplex Drive Motor
19 Development Motor
20 By-pass Feed Motor - Low Speed
21 By-pass Feed Motor - High Speed (First Copy from 1st feed tray)
22 LCT Motor - Up
23 LCT Motor - Down
24 Paper Feed Motor - Low
25 Paper Feed Motor - High (First Copy from 1st feed tray)
26 Anti-condensation Heater Relay
27 1st Pick-up Solenoid
28 2nd Pick-up Solenoid
29 3rd Pick-up Solenoid
30 4th Pick-up Solenoid
31 1st Pressure Solenoid
32 2nd Pressure Solenoid
33 3rd Pressure Solenoid
34 4th Pressure Solenoid
35 Toner Collection Motor - High
36 Toner Collection Motor - Low
37 Tandem Lock Solenoid
38 1st Lift Motor (Up)
39 1st Lift Motor (Down)
40 2nd Lift Motor (Up)
41 2nd Lift Motor (Down)
42 3rd Lift Motor (Up)
43 3rd Lift Motor (Down)
A175/A176/A177 4-48 SM
44 4th Lift Motor (Up)
45 4th Lift Motor (Down)
46 Rear Fence Drive Motor (Counterclockwise)
47 Rear Fence Drive Motor (Clockwise)
48 1st Paper Feed Clutch
49 2nd Paper Feed Clutch
50 3rd Paper Feed Clutch
51 4th Paper Feed Clutch
52 Registration Clutch
53 Main Power Relay
54 Erase Lamp
55 Charge Wire Cleaner Motor
56 Transfer Belt Positioning Solenoid
57 Potential Calibration Mode (–100 V)
58 Potential Calibration Mode (–800 V)
59 QL/PTL
60 Charge Corona/Grid (Copying)
61 Charge Corona/Grid (ID Sensor Pattern)
62 Development Bias (Copying)
Service
63 Development Bias (Non-image Area)
Tables
64 Development Bias (ID Sensor Pattern)
65 Transfer Current
66 Exhaust Fan - Low
67 Exhaust Fan - High
68 Built-in LCT (Up)
69 Built-in LCT (Down)
70 Optics Cooling Fan-2
71 AC Drive Cooling Fan
72 Duplex Cooling Fan
73 Scanner Drive Motor Cooling Fan
74 Drum Exhaust Fan - High
75 Drum Exhaust Fan - Low
76 LCT Feed Motor - High
77 LCT Feed Motor -Low
78 Drum Grounding Relay OFF (Float)
79 Not Used
80 Main Switch Off Solenoid
Output Nos. 81 ~ 100 are not used
101 Main Motor: Proof mode (S/S)/Transport Drive Motor (Finisher)
Main Motor: Sort mode (S/S)
102
Not Used (Finisher)
103 Exit Motor (S/S)/Exit Drive Motor (Finisher)
Turn Gate Solenoid (S/S)
104
Junction Gate Solenoid (Finisher)
SM 4-49 A175/A176/A177
Bin Drive Motor (S/S)
105
Positioning Roller Solenoid (Finisher)
Jogger Motor (S/S)
106
Jogger Motor (Finisher)
Bin Rear Plate Drive Motor (S/S)
107
Shift Motor (Finisher)
Grip Motor (S/S)
108
Stack Feed-out Motor (Finisher)
Grip Positioning Solenoid (S/S)
109
Shift Tray Lift Motor (Finisher)
Grip Solenoid (S/S)
110
Not used (Finisher)
Staple Unit Drive Motor (S/S)
111
Staple Drive Motor (Finisher)
Staple Motor (S/S)
112
Stapler Motor (Finisher)
Punch Motor (S/S)
113
Not used (Finisher)
Output Nos. 114 ~130 are not used
131 Optics Cooling Fan
Output Nos. 132 ~ 151 are not used
152 Not used (DJF)/Original Gate Solenoid (RDH)
153 Not used (DJF)/Inverter Solenoid (RDH)
154 "READY" LED (DJF)/Push Plate Solenoid (RDH)
155 "AUTO" LED (DJF)/Feed-in Clutch (RDH)
156 Not used (DJF)/Not used (RDH)
157 Feed-in motor (DJF)/Not used (RDH)
158 Feed-out Motor (DJF)/Feed-in Motor (RDH)
159 Not used (DJF)/(RDH)
160 Belt Drive Motor (DJF)/Transport Belt Motor (RDH)
162 Separation Solenoid - SADF (DJF)/Inverter Motor (RDH)
163 Not used (DJF)/Feed-out Motor (RDH)
165 Stopper Solenoid (DJF)/Friction Belt Motor (RDH)
166 Inverter Solenoid (DJF)/"READY" LED ON (RDH)
167 Feed-In Clutch (DJF)/Not used (RDH)
A175/A176/A177 4-50 SM
2.5 USER TOOLS
This mode is for the key operators in charge of this copier. The operator can
change or set the copier’s default settings using the following user tools.
2.5.1 How To Access The User Tools

2. Hold down the Clear/Stop key for more than 3 seconds until the User
Tool Menu appears on the touch panel display.
3. Select the menu number to use by touching the touch panel display.
This copier has 10 user tools for the U.S.A. version and
12 user tools for the European version. You can see 5
user tools on the touch panel display at the same time.
Service
Tables
Use these keys to see the rest of the user tool menu.
Use to exit the user tools.
Use to return to the user tool menu display.
4. Additional user tool information will be found in the "Changing The

Copier’s Settings", section of the Operating Instructions.
SM 4-51 A175/A176/A177
2.6 TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY POSITION ADJUSTMENT
Due to inaccurate display position adjustment, it is possible that the touch
panel sometimes does not respond if the key is touched.
In this case, precisely adjust the touch panel display position as follows:
1. Press the interrupt key then hold down the clear/stop key for more than
three seconds.
[B]
[A]
2. Follow the guidance on the LCD.

3. Touch the upper left corner [A].
4. Touch the lower right corner [B].
NOTE: When touching the corner, do not touch inaccurately with finger
but touch the corner precisely using a sharp object such as a
pen (do not press too hard to avoid any damage).
5. Touch a few positions to confirm that the touch panel is correctly
adjusted.
NOTE: When a part of the touch panel display is touched, the
responding position indicates a "+" mark. If this "+" mark is more
than 7 mm away from the actually touched point, press the
clear/stop key and start the adjustment from the beginning.
6. If the adjustment is correct, press the enter key "#".
NOTE: Do not skip this step, otherwise, the result of the latest
adjustment is ignored.
A175/A176/A177 4-52 SM
Service
Tables
SM 4-53 A175/A176/A177
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
3.1 PM TABLE
NOTE: The numbers mentioned for PM intervals indicate the number of
copies.
Symbol key: C: Clean R: Replace L: Lubricate I: Inspect
EM 120 K 240 K 360 K NOTE
OPTICS
Mirrors, Lens, Reflectors Cotton pad with water, or blower
C C C
brush.
Exposure Glass C C C C Alcohol or glass cleaner.
Platen Cover Sheet Alcohol or water (replace if
C R R R
necessary).
Scanner Guide Rail C C C Dry cloth.
ADS, Original Size Sensor C C C C Blower brush.
Toner Shield Filter Dry cloth. Discharge any static
C C C C
before installation.
Scanner/Lens Guide Rods L L L Refer to NOTE 1.
Scanner Drive Motor Replace at 5000 k (70 CPM
machine only)
PAPER FEED (for each paper feed station)

Paper Feed Rollers Water. Replace pick-up, feed,
C R R R
(Paper Trays) and separation rollers as a set.
Paper Feed Rollers Water, replace pick-up, feed, and
C R R R
(By-pass/LCT) separation rollers as a set.
Paper Feed Guide Plate C C C Alcohol.
Registration Sensor C C C Blower brush.
Vertical Transport Rollers C C C Water
Paper Dust Cleaner C C C Dry cloth or blower brush
Registration Rollers C C C Water or alcohol.
Vertical Transport Guide Refer to NOTE 2.
L
Pin
AROUND THE DRUM

Corona Wires C R R R Dry cloth or water.
Wire Cleaner R
Cleaner Drive Gear L Refer to NOTE 3.
Charge Grid R R R
VD, VL, ADS Pattern C C C C Dry cloth.
Drum Grounding Terminal Replace at 1.2 M.
Lubricate with KS660 (G0049668)
at replacement.
End Blocks and Casing C C C C Water.
Pre Transfer Lamp Filter Dry cloth and blower brush.
C C C C Discharge any static before
installation.
Quenching Lamp C C C C Dry cloth and blower brush.
A175/A176/A177 4-54 SM
Rev. 4/17/97
EM 120 K 240 K 360 K NOTE
ID Sensor C C C C Blower brush.
Erase Lamp Unit C C C C Dry cloth.
Pick-off Pawls C C R C
Drum Potential Sensor C C C C Dry cloth or blower brush.
Cleaning Blade R R R
Cleaning Seal C C C Replace if necessary.
Cleaning Brush R
Toner Collection Bottle C C C C Empty used toner.
Cleaning Drive Section L Refer to NOTE 4.
DEVELOPMENT UNIT
Developer R R R
Upper Seal C C C
Side Seals C C C
Air Filter R R R Vacuum cleaner
Toner Bottle Holder C C C C Dry cloth.
Toner Receiver C C C C Dry cloth.
Toner Bottle Holder L L L Refer to NOTE 5.
TRANSFER BELT UNIT
Service
Tables
Transfer Belt C C R C Dry cloth, clean both sides.
Cleaning Blade R R R
Belt Drive/Guide/ Dry cloth
C C C
Bias Rollers
FUSING/PAPER EXIT UNIT

Hot Roller C R C Replace if necessary.
Pressure Roller and Replace if necessary.
C R C
Pressure Roller Bearings
Stripper Pawls C C R C Replace.
Fusing Entrance and Exit Suitable solvent.
C C C
Guides
⇒ Fusing Thermistor I I I Replace if necessary.
Transport/Exit Rollers C Water.
Hot Roller Isolating Refer to NOTE 6.
L
Bushing
Oil Supply Roller R R R
Pressure Roller Cleaning
R R R
Roller
Oil Supply Cleaning Roller R R R
Oil Supply Cleaning Blade R R R
DUPLEX (for duplex copies)

Feed Roller R R R
Separation Belts R R R
Pick-up/Transport Rollers C C C
SM 4-55 A175/A176/A177
EM 120 K 240 K 360 K NOTE
Positioning Pins/Holes L L L Refer to NOTE 7.
OTHERS
Ozone Filter R
Drive Belts I I I Replace if necessary.
Exit Sensor C C C Blower brush.
Development Drive Gear C
Dust Protection Filter R 70 CPM machine only.
SORTER STAPLER (A606)

Rollers C C C C Water.
Bins C C C Water.
Bushings L L L Use Launa oil or equivalent.
Gears L L L Use Grease-501.
Stapler Replace after 200 k staples.
Punch Unit Replace after 1000 k copies with
punch.
Exit Mylars Replace after 1000 k copies.
RECIRCULATING DOCUMENT HANDLER (A607)

Transport Belts Belt cleaner. Replace if
C C R C
necessary.
Feed Roller C R R R Alcohol. Replace if necessary.
Separation Belt C R R R Alcohol. Replace if necessary.
FINISHER
Rollers C C C Water.
Bushings L L L Use Launa oil or equivalent.
Gears L L L Use Grease-501.
Stapler Replace after 200 k staples.
DUAL JOB FEEDER (for originals) (A610) Estimated C/O is 2.5.

EM 48 K 96 K 144 K NOTE
Transport Belt Belt cleaner. Replace if
C R R R
necessary.
Pick-up Roller C C C C Alcohol. Replace if necessary.
Feed Roller C R R R Alcohol. Replace if necessary.
Separation Belts C R R R Alcohol. Replace if necessary.
Sensors C C C C Blower brush.
A175/A176/A177 4-56 SM
The location of the parts which should be lubricated at PM, are shown in the
following figures:
NOTE 1: Scanner/Lens Guide Rods

1. Lubricate the horizontal and vertical lens guide rods [A] with Launa Oil
every 120 k copies.
[A]
[A]
Service
Tables
2. Lubricate the third scanner guide rod [B] with Launa oil every 120 k
copies.
[B]
SM 4-57 A175/A176/A177
NOTE 2: Vertical Transport Guide Lock Pin
1. Lubricate the vertical transport guide lock pin [A] with Mobil Temp. 78
every 240 k copies.
[A]
NOTE 3: Charge Wire Cleaner Drive Gears

1. Open the drive motor cover [B] (2 screws).
NOTE: When re-installing the cover,
do not tighten the screws
too much.
2. Lubricate the charge wire cleaner drive gears [C] with Grease G501
every 240 k copies.
[B]
[C]
A175/A176/A177 4-58 SM
NOTE 4: Cleaning Drive Section
1. Lubricate the cleaning blade shift cam [A] with Grease G501 every 240 k
copies.
[A]
2. Lubricate the cleaning section drive gear [B] with Grease G501 every
240 k copies.
Service
Tables
[B]
NOTE 5: Toner Bottle Holder

1. Lubricate the toner bottle drive gears [C] with Grease G501 every 120 k
copies.
2. Lubricate the toner bottle holder [D] with Mobil Temp. 78 every 120 k
copies.
[C]
[C]
[D]
SM 4-59 A175/A176/A177
NOTE 6: Fusing Section
1. Clean the surface of the fusing thermistor [A] where touching the hot
roller at every PM.
[A]
2. Lubricate the inner and outer surface of the isolating bushing [B] with
BARRIERTA L55/2 grease every 240 k copies.
[B]
[B]
NOTE 7: Duplex Unit

1. Lubricate the two positioning pins [C] and two positioning holes [D] with
Mobil Temp. 78 every 120 k copies.
[C]
[D]
[C]
[D]
A175/A176/A177 4-60 SM
NOTE 8: Development Unit
1. Lubricate the bias terminal (sleeve roller shaft) [A] with Grease: KS660:
SHIN-ETSU
[A]
NOTE: Use only conductive grease, otherwise bias voltage will not be
properly applied to the development rollers.
Service
Tables
SM 4-61 A175/A176/A177
3.2 EXPLANATION OF REGULAR PM
Item Explanation
Optics Unit Mirrors, Lens, Stains on any part of the optics unit result in
Reflector, Exposure black lines or areas of decreased sharpness on
Glass, Platen Cover, the copy. Periodic cleaning is required. The
Toner Shield Filter exposure glass and the platen cover sheet must
also be cleaned. If stains on the platen cover
sheet cannot be removed, it must be replaced.
Exposure Lamp Deterioration of the exposure lamp affects the
copy. Check the lamp at regular intervals and
replace if discolored.
VD, VL, and ADS If paper dust or toner accumulates on the VD,
Patterns VL, and ADS patterns, the image density cannot
be controlled correctly. This results in light or
dark copies. Clean these patterns at regular
intervals.
Transfer Belt Transfer Belt A dirty or old transfer belt causes poor image
Unit transfer due to its weak chargeability. Clean
(both front and rear sides) or replace the transfer
belt at regular intervals.
Belt Drive/ Dirty rollers shift the transfer belt to the front or
Guide/Bias rear.
Rollers
Cleaning Blade A dirty or worn out cleaning blade will cause
toner to adhere to the rear side of the copy. The
blade must be replaced at regular intervals.
Paper Feed, Paper Feed Roller, This machine uses paper trays, a by-pass feed
Registration Pick-up Roller, table, and an LCT for paper feeding. If paper
Separation Roller dust adheres to the paper feed rollers or if these
rollers are worn out, paper may not feed
correctly, or skewing may result. Replacing is
required at regular intervals.
Registration Roller A dirty registration roller can cause paper to
register incorrectly, skew, or jam. Cleaning is
required at regular intervals.
Paper Dust Cleaner Too much paper dust caught in the cleaner
causes paper dust overflow. This results in early
deterioration of the cleaning blade, fusing rollers,
etc. Clean at regular intervals.
Registration Sensor A dirty registration sensor causes paper jams.
Clean at regular intervals.
A175/A176/A177 4-62 SM
Item Explanation
Around the Charge Corona Wires/ Dirty charge corona wires may cause uneven
Drum Wire Cleaner/ image density. They should be replaced at
Charge Corona Grid regular intervals.
End Blocks Toner tends to accumulate on the corona end
blocks. This can result in a high voltage leak.
Clean end blocks at regular intervals.
Drum Grounding Too much drum grounding terminal deterioration
Terminal causes poor drum grounding. This results in dirty
background and drum potential sensor
calibration errors.
QL If toner accumulates on the QL, dirty background
or a repeating negative image may result.
Clean the QL at regular intervals.
PTL If paper dust or toner accumulates on the PTL
filter, its efficiency may be reduced. This can
cause toner to be reattracted to the drum during
transfer, reducing image density. Clean the PTL
filter at regular intervals.
ID Sensor If too much paper dust or toner accumulates on
the ID sensor, the toner density cannot be
controlled correctly. This results in light copy or
over toning. Clean this sensor at regular intervals.
Erase Lamp If toner accumulates on the erase lamp, dirty
Service
background may occur in the erased area that
Tables
becomes progressively worse during long copy
runs. Also this affects sensor pattern detection,
causing incorrect toner density and exposure
lamp control.
Clean this lamp at regular intervals.
Cleaning Blade A dirty or worn out cleaning blade will cause
black lines on copies or scratches on the drum.
The blade must be replaced at regular intervals.
Cleaning Brush A worn out cleaning brush will not clean the
drum surface effectively, resulting in dirty
background and damage to the cleaning blade.
Replace at regular intervals.
Toner Collection Bottle If the toner collection bottle becomes full, a
service call condition occurs and copying is
disabled. Empty the toner collection bottle at
regular intervals.
Pick-off Pawls After long usage, the point that touches the drum
becomes worn and the area contacting the drum
is increased. This may cause drum filming,
resulting in vertical gray lines on the copy.
Development Developer The tribo-chargeability of overused developer
Unit decreases. This results in toner scattering.
Developer must be replaced at regular intervals.
Bias Terminal Less lubricant increases the friction between the
bias terminal and the bias receptacle. This may
degrade the terminal.
SM 4-63 A175/A176/A177
Item Explanation
Fusing Unit Thermistor If toner accumulates on the thermistor, fusing
temperature control may not be accurate. Clean
the thermistor at regular intervals.
Stripper Pawls Toner or dust adhering to the stripper pawls can
cause a paper jam. Clean or replace the pawls
at regular intervals.
Fusing Entrance and Toner piling up on the guide plate will cause dirty
Exit Guides background on the copy or paper jam. Clean the
guide plate at regular intervals.
Oil Supply Roller If the oil inside is used up, toner and paper
powder adheres to the surface of the hot roller
resulting in hot-offset problems.
Pressure Roller An excessively dirty cleaning roller applies a
Cleaning Roller heavy load to the fusing/duplex drive roller,
resulting in SC520.
Oil Supply Roller An excessively dirty cleaning roller cannot clean
Cleaning Roller foreign substance off the oil supply roller. This
causes stains on the copy.
Oil Supply Cleaning An excessively dirty cleaning blade cannot clean
Blade foreign substance off the oil supply roller. This
causes stains on the copy.
Duplex Unit Separation/Feed/ If paper dust adheres to the
Transport Rollers and separation/feed/transport rollers and the
Separation Belts separation belts, paper may not feed correctly,
or skewing may result. Replacement is required
at regular intervals.
Others Ozone Filter When an ozone filter deteriorates, ozone
produced in the copier will not be absorbed,
causing headaches, irritation, or other
discomfort. Replace at regular intervals.
Dust Protection Filter After the dust protection filter has absorbed a lot
(70 CPM version only) of foreign material, sufficient cool air cannot be
supplied by the drum cooling fan. Toner may be
clogged in the cleaning unit.
DJF Transport Belt A dirty transport belt can leave stains on copies.
Replace the belt at regular intervals.
Pick-up Roller, Feed When dirty, these rollers and this belt can leave
Roller, Separation Belt stains on the copy paper. Also, original misfeeds
or multi-feeds may occur. Replace these parts at
regular intervals.
RDH Transport Belt A dirty transport belt can leave stains on copies.
Clean or replace the belt at regular intervals.
Feed Roller Separation When dirty, these rollers and these belts can
Belts leave stains on the copier. Also, original
misfeeds or multi-feeds may occur.
Replace these parts at regular intervals.
A175/A176/A177 4-64 SM
3.3 REGULAR PM PROCEDURE Every 120 k
Every 240 k or 360 k
1. Make a copy Make a copy of an O-S-A3 test chart at manual
image density level 4.
2. Optics (every 120 k) 2-1. Clean the mirrors, lens and reflectors by
using a soft cloth, cotton pad with water, or
a blower brush.
2-2. Clean the exposure glass with alcohol or
water.
2-3. Clean the scanner guide rail with a dry
cloth.
2-4. Clean the magnification guide rail with a
dry cloth.
2-5. Clean the ADS sensor and the original
width and length sensors with a blower
brush.
2-6. Inspect the exposure lamp, and if
necessary, replace it.
2-7. Lubricate the lens and 3rd scanner drive
guide rods [Launa oil].
Service
Tables
3. Around the Drum 3-1. Remove and open the drum unit and clean
(every 120 k) the ID and Drum Potential sensors with a
blower brush.
3-2. Clean the pick-off pawls and the toner
Lubricate the shield filter. Discharge any static electricity
cleaning drive gears on the filter.
(every 240 k) 3-3. Clean the QL, PTL filter, and erase lamp
[Grease-G501] with a dry cloth. Discharge any static
before installation.
3-4. Clean the end blocks and casing with
Replace the wire water or alcohol.
cleaner and lubricate 3-5. Replace the grid plate and corona wire.
the drive gears 3-6. Clean the registration rollers and paper
[Grease-G501] dust cleaner.
(every 240 k)
3-7. Empty the toner collection bottle.
3-8. Clean the inside of the cleaning section,
Replace the cleaning cleaning brush, and seals.
brush (every 240 k) 3-9. Replace the cleaning blade.
Replace the pick-off

pawl (every 240 k)
SM 4-65 A175/A176/A177
4-1. Remove the developer.
4. Development unit 4-2. Clean the development unit and gears.
(every 120 k) 4-3. Pour a pack of new developer.
4-4. Replace the air filter.
4-5. Clean the toner bottle holder and toner
Lubricate the bias receiver.
terminal 4-6. Lubricate the bottle drive mechanism
(every 240 k) [Grease G-501].
(Grease: KS660:
SHIN-ETSU
5-1. Clean the paper guide plates and vertical

5. Paper feed transport/relay rollers.
(every 120 k for each 5-2. Replace the paper feed, pick-up, and
Feed Station) separation rollers.
Note: The feed (pick-up, feed, separation)
rollers for the 1st ~ 3rd feed trays are
different from the feed rollers for the
by-pass feed table and 3.5 k LCT.
There is no interchangeability.
5-3. Clean the registration sensor.
5-4. Lubricate the transport guide lock pin.
6-1. Clean the transfer belt.

6. Transfer belt unit 6-2. Replace the transfer unit cleaning blade.
(every 120 k) 6-3. Clean the belt drive/guide rollers and bias
roller.
Replace the transfer

belt (every 240 k)
7-1. Replace the separation roller and

separation belts.
7. Duplex unit
(every 120 k) 7-2. Clean the feed and transport rollers.
7-3. Lubricate the duplex positioning pins.
A175/A176/A177 4-66 SM
8-1. Clean the entrance and exit guide plates.
8. Fusing unit 8-2. Clean the thermistor.
(every 120 k) 8-3. Clean the stripper pawls.
8-4. Replace the oil supply roller.
8-5. Replace the oil supply cleaning roller.
Replace the stripper
8-6. Replace the pressure roller cleaning roller.
pawls, hot roller,
pressure roller, and 8-7. Replace the oil supply cleaning blade.
pressure roller
bearings. Lubricate
the isolating busing.
(every 240 k)
9-1. Clean the exit rollers.

9. Exit unit (every 80 k) 9-2. Inspect the antistatic brush.
9-3. Clean the exit sensor.
Replace the ozone

filter (every 360 k)
Service
Tables
10-1. Lubricate the gears.
10. Rear side (every 80 k) 10-2. Inspect the timing belts.
Replace the drum

grounding plate
(every 360 k)
11-1. Clean the covers.

11. Exterior (every 80 k)
12-1. Perform the developer initial setting.

12. Copy Quality ( SP Adjustment - PAGE 1).
12-2. Perform the process control data initial
setting. ( SP Adjustment - PAGE 1).
NOTE: Perform the developer initial setting only when new developer is
installed.
Never make any copies with the new developer before the
developer initial setting.
SM 4-67 A175/A176/A177
SECTION 5
REPLACEMENTS
AND ADJUSTMENTS
1. EXTERIOR AND INNER COVER REMOVAL
1.1 FRONT SIDE
[C] [B]
[G]
[A]
[F]
[E]
Replacement
Adjustments
[H]
and
[D]
1.1.1 Left Front Cover
1. Open the left front door [A] then unhook the chain (1 screw).
2. Pull out the pin [B].
3. Unhook the upper pin [C].
1.1.2 Right Front Door

1. Open the left front door [D].
2. Open the right front door [E].
3. Lower the pin [F] to unhook the upper hinge bracket [G].
4. Unhook the lower pin [H].
SM 5-1 A175/A176/A177
1.2 REAR SIDE
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
1.2.1 Upper Rear Cover

2. If the DJF or RDH is installed, disconnect the fiber optics connectors [A]
and [B].
NOTE: After the upper rear cover is re-installed, set the fiber optics
connectors [A] and [B] so that the fiber optic cable [A] is located
over the electrical cable [B]. Also, the fiber optic cable [A]
should not bend while opening and closing the DJF or RDH.
3. Remove the upper rear cover [C]. (4 screws)
1.2.2 Lower Rear Cover

1. Remove the lower rear cover [D]. (6 screws)
NOTE: When installing the lower rear cover, set the hooks in the holes
on the right and left side covers.
A175/A176/A177 5-2 SM
[B]
[A]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustments
and
[D]
[E]
1.2.3 Left Inner Cover
1. Remove the left front door [A].
2. Remove the left inner cover (4 screws) [B].
1.2.4 Right Inner Cover

1. Open the right door [C].
2. Remove knob B1 [D] (1 screw).
3. Remove the right inner cover [E] (2 screws).
SM 5-3 A175/A176/A177
1.2.5 Shutter Inner Cover
[D]
[E]
[C]
[A]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[A]
1. Open the right door.

3. Remove the shutter inner cover [C] (1 screw).
NOTE: 1) Be sure to move the lever [D] until it contact the part [E].
2) While installing the shutter cover [A], the lever [D] must be
pushed as shown.
A175/A176/A177 5-4 SM
1.3 RIGHT SIDE
1.3.1 Feed Unit Cover
[A]
[D]
[B]
[B] [B]
[C]
[C]
1. Open the by-pass table [A] approximately 45 degrees and push the
stoppers [B] of the feed unit cover [C] by using a small flat head screw
Replacement
driver [D], then remove the feed unit cover.
Adjustments
and
SM 5-5 A175/A176/A177
[D]
[C]
[B] [A] [F] [E]
[G]
1.3.2 Upper Right Cover

1. Remove the right inner cover [A], shutter cover [B] and the shutter inner
cover [C]. (Refer to Shutter Inner Cover Removal.)
2. Remove the upper rear cover [D]. (Refer to Upper Rear Cover Removal.)
3. Remove the small cover [E] (1 screw).
4. Open the manual feed table and remove the upper right cover [F] (6
screws).
1.3.3 Lower Right Cover

1. Remove the lower rear cover. (Refer to Lower Rear Cover Removal.)
NOTE: When installing the lower right cover, set the hooks in the holes
3. Remove the lower right cover [G] (4 screws).
A175/A176/A177 5-6 SM
1.4 LEFT SIDE
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[E]
1.4.1 Upper Left Cover
Replacement
Adjustments
1. Remove the left inner cover. (Refer to Left Inner Cover Removal.)
and
2. Remove the upper rear cover [A]. (Refer to Upper Rear Cover Removal.)
3. Remove the upper left cover [B] (4 screws).
NOTE: When installing the upper left cover, set the hooks in the holes
1.4.2 Lower Left Cover

1. Pull out the second, the third feed, and the fourth trays [C].
2. Remove the lower rear cover [D].
3. Remove the lower left cover [E] (4 screws).
NOTE: When installing the lower left cover, set the hooks in the holes
SM 5-7 A175/A176/A177
1.5 OPERATION PANEL
[B]
[A] [E]
[D]
[C]

2. Remove the left door. (Refer to Left Door Removal.)
3. Remove the left inner cover. (Refer to Left Inner Cover Removal.)
5. Open the toner bottle.
6. Remove three screws [A].
7. Remove two screws [B] securing the protective earth wires.
8. Insert the screw driver through the hole [C] and push the operation panel
[D] up.
9. Disconnect the connector [E].
NOTE: Be sure not to damage the harness by pulling the connector too
strongly.
A175/A176/A177 5-8 SM
1.6 UPPER SIDE
[A]
[D]
[C]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[A] [F]
[E]
1.6.1 Upper Cover

2. Remove six screws [A].
3. Remove two screws [B] securing the grounding wires.
Replacement
Adjustments
4. Disconnect two connectors [C].
and
5. Remove the upper cover [D].
1.6.2 Rear Upper Cover

2. Remove the platen cover or document feeder (DJF or RDH) from the
copier.
3. Remove the upper cover.
4. Remove the 2 screws securing the rear upper cover [E].
5. Disengage the hooks [F] by sliding the rear upper cover to the front and
remove it.
SM 5-9 A175/A176/A177
2. OPTICS
2.1 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]

2. Remove the left scale [A] (2 shoulder screws).
3. Remove the rear scale [B] (3 screws).
4. Grasp the left edge of the exposure glass [C] and lift slightly. Slide the
other edge out from under the right glass holder [D]. Remove the
exposure glass.
NOTE: When reinstalling the exposure glass, make sure that the mark
(white) on the edge of the glass is located at the rear right
corner. This side is smoother and it generates less static
electricity when the RDH is used.
A175/A176/A177 5-10 SM
2.2 EXPOSURE LAMP REPLACEMENT
[E]
[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
NOTE: Do not touch the reflector or the new exposure lamp with your bare
hands. Use a strip of paper as shown. (Oil marks from fingers on the
lamp or reflectors will be affected by heat from the lamp.)
Replacement
Adjustments
1. Remove the exposure glass. (Refer to Exposure Glass Removal.)
and
2. Move the first scanner [A] to the cutout position at the rear frame [B].
(See illustration.)
3. Remove the reflector cover [C] (2 screws).
4. While holding the lamp with the paper strip, release the lamp terminal [D]
as shown; then, take out the lamp.
5. Install a new lamp. Use a strip of paper as shown to hold the lamp.
Confirm that the lamp is properly set by both terminals and that the clip
[E] is set properly.
SM 5-11 A175/A176/A177
[A]
NOTE: Make sure that the blister [A] on the lamp points towards the
reflector opening (left side of the copier) as shown.
6. Reassemble the copier.

7. Turn on the main switch and enter SP mode, then perform the process
control data initial setting ( SP Adjustment - PAGE 1).
A175/A176/A177 5-12 SM
2.3 OPTICS THERMOSWITCH REPLACEMENT
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C]
[E]
NOTE: The thermoswitch can be reset manually by pushing the red button
[A] when the exposure lamp area cools.
Replacement
Adjustments
and
2. Move the first scanner to the cutout position at the rear frame.
3. Remove the reflector cover [B] (2 screws).
4. Remove the exposure lamp leads [C] from the terminals on both sides of
the thermoswitch [D].
5. Remove the thermoswitch bracket [E] (1 screw).
6. Remove the thermoswitch from the bracket (2 screws), and replace it.
SM 5-13 A175/A176/A177
2.4 SCANNER HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[E]
[D]
[C]
2. Remove the exhaust fan [B] (3 screws).
3. Manually turn the scanner drive pulley [C] counterclockwise to move the
scanners about 10 mm to the left (rear view).
4. Remove the scanner HP sensor bracket [D] (1 screw).
5. Disconnect the connector.
6. Replace the scanner HP sensor [E] (1 screw).
A175/A176/A177 5-14 SM
2.5 ADS SENSOR REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustments
and
[D]
1. Remove the exhaust fan [A]. (Refer to Scanner HP Sensor

Replacement.)
2. Remove the DJF/RDH connector bracket [B] (2 screws).
3. Remove the ADS Sensor [C] with the cover [D] (1 screw).
4. Replace the ADS Sensor [C] (2 screws).
5. Assemble the copier.
6. Turn on the main switch and enter SP mode, then perform the Auto ADS
initial setting ( SP Adjustment - PAGE 5).
SM 5-15 A175/A176/A177
2.6 SCANNER DRIVE MOTOR
[D]
[E]
[F]
[H] [I]
[C]
[B]
[A]
0.5 mm
[G]
1. Remove the exhaust fan. (Refer to Scanner HP Sensor Replacement.)

2. Remove the tension spring [A].
3. Remove the tension tightener [B].
NOTE: Re-install the tightener as follows;
1) Hook part [C] of the bracket on the screw [D] installed on the
scanner drive motor bracket.
2) Hook the tension spring [A].
3) Install two screws.
4. Remove the two connectors [E] from the Optic Control Board.
5. Remove the scanner motor [F] (4 screws).
NOTE: While replacing the drive pulley, the gap [G] should be 0.5 mm
so that the upper edge [H] of the pulley is lower than the upper
surface [I] of the bracket, as shown. After installing the scanner
motor, perform the scanner control adjustment. (Refer to
Scanner Control Adjustment.)
A175/A176/A177 5-16 SM
2.7 SCANNER DRIVE WIRES REPLACEMENT
- Removal -
[A]
[B]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustments
and
2. Remove the exposure glass.
3. Remove the upper cover and the rear upper cover.
4. Remove the optics thermistor [A] (1 screw, 1 harness clamp).
5. Remove the scanner HP sensor with bracket . (Refer to Scanner HP
Sensor Replacement.)
6. Remove the scanner drive motor. (Refer to Scanner Drive Motor
Replacement)
7. Unhook the harness from the two harness clamps [B].
8. Remove the upper optics frame [C] (9 screws).
SM 5-17 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[C]
[B]
[E]
[D]
[F]
[G]
9. Remove the lens unit cover [A] (2 screws).

10. Unhook the tension spring [B].
11. Remove the lens shield plate [C].
NOTE: When installing the lens shield plate, set the rear part [D] of the
lens shield plate between the guides [E] as shown. Then set the
grooves on the guide pins [F] in the rail [G].
After reinstalling the tension spring, confirm that movement of
the lens shield plate is smooth.
A175/A176/A177 5-18 SM
[A]
[F]
[D]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustments
[E] [C]
and
12. Remove the front bracket [A] (2 screws).
13. Remove the screw [B] securing the scanner flat cable.
14. Unhook the four harness clamps [C].
15. Disconnect the connector [D] outside the optic side frame.
16. Remove the connector [E] from the optic side frame.
17. Remove the scanner clamps [F] securing both sides of the first scanner
unit to the scanner wires (4 screws).
SM 5-19 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[E]
[F]
[G]
18. Remove the harness cover [A] (2 screws).

19. Remove the light shield mylar bracket [B] (1 screw).
20. Disconnect the paper length size sensor connector [C] and move the
lens unit to the left, then remove the rear bracket [D] (2 screws).
21. Unhook the tension spring [E] and remove the scanner wire [F].
22. Remove the second scanner [G].
NOTE: When re-installing the mylar bracket [B], be sure not to create
any gap between the bracket and the lens cover.
A175/A176/A177 5-20 SM
[C]
[B]
[A]
[F]
Replacement
Adjustments
[E]
and
[D]
23. Remove the left inner cover [A] (4 screws).
24. Remove the E-ring [B] of the scanner drive shaft and remove the front
ball bearing [C].
25. Remove the rear drive pulley [D] (1 Allen screw) and remove the rear ball
bearing [E].
26. Loosen the two Allen screws of the front drive pulley [F] and slide the
pulley about 10 cm to the rear then take out the drive shaft.
SM 5-21 A175/A176/A177
- INSTALLATION -
[B]
[E]
[A]
[C]
[F]
[D]
1. Round the rear scanner drive wire on the rear pulley as follows:
1) Align the cut out [A] on the edge of the rear drive pulley and the blue
mark [B] on the wire as shown.
2) Round the wire counterclockwise 5 times as shown (in the illustration,
the D-cut [C] on the shaft is at the front side) then set the bead [D] on
the wire in the hole [E] on the pulley.
(In this condition, the bead just reaches the hole on the pulley.)
3) After setting the bead in the hole, round the wire two more times (in
total 7 times).
4) Fix the wire with tape [F] as shown.
A175/A176/A177 5-22 SM
[B]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[C]
Replacement
Adjustments
2. Round the front scanner drive wire on the front pulley as shown:
and
1) Align the cut out [A] on the edge of the front drive pulley and the red
mark [B] on the wire.
2) Round the wire clockwise 5 times as shown (in the illustration, the
Allen screw holes are at the rear side) then set the bead [C] on the
wire in the hole [D] on the pulley.
(In this condition, the bead just reaches to the hole on the pulley.)
3) After setting the small ball in the hole, round the wire twice more (in
total 7 times).
4) Fix the wire with tape [E] as shown.
SM 5-23 A175/A176/A177
[D] [A]
[B]
[C] [C]
[F]
[I] [E]
[G]
[H]
3. Set the front drive pulley [A] on the drive shaft. (Leave the Allen screws
loosened.)
4. Place the scanner drive shaft [B] in the holes on the optics front and rear
side frames.
5. Set ball bearings [C] on both sides of the scanner drive shaft.
6. Set the E-ring [D] on the front end of the scanner drive shaft.
7. Set, and fully push in, the scanner drive pulley [E] on the front end of the
scanner drive shaft, then tighten the Allen screw [F].
8. Install the scanner drive motor. (Refer to Scanner Drive Motor
Replacement.)
9. Place the second scanner [G] on the guide rail and fix it there by using
two jig pins [H].
NOTE: This jig pin is used as the left door hinge pin [I]. However, only
one pin is used on the copier, so it is necessary to prepare
another one.
A175/A176/A177 5-24 SM
➍ ➋ ➌
[B] ➊
[A]
10. Route the shorter end [A] of the rear scanner drive wire in the following
order.
➊ Rear track counterclockwise

➋ Clockwise
Replacement
Adjustments
➌ Lower track clockwise.
and
➍ Fix the end of the wire on the frame with tape [B].
SM 5-25 A175/A176/A177
➌
➊
[B]
➍
[A]
11. Route the longer end [A] of the rear scanner drive wire in the following
order.
➊ Through front track, upper side.

➋ Counterclockwise.
➌ Upper track counterclockwise.
➍ Hook the end [B] of the wire on the cutout on the right optics side
frame.
A175/A176/A177 5-26 SM
➋ ➍ ➌
[B]
➊
[A]
12. Route the shorter end [A] of the front scanner drive wire in the following
order.
➊ Front track counterclockwise

➋ Clockwise
Replacement
Adjustments
➌ Lower track clockwise.
and
➍ Fix the end of the wire on the frame with tape [B].
SM 5-27 A175/A176/A177
[C] ➍
[B]
[D]
➊ ➋
[A]
13. Route the longer end [A] of the front scanner drive wire in the following
order.
➊ Through rear track, upper side.

➋ Counterclockwise.
➌ Upper track clockwise.
➍ Hook the end of the wire [A] on the cut out on the right optics side
frame.
14. Slightly push the front drive pulley [B] against the front optics side frame
and tighten the two Allen screws.
15. Remove the jig pins securing the second scanner.
16. Remove the tapes [C] fixing the ends of the scanner drive wires and
hook the ends of the scanner drive wires with the tension springs.
17. Remove the tapes [D] fixing the wire to the front and rear drive pulleys.
A175/A176/A177 5-28 SM
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[G]
[F]
Replacement
Adjustments
and
18. Install the rear bracket [A] (2 screws, 1 connector), shielding mylar
bracket [B] (1 screw) and harness cover [C] (2 screws).
19. Adjust the second scanner alignment as follows:
- Second Scanner Alignment -

1) Move the second scanner [D] to the left end position. Fix the rear side
of the second scanner by inserting the jig pin [E] in the holes on the
rear side of the second scanner and the rear guide rail.
2) Turn the adjusting nut [F] to adjust the second scanner alignment so
that the jig pins [G] can be smoothly set in the holes on the front side
of the second scanner and the front guide rail.
SM 5-29 A175/A176/A177
[E]
[B] [D]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[F]
20. Place the first scanner unit on the guide rail then adjust the first scanner
alignment as follows:
- First Scanner Alignment -

1) Move the first scanner [A] to the left end position. Fix the rear end of
the first scanner by inserting the jig pin [B] in the holes on the first
scanner and the guide rail.
2) Position the first scanner so that the jig pin [C] can be smoothly set in
the holes on the first scanner and the guide rail, then tighten the wire
clamp brackets [D] (4 screws).
21. Install the scanner HP sensor [E] (1 screw).

22. Secure the scanner flat cable (1 screw).
23. Install the upper optics frame [F] (9 screws).
A175/A176/A177 5-30 SM
[B]
Except for 70 CPM version
[A]
TP504 TP504
TP512
TP514 [B]
70 CPM version
[B] TP504
DPS501
TP512
24. Turn on the main switch and perform the scanner free run for about 5
minutes to break in the wires and to confirm correct scanner movement
as follows:
- Scanner Free Run -

1. Remove the air inlet duct [A] (1 screw).
Replacement
Adjustments
2. Remove CN502, CN503, CN504 from the optic control Board [B].
and
3. Short-circuit TP514 and TP504 (GND) on the optics control Board
(except for 70 CPM version).
4. Turn on No. 2 of DIP SW 501 on the optics control board (70 CPM
version only).
5. Turn on the main switch.
6. Short-circuit TP512 and TP504 (GND), then the machine automatically
starts the scanner free run.
25. After performing the scanner free run, check the second scanner
alignment, then the first scanner alignment.
26. Perform the scanner control adjustment. (Refer to Scanner Control
Adjustment.)
27. Check the copy image.
SM 5-31 A175/A176/A177
2.8 SCANNER CONTROL ADJUSTMENT (except for 70 CPM
version)
[B]
LED 501
[A]
Perform this adjustment under any one of the following conditions:
After the scanner motor replacement

After the scanner wire replacement
After the scanner timing belt replacement
After replacing the optics control Board
1. Perform the free run ( Test Mode - PAGE 1) 30 times.
2. After the free run is completed, turn the rotary dip switch [A] until LED
501 [B] turns on.
NOTE: If this adjustment is improper, the timing between the scanner
and the paper feed will be also improper, causing paper jams at
the registration roller, or causing scanner noise due to wire
vibration.
A175/A176/A177 5-32 SM
2.9 THIRD SCANNER REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[E] [C]
Replacement
Adjustments
and
[E] [D]
2. Remove the upper cover [A]. (Refer to Upper Cover Removal.)
3. Remove the lens unit cover [B] (2 screws).
4. Remove the two screws [C] fixing the front third scanner bracket.
5. Remove the sixth mirror [D].
6. Remove the third scanner [E] as shown.
SM 5-33 A175/A176/A177
2.10 THIRD SCANNER DRIVE MOTOR/HP SENSOR
REPLACEMENT
[C]
[B]
[A]
[E]
[I]
[D]
[G]
[H]
[F]
1. Remove the third scanner unit. (Refer to the Third Scanner Removal.)
2. Open the right front cover then remove the shutter cover [A].
3. Remove the shutter inner cover [B] (1 screw).
4. Open the toner bottle [C] and close the toner hopper cover [D].
5. Remove the third scanner drive unit [E] (3 screws [F]).
6. Replace the third scanner drive motor [G] (1 connector, 2 screws).
7. Remove the third scanner HP sensor [H] with the bracket [I] (1 screw).
8. Replace the third scanner HP sensor (1 screw).
A175/A176/A177 5-34 SM
2.11 LENS HORIZONTAL DRIVE BELT REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
Replacement
Adjustments
and
[E] [F]
1. Remove the lens unit cover [A] and light shielding plate [B]. (Refer to
Scanner Drive Wires Replacement.)
2. Remove the light shielding mylar bracket [C] (1 screw).
NOTE: When re-installing the mylar bracket [C], be sure not to create
any gap between the bracket and the lens cover.
3. Remove the flat cable bracket [D] (1 screw, 2 connectors).
4. Position the roller [E] underneath the bracket [F].
SM 5-35 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[E]
[F]
[C]
[D]
[D]
[B]
5. Remove the lens unit [A] (2 screws).

6. Loosen the tension pulley bracket [B] (1 screw).
7. Push the pulley bracket to the front then unhook the timing belt [C].
8. Remove the two timing belt holders [D] (1 screw each).
NOTE: When setting the timing belt, align the end [E] of the timing belt
to the edge [F] of the belt holder.
A175/A176/A177 5-36 SM
2.12 LENS VERTICAL DRIVE BELT REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
Replacement
Adjustments
[D] [C]
and
1. Remove the third scanner drive unit. (Refer to Third Scanner Drive Motor
Replacement.)
2. Remove the front bracket [A]. (Refer to Scanner Drive Wires
Replacement.)
3. Remove the lens unit [B]. (Refer to Lens Horizontal Drive Belt
Replacement.)
4. Loosen the two screws [C] fixing the tension pulley bracket [D].
5. Push the tension pulley bracket to the left (front view) then unhook the
timing belt.
SM 5-37 A175/A176/A177
2.13 ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS (2 LENGTH SENSORS, 1
WIDTH SENSOR)
[C]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[C]

3. Remove the original size sensor covers [B] (1 screw each).
4. Replace each original size sensor [C] (1 screw, 1 connector each).
A175/A176/A177 5-38 SM
3. DEVELOPMENT AND TONER SUPPLY
3.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL
[C]
[D]
[E] [A]
[A] [B]
[G]
[F]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
[H]

2. Open the front doors.
NOTE: Be sure to move the lever [C] until it contacts part [D] (fully to the
front).
4. Remove the shutter inner cover [E] (1 screw).
5. Open the toner bottle holder [F].
NOTE: To open the toner bottle holder completely, while lowering the
shutter lever [G], push the bracket [H] to the right.
A175/A176/A177 5-39 SM
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[F]
[G]
[E]
6. Close the toner hopper cap [A].

7. Remove the screw [B] fixing the drum stay [C].
8. Remove the drum stay knob [D] then take out the drum stay.
9. Disconnect the two connectors [E].
10. Pull out the development unit [F].
NOTE: 1) To prevent drum scratches, push the development unit to the
right while pulling it out.
2) When installing the development unit, do not forget to set the
two connectors [E].
3) When installing the drum stay, be careful not to pinch the
harness. Also, keep the harness away from gears.
4) When pulling out the development unit, do not hold the knob
[G].
5) Keep the development unit connector as far as possible away
from the development unit when the unit is cleaned using a
vacuum cleaner.
6) Do not touch the pins of the development unit connector when
the development unit is carried away from the main frame or
cleaned.
SM 5-40 A175/A176/A177
3.2 DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
1. Take out the development unit. (Refer to Development Unit Removal.)
2. Place the development unit on the sheet [A] included with new developer.
3. Remove the two screws [B] fixing the toner hopper [C].
4. Turn the toner hopper 90 degree, then move it up to remove it from the
development unit.
5. Turn over the development unit then turn the paddle roller knob [D] to
empty developer onto the sheet. (The one way clutch in the knob [D]
allows turning the paddle roller counterclockwise only.)
NOTE: Dispose of used developer according to local regulations.
Make sure that no developer remains on the development rollers or in the

development unit.
A175/A176/A177 5-41 SM
[A]
[B]
[C] [A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[E]
6. Clean the side seals [A] and entrance seal [B].
NOTE: Cover the sleeve rollers with a sheet of paper [C] to prevent the
used developer being attracted to the sleeve rollers.
7. Evenly pour in one pack of developer [D] while turning the knob [E].
8. Re-install the toner hopper, then re-assemble the machine.
NOTE: 1) Be sure to set to connectors after installing the development
unit in the machine.
2) Tilt the toner hopper so that there is toner near toner end
sensor.
9. Turn on the main switch, then perform developer initial setting
CAUTION
1) Never make any copy with the new developer before completing
the developer initial setting, otherwise toner density control will be
abnormal.
NOTE: 1) If the developer initial setting is not completed, you cannot exit
the SP mode by pressing the "Quit" key. If this occur turn the main
switch off and on, then perform the initial setting again. If the result
is the same, see the troubleshooting section "SC352" (Page 6-9).
SM 5-42 A175/A176/A177
3.3 DEVELOPMENT ROLLERS REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
1. Remove the developer. (Refer to Developer Replacement.)
2. Remove the developer entrance seal [A] (2 screws, 2 hooks).
3. Remove the front and rear side seals [B].
NOTE: When re-assembling the development unit, use new side seals
and align the edge of the side seals to the corner [C] and the
edge [D] as shown.
A175/A176/A177 5-43 SM
[B]
[A]
[H]
[E]
[I]
[D] [C]
[G]
[F]
4. Remove the coupling gear [A] (1 screw).

NOTE: Be careful not to lose the pin [B].
5. Remove the gear [C] (1 E-ring), gear [D] (1 E-ring) and gear [E].
CAUTION
Do not touch the screws at [F] and [G].
If the screws at [F] are loosened, the doctor gap will be improper.
If the screws at [G] are loosened, the photoconductor gap and
magnetic field angle will be improper.
If either of them become abnormal, toner density control will be
abnormal.
6. Remove the front roller holder [H] (1 screw and 2 E-rings) and rear roller
holder [I] (1 screw).
SM 5-44 A175/A176/A177
7. Replace the sleeve rollers.
8. Re-assemble the development unit and set the developer, then
re-assemble the copier.
CAUTION
1) If the original developer (already used) is returned to the
development unit, do not perform the developer initial setting.
NOTE: 2) If the new developer is set, never make any copy before
completing the developer initial setting ( SP Adjustment -
PAGE 1).
Replacements
Adjustments
And
A175/A176/A177 5-45 SM
3.4 TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
1. Remove the developer. (Refer to Developer Replacement.)

2. Replace the TD sensor [A] (2 screws).
NOTE: Before installing the TD (Toner Density) sensor, clean the
development unit well so that no carrier particle remains in the
gap between the TD sensor and the development unit casing.
3. Install the new developer and perform the developer initial setting.
CAUTION
Never make any copy before completing the developer initial setting.
SM 5-46 A175/A176/A177
3.5 TONER BOTTLE DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[D]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[B]
[F]
[H] [G]
Replacements
Adjustments
[I]
And
1. Open the toner bottle holder [A] with the bracket [B]. (Refer to
Development Unit Removal.)
2. Remove the toner bottle [C].
3. Remove four screws then remove the toner bottle holder by unhooking
the hole [D] from the pin on the hinge.
4. Remove the toner receiver [E].
5. Remove the toner bottle drive motor assembly [F] (1 connector, 2
screws).
6. Remove an E-ring [G] and slide the gear [H] to access a screw.
7. Replace the toner bottle drive motor [I] (3 screws - M3 x 4).
A175/A176/A177 5-47 SM
4. DRUM UNIT
4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL AND OPC DRUM REPLACEMENT
[B]
[D]
[C] [A]
1. Take out the development unit. (Refer to Development Unit Removal.)

2. Lower the transfer belt unit.
3. Take out the drum unit by holding the knob [A].
NOTE: Close the protective shutter [B] to protect the OPC drum from
light when the drum unit is left outside the machine for servicing.
4. Open the upper drum unit (2 screws [C]).
5. Replace the OPC drum. Then remove the drum protective sheet from the
new drum.
NOTE: When returning the drum unit to the copier, do not forget to open
the protective shutter [B].
If it is hard to completely set the drum unit in the machine
because the gear is disengaged, then push in the drum unit
while holding down the cleaning blade release knob [D].
6. Turn on the main switch, then perform process control initial setting
( 1 SP Adjustment - page 1).
SM 5-48 A175/A176/A177
4.2 QUENCHING LAMP REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[D]
Replacements
[C]
Adjustments
CN663
And
1. Remove the OPC drum. (Refer to Drum Unit Removal and OPC Drum
Replacement.)
NOTE: Wrap a protective sheet or a few sheets of paper around the
drum to protect it from light.
2. Slightly pull up the wires [A] on the quenching lamp, then insert the head
of the small flat head screw driver [B] between the quenching lamp and
the drum unit casing to release the hook [C] at the center of the
quenching lamp.
NOTE: Do not pull the wire too strongly.
3. Disconnect the connector [D].
4. Replace the quenching lamp.
5. Turn on the main switch, then perform process control initial setting
A175/A176/A177 5-49 SM
4.3 GRID PLATE/CHARGE WIRE/WIRE CLEANER
REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[G]
[C] [H]
[F]
[I]
[D]
[E]
1. Take out the main charge corona [A] (1 screw, 1 connector).

2. Remove the grid plate [B] (1 plastic screw, 4 hooks).
NOTE: When installing the grid plate, do not tighten the plastic screw [C]
too strongly.
3. Remove the front grid terminal [D], then the front end block cover [E].
4. Remove the terminal spring [F].
5. Slide the rear grid terminal [G] to the rear and remove it, then remove the
rear end block cover [H].
6. Remove the charge corona wire [I].
SM 5-50 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[B]
[B]
[C]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
7. Remove the wire cleaner [A] (1 snap ring).
8. Install the wire cleaner and the charge corona wire.
NOTE: Locate the joint part [B] of the wire in the rear end block as
shown.
Correctly set the wire between the wire cleaner pads.
Do not loosen the screw [C], otherwise the charge corona height
will change.
9. Turn on main switch, then perform process control initial setting
A175/A176/A177 5-51 SM
4.4 ERASE LAMP AND DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR
REPLACEMENT
[D] [B]
[C]
[A]
[G]
[F]
[E]
[H]
1. Open the drum shutter [A].
2. While pushing the hook [B] to the front by using a small flat head screw
driver [C], move up the front side of the erase lamp [D] as shown.
3. Slide the erase lamp to the front to release the rear side of the erase
lamp from the drum unit casing.
4. Disconnect the connector [E].
NOTE: Before removing the drum potential sensor, set a few sheets of
paper between the sensor and the OPC drum to protect the
drum surface.
5. Replace the drum potential sensor [F].
CAUTION
After replacing the drum potential sensor, perform the process
control data initial setting. ( SP Adjustment - PAGE 1)
SM 5-52 A175/A176/A177
4.5 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT
[A]
[G]
[C]
[D]
[I]
[B]
[C]
[H]
1. Remove the OPC drum. (Refer to Drum Unit Removal and OPC Drum
Replacement.)
2. Remove the cleaning blade [A] (2 screws).
3. Clean the entrance seal [B], side seals [C] and cleaning brush [D].
NOTE: When a vacuum cleaner is used, to protect the electrical parts
from static electricity, disconnect the connector on the charge
Replacements
power pack and remove the ID sensor as follows:
Adjustments
1) Disconnect the 12P connector on the charge power pack [E].
And
2) Remove the screw [F] and separate the upper and the lower
drum units.
3) Remove the spur bracket [G] and pick-off pawl bracket [H] (2
screws).
4) Disconnect the connector [I].
5) While turning the bracket counterclockwise (front view), slide
the pick-off pawl bracket to the rear.
4. Install the new cleaning blade.
NOTE: Do not clean the edge of the cleaning blade with cloth, otherwise
it damages the edge and causes black lines on copy images.
Do not touch the edge of the new cleaning blade, if some setting
powder or toner on the blade edge is removed, apply toner there.
When installing the cleaning blade, do not pinch the side seals.
A175/A176/A177 5-53 SM
4.6 CLEANING BRUSH REPLACEMENT
[C] [B]
[D]
[A]
1. Remove the cleaning blade. (Refer to Cleaning Blade Replacement.)

2. Remove the coupling gear [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the grounding wire [B] (1 screw).
4. Remove the bushing [C].
5. Pull the cleaning brush shaft to the rear to release the cleaning brush [D],
then remove the cleaning brush.
NOTE: Do not touch the cleaning brush with oily hands.
After replacement, clean the ID sensor surface.
SM 5-54 A175/A176/A177
4.7 PICK-OFF PAWL REPLACEMENT
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
1. Remove the bushing [A] (1 screw and retaining ring).

2. While pulling the shaft [B] to the rear, turn the pick-off pawl about 45
degree clockwise (front view) and move up the pick-off pawl.
Replacements
Adjustments
3. Replace the pick-off pawl [C].
And
NOTE: Do not forget to hook the tension spring [D].
After replacement, check the smooth movement of the pick-off
pawl.
A175/A176/A177 5-55 SM
4.8 TONER COLLECTION MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[D] [C]
NOTE: Before starting the procedure remove the drum unit and the transfer
belt unit to prevent toner from dropping in the machine.
1. Open the front doors then remove the toner collection bottle [A]
(1 push-lock [B]).
2. Remove the upper and lower rear covers. (Refer to Upper and Lower
Rear Covers Removal.)
3. Remove the tank cover bracket [C] (2 screws).
4. Remove the toner collection motor [D] (2 connectors, 2 screws).
NOTE: When re-installing the toner collection motor, be sure to set the 2
positioning pins in the holes on the machine rear frame.
SM 5-56 A175/A176/A177
4.9 OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT
[B]
[E]
[D]
[C] [A]
[C]
1. Open the front doors and open the toner bottle holder.
2. Remove the transfer belt unit prop [A] (3 screws).
3. Replace the ozone filter [B].
Replacements
Adjustments
NOTE: To install the transfer belt unit prop smoothly, set in order the
And
lower pins [C], drive roller shaft [D], and the upper pins [E].
A175/A176/A177 5-57 SM
5. TRANSFER BELT UNIT
5.1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
[F] [D]
[A]
[G] [E]
[B]
[C]
- Removal -
2. Remove the transfer belt unit prop [A] (3 screws).
3. Disconnect the connector [B].
4. While turning the lever [C] counterclockwise, take out the transfer belt
unit.
NOTE: 1) Do not touch the transfer belt with oily hands.
2) Take care not to scratch the OPC drum with part of the
transfer belt unit. Be careful when installing the transfer belt
unit.
- Installation -
1. While turning the lever [C] counterclockwise, install the transfer belt unit.
NOTE: 1) Insert the gear [D] in the hole [E] on the rear frame.
2) Place the slot [F] of the transfer belt unit on the rail [G].
SM 5-58 A175/A176/A177
[C]
[B]
[A] [E]
[D]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
2. Install the transfer belt unit prop (3 screws).
NOTE: To install the transfer belt unit prop smoothly, set in order the
lower pins [A], drive roller shaft [B], and the upper pins [C].
3. After installation, confirm the following points:
1) Smooth up-down movement of the transfer belt unit,
2) Part [D] of the transfer belt unit is inside the drum stay,
3) Part [D] of the transfer belt unit is set in the dent [E] on the drum unit
casing.
A175/A176/A177 5-59 SM
5.2 TRANSFER BELT REPLACEMENT
[C]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[D]
1. Take out the transfer belt unit. (Refer to Transfer Belt Unit Removal.)
2. While raising the knob [A], disconnect the two connectors [B].
3. Turn the transfer belt upper unit [C] 90 degrees counterclockwise, then
raise and remove it.
4. Remove the screws [D].
SM 5-60 A175/A176/A177
[I]
[D]
[E]
[A]
[B] [H]
[B] [C]
[G]
[F]
[I]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
5. Turn the belt drive roller holder [A] clockwise (front view) and remove the
bias terminal [B] (1 screw).
6. Replace the transfer belt [C].
NOTE: 1) Before installing the transfer belt, clean both sides of the
transfer belt with a dry cloth (do not use alcohol).
2) Before installing the transfer belt, clean the following items
with alcohol.
• Belt drive roller [D]
• Belt roller [E]
• Bias roller [F]
• Discharge terminal [G]
3) Position the transfer belt at the center of the belt roller [E].
(Both marks [H] should be visible.)
4) Set the transfer belts inside the bias terminals [B] and [I].
A175/A176/A177 5-61 SM
5.3 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT
[B] [A]
[C]
[H]
[D] [F]
[E]
[G]
[D]
1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (Refer to Transfer Belt Replacement.)

2. Remove the cleaning blade [A] and the small blade [B] (2 screws).
3. Clean the seals [C].
NOTE: When using a vacuum cleaner, to protect the transfer power
pack from static electricity, remove the power pack as follows:
1) Disconnect two connectors [D].
2) Remove the solenoid bracket [E] (2 screws).
3) While pushing the power pack toward the solenoid [F],
release the power pack from the hook [G].
4. Install the new cleaning blade.
NOTE: Do not touch the edge of the cleaning blade. If some of the
setting powder on the blade edge is removed, apply setting
powder or toner there.
1) Install the small blade [B] so that the front edge of the blade
contacts with the spring holder [H].
SM 5-62 A175/A176/A177
6. PAPER FEED
6.1 PAPER TRAY UNIT REMOVAL
[D]
[A] [C]
[B]
[C]
[E]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
To facilitate transportation, the upper part of the copier (copier main frame)
[A] and the lower part of the copier (paper tray unit) [B] can be separated as
follows:
2. Remove the front covers. (Refer to Front Cover Removal.)
3. Remove the four screws [C].
4. Remove the rear cover [D] (4 screws).
5. Remove the five connectors [E].
6. Remove the copier main frame [A] from the paper tray unit [B].
NOTE: When re-installing the copier main frame on the paper tray unit,
do not pinch the harness between the copier main frame and the
paper feed unit.
SM 5-63 A175/A176/A177
6.2 PAPER TRAY REMOVAL
- Tandem Tray Removal (1st tray of the A176/A177/A191/A192 copier) -
[A]
[C]
[B]
[E] [D]
[C]
[G]
[D]
[F]
[H]
1. Open the left door and draw out the tandem tray.
2. While pushing the release lever [A] to the right with the head of the screw
driver [B], slightly push the right tandem tray [C] to separate it from the
left tandem tray [D].
3. Remove the stopper [E] (1 screw).
4. Remove the left tandem tray [D] from the left guide Accuride [F] (2
screws).
5. While holding the right tandem tray [C] from the bottom, remove the right
tandem tray from the right guide Accuride [G] (2 screws).
NOTE: 1) If two screws are removed without holding the right tandem
tray, it will drop.
2) Be careful not to deform the grounding plate [H] when
reinstalling the left tandem tray.
A175/A176/A177 5-64 SM
- Universal Tray/550 sheet tray/Built-in LCT Removal -
Replacements
Adjustments
And
1. Draw out the tray.
2. Remove the tray from both guide Accurides as shown (4 screws).
SM 5-65 A175/A176/A177
6.3 PAPER FEED ROLLERS REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[E] [D] [C]

2. Remove the paper tray where the feed rollers belong to. (Refer to Paper
Tray Removal.)
3. Remove the pick-up roller [A] (1 snap ring).
4. Remove the feed roller [B] (1 snap ring).
5. Remove the snap ring [C] fixing the separation roller [D] then separate
the separation roller [D] from the torque limiter [E].
NOTE: 1) The paper feed (pick-up, feed, separation) rollers used in the 1st ~
3rd feed units in the paper tray unit are different from the feed
rollers used in the by-pass feed table and 3.5 k LCT.
2) Do not touch the surface of the rollers with oily hand.
A175/A176/A177 5-66 SM
6.4 TANDEM REAR FENCE DRIVE BELT REMOVAL
[E]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[A]
[F]
[G]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
1. Draw out the tandem tray.
2. Separate the right tandem tray from the left tandem tray [A]. (Refer to
Tandem Tray Removal.)
3. Remove the rear fence [B] on the left tandem tray (2 screws).
4. Remove the rear base plate [C] with the rear fence drive motor [D]
(3 screws, 1 connector, 1 grounding screw, and 1 grounding plate [E]).
5. Remove the end fence [F] (2 screws).
6. Remove the center bottom plate [G] (2 screws).
SM 5-67 A175/A176/A177
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
7. Disconnect the three connectors [A].

8. Loosen the tightener screw [B] and unhook the tension spring [C].
9. Remove the timing belt [D].
NOTE: When installing the timing belt, hook the spring [C] then, tighten
the screw [B].
A175/A176/A177 5-68 SM
6.5 TANDEM SIDE FENCE MOTOR REMOVAL
[H] [D]
[F]
[B] [A]
[E]
[C]
[G]
[I]
1. Remove the bottom plate [A] of the right tandem tray (2 nylon rivets [B]).
Replacements
Adjustments
2. Raise the lift arm [C] (2 screws).
And
3. Remove the cover [D] (1 screw).
4. Remove the bracket [E] (2 screws [F]).
5. Remove the side fence drive motor [G] (2 screws [H]).
NOTE: When installing the side fence drive motor, move both side
fences to the innermost position, then set the motor gear
between the two rack gears [I].
SM 5-69 A175/A176/A177
6.6 PAPER FEED TIMING ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[C]
[B] 10 mm
[D]
10 ± 5 mm
1) Paper feed timing adjustment for the 1st feed station

1. Place a white paper on the exposure glass so that there is a gap of 10
mm between the white paper [A] and the left scale [B].
2. Enter SP mode (refer to Service Program Access Procedure) and access
the SP Adjustment - PAGE 2.
3. Touch the "Copy in SP" key [C] then select the 1st feed station.
4. Enter a copy quantity of "2" using the number keys.
5. Touch the "SP Mode" key.
6. Press the Start key and evaluate the width of the white area [D] on the
copy. The adjustment standard is 10 ± 5 mm.
NOTE: In this mode, the registration roller does not stop for registration.
Do not make copies in "Copy in SP" mode for this adjustment. In
"Copy in SP" mode, the registration clutch stops normally.
A175/A176/A177 5-70 SM
[A] [B]
[C]
[D]
7. For the first copy, touch the -- key [A] or the + key [B] to adjust the white
area width.
8. For the second copy, touch the -- key [C] or the + key [D] to adjust the
white area width.
9. Repeat steps 6 to 8.
2) Paper feed timing adjustment for the 2nd, 3rd, 4th feed stations, the
LCT and duplex unit.
Refer to Paper Feed Timing Adjustment for the 1st feed station.
NOTE: Concerning the adjustment for the 1st feed station, it is necessary to
adjust the feed timing for the 1st and 2nd papers individually.
Replacements
Adjustments
However, for the other feed stations, it is necessary to adjust the
And
feed timing only for the 1st paper fed.
Therefore, you can skip steps 4 and 7 of the paper feed timing
adjustment for the 1st feed station.
SM 5-71 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[E]
[C]
[F]
[D]
[G]
[H]
3) Paper feed timing adjustment for the by-pass feed station

1. Set two sheets of paper on the by-pass feed table [A].
2. Enter SP mode (refer to Service Program Access Procedure) and access
SP Adjustment - PAGE 2.
3. Touch the "Copy in SP" key [B].

4. Select the by-pass feed station.
5. Press the start key then when the paper stops for registration, mark the
trailing edge [C] of the paper on the next paper as shown.
6. Measure the distance [D] between the leading edge of the mark [E] and
the trailing edge of the paper [F] as shown. The adjustment standard is
106 ~ 115 mm.
7. Touch the "SP Mode" key.
8. Touch the -- key [G] or the + key [H] to adjust the distance [D].
9. Touch the "Copy in SP" [B].
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9.
A175/A176/A177 5-72 SM
6.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH REMOVAL
[B]
[A]
[D]
[E]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
[C]
1. Turn off the main switch then open the right front door and remove the
push-lock [A].
2. Remove the toner collection bottle [B].
NOTE: If the LCT is installed, remove it from the copier.
3. Remove the lower right cover [C]. (Refer to Lower Right Cover Removal.)
4. Remove the upper then the lower vertical transport guides [D] and [E].
SM 5-73 A175/A176/A177
[B] [A]
[H]
[A]
[F]
[G] [I]
[D]
[C]
[E]
5. Remove the knobs [A] (1 screw each) then remove the right inner cover
[B] (2 screws).
6. While holding the shaft [C] with an Allen key, remove the fixing screw [D],
then remove the knob [E].
7. Remove the magnet [F].
8. Pull out all paper trays then remove the paper tray unit inner cover [G] (2
screws).
9. Remove the two connectors [H].
10. Remove the support bracket [I] (1 screw).
NOTE: The support bracket is used only for the first feed station.
A175/A176/A177 5-74 SM
[C]
[B]
[A]
[H]
[D]
[E]
[D]
[F]
Replacements
Adjustments
[G]
And
11. Fully draw out the paper tray.
12. Remove the two screws [A] fixing the tray feed unit [B].
13. Disconnect the connectors [C].
14. Remove the tray feed unit.
15. Loosen the two Allen screws [D].
16. Remove the tray feed clutch [E] (1 connector).
NOTE: When re-installing the tray feed clutch, set the stopper [F] of the
clutch on the edge of the bracket [G] then fully push in the clutch
on the feed roller shaft [H] and secure the Allen screws [D].
SM 5-75 A175/A176/A177
6.8 BY-PASS FEED TABLE REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[B]
1. Remove the right inner cover. (Refer to Right Inner Cover Removal.)
2. Remove the total counter with bracket (1 screw, 1 connector).
3. Loosen the Allen screw [A] on the hinge.
4. Remove the hinge pin [B] (1 screw).
5. Remove the by-pass feed table (1 connector).
A175/A176/A177 5-76 SM
6.9 BY-PASS FEED ROLLERS REPLACEMENT
[A]
Replacements
Adjustments
[B]
[C]
And
1. Open the by-pass feed table then remove the cover [A] (3 screws).
2. Replace the pick-up roller [B] (1 snap ring) and the feed roller [C] (1 snap
ring).
NOTE: The paper feed (pick-up, feed, separation) rollers used in the
by-pass feed table and LCT are different from the paper feed rollers
used in the 1st ~ 3rd feed units in the paper tray unit. They are not
interchangeable.
SM 5-77 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[B]
3. Remove the feed unit cover [A] as shown.

4. Replace the separation roller [B] (1 snap ring).
A175/A176/A177 5-78 SM
6.10 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
2. Open the by-pass table and remove the feed unit cover. (Refer to Feed
Unit Cover Removal.)
3. While pushing the hook [A] with the head of the flat head screw driver as
shown, remove the table assembly [B] (2 screws, 1 connector [C]).
4. Remove the by-pass paper size sensor [D] (2 screws).
SM 5-79 A175/A176/A177
[B]
[A]
[C]
[B]
5. Re-install the by-pass paper size sensor then reassemble the by-pass
feed table.
NOTE: When installing the table assembly, route the wires [A] correctly
as shown.
The paper guides [B] must be in the lower position as shown.
6. Perform the by-pass feed sensor paper size correction ( SP
Adjustment - PAGE 10) as follows:
1) Enter SP mode (refer to Service Program Access Procedure) then
access SP Adjustment - PAGE 10.
2) Place the side fence [C] at the A4 or 81/2 x 11 sideways position
according to the paper size decal on the table.
3) Place the side fence [C] at the A6 or 51/2 x 81/2 lengthwise position
according to the paper size decal on the table.
A175/A176/A177 5-80 SM
6.11 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[C]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
2. Lower the main control board [B] (2 screws).
3. Unhook the main control board bracket hinge [C].
SM 5-81 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[D]
[C]
[E]
[B]
4. Remove the by-pass feed motor [A] (2 screws).

5. Remove the clutch stopper [B] (1 screw).
NOTE: When re-installing the by-pass feed clutch [C], set the pin [D] of
the clutch in the cutout [E] of the stopper.
6. Remove the by-pass feed clutch (1 connector).
A175/A176/A177 5-82 SM
6.12 REGISTRATION CLUTCH REMOVAL
[B]
[C]
[D]
[A]
[E]
[F]
1. Lower then unhook the main control board bracket hinge. (Refer to
By-Pass Feed Clutch Removal.)
2. Remove the clutch stopper [A] (1 screw).
Replacements
Adjustments
NOTE: When re-installing the registration clutch [B], set the pin [C] of
And
the clutch in the cutout of the stopper [D].
3. Loosen the Allen screw [E].
4. Remove the registration clutch (1 connector).
NOTE: When re-installing the registration clutch, fully push in the clutch
on the registration roller shaft [F] and secure the Allen screw.
SM 5-83 A175/A176/A177
6.13 PAPER DUST CLEANER REMOVAL
[A] [B]
[B]
1. Remove the development unit. (Refer to Development Unit Removal.)

2. While pushing down the hook lever [A], remove the paper dust cleaner
[B].
3. Remove paper dust inside the paper dust cleaner and clean the inside of
the cleaner with a dry cloth or a blower-brush.
A175/A176/A177 5-84 SM
6.14 REGISTRATION SENSOR REMOVAL
[C]
[A]
[B] [D]
1. Remove the right inner cover [A]. (Refer to Right Inner Cover Removal.)
2. Disconnect the connector [B].
Replacements
3. Pull out the registration sensor assembly [C].
Adjustments
4. Clean the photo sensor [D] with a blower-brush.
And
SM 5-85 A175/A176/A177
6.15 COPIER FEED UNIT REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
1. Remove the development unit. (Refer to Development Unit Removal.)

2. Remove the right inner cover. (Refer to Right Inner Cover Removal.)
3. Remove the by-pass feed motor. (Refer to By-pass Feed Clutch
Removal.)
4. Remove the three connectors [A] for the guide plate positioning solenoid,
registration clutch, and the pick-up solenoid.
NOTE: Before disconnecting the connectors, make sure to identify
them. Some of the connectors use identical pin leads but they
are not interchangeable. Take special care not to misconnect
the positioning solenoid and registration clutch connectors.
5. Remove the upper right cover [B] and the paper feed unit cover [C].
6. Disconnect the three connectors [D].
7. Draw out the duplex unit about 10 cm.
A175/A176/A177 5-86 SM
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
8. Remove the registration roller knob [A] (1 screw).

9. Remove the copier feed unit [B] (4 screws).
NOTE: When installing the copier feed unit to the copier:
1) Do not pinch the harness.
Replacements
Adjustments
2) Keep the duplex unit drawn out.
And
3) Fit the two cut outs [C] to the pins [D].
SM 5-87 A175/A176/A177
6.16 TANDEM FEED TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE
NOTE: 1) At the factory, all paper trays (1st, 2nd and 3rd) are set as A4
sideways. At the customer’s request, change the paper size as
follows.
2) For the 550 sheet fixed paper tray and the 1500 sheet built-in
LCT, refer to the installation procedure section.
[B]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[B]
- Used as tandem tray for A4 sideways or smaller size paper -

1. Draw out the tandem tray [A].
2. Remove the rear and front side fences [B] (one screw and one pushlock
each) on the right tandem tray.
3. Re-position the end fences [C] on both rear and front side fences (1
screw each) according to the paper size.
A175/A176/A177 5-88 SM
[A]
[B]
[C] [D]
[E]
[A]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
4. Re-install both side fences [A] to the appropriate position according to
the paper size, as shown.
NOTE: The position of the side fence holders [B] and the pins [C] on the
lack gear differs according the paper size (from the outside pin:
A4, 11", B5).
5. Change the position of the front and rear side fences [D] (2 screws each)
and end fence [E] (2 screws) on the left tandem tray according to the
paper size.
6. Enter SP mode (refer to Service Program Access Procedure) and
access SP Special Features - PAGE 7.
7. Select the appropriate paper size according to position of the side and
end fences.
SM 5-89 A175/A176/A177
[C] [C]
[A] [A]
[B]
- Used as fixed tray for paper longer than A4/Letter sideways -

1. Draw out the tandem tray.
2. Remove the rear and the front side fences [A] (1 screw and 1 push-lock
pin each) on the right tandem tray.
3. Remove the end fences [B] on both the rear and the front side fences (2
screws each).
NOTE: It is not necessary to re-install the end fences.
4. Install both side fences to the appropriate position according to the paper
size (one screw and one lock pin for each side fence).
NOTE: Support plates [C] are used only for A4, B5, and letter
lengthwise sizes.
Keep the end fences and support plates for future use.
A175/A176/A177 5-90 SM
[B]
[A]
[A]
5. Change the position of the front and rear side fences [A] (2 screws each)
and end fence [B] (2 screws) of the left tandem tray according to the
paper size.
access SP Special Features - PAGE 7.
Replacements
Adjustments
7. Select the appropriate paper size according to the side and end fences
And
position.
SM 5-91 A175/A176/A177
6.17 UNIVERSAL TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE
At the factory, the universal paper tray is set as A4/81/2" x 11" sideways.
Normally, paper size is changed by the customer by following the operating
instructions.
Only when the customer needs the A5/51/2" x 81/2" lengthwise paper size
does a service representative need to change the paper size. In this case,
proceed as follows:
[A]
1. Install the front and rear side fences [A] (2 screws).

NOTE: These side fences are the same as the side fences used in the
550 sheet fixed paper tray.
These side fences are options, order them as service parts.
A175/A176/A177 5-92 SM
7. FUSING UNIT
7.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL
[B]
[A]
Replacements
Adjustments
2. Open the left front door.
And
3. Remove the stopper [A] (1 screw).
4. While releasing the lever [B], pull out the fusing unit as shown.
NOTE: Hold the bottom of the fusing unit as shown.
SM 5-93 A175/A176/A177
7.2 FUSING THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to Fusing Unit Removal.)

2. Remove the knob [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the two screws fixing the fusing front cover [B].
4. Pull the lever [C] then lower the cover [B] to unhook the fusing unit.
5. Remove the fusing unit upper cover [D] (1 screw).
6. Replace the thermistor [E] (1 screw, 1 connector).
NOTE: When re-assembling the fusing unit, secure the harness in the
clamps correctly.
Apply a little silicone oil at the thermistor’s point of contact with
the hot roller.
A175/A176/A177 5-94 SM
7.3 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT
[C]
[B]
[B]
[A]
1. Remove the fusing unit upper cover. (Refer to Fusing Thermistor

Replacement.)
2. Remove the terminal bracket [A] (2 screws, 1 hook).
Replacements
Adjustments
3. Disconnect the three connectors [B].
And
4. Replace the fusing thermofuse [C] (1 screw).
NOTE: When re-assembling the fusing unit, secure the harness in the
clamps correctly.
SM 5-95 A175/A176/A177
7.4 FUSING LAMP REPLACEMENT
[D] [E]
[C]
[B]
[G] [H] [G]

[F]
[A]
1. Remove the fusing unit. (Refer to Fusing Unit Removal.)

2. Remove the terminal bracket [A] (2 screws).
3. Disconnect the front connectors [B] and the rear connectors [C].
4. Remove the front fusing lamp holder [D] and the rear fusing lamp holder
[E] (1 screw each).
5. Replace the fusing lamp [F].
NOTE: Locate the green connector [C] of the fusing lamp to the rear
side.
Set the connectors from the fusing lamps (green) [G] and from
the thermofuse (white) [H] in the correct position on the terminal.
A175/A176/A177 5-96 SM
7.5 HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[A] [C]
[D]
Replacements
Adjustments
[B]
And
1. Remove the fusing lamps [A]. (Refer to Fusing Lamp Replacement.)
2. Lower the fusing exit assembly [B].
3. Remove the upper stay [C] (4 screws).
4. Remove the oil supply unit [D] (Refer to Oil Supply Roller Replacement).
SM 5-97 A175/A176/A177
[D]
[G]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[C]
[B]
[G]
[F] [A]
[E]
5. Lower both side pressure spring holders [A] by using the screw driver [B]
as a lever.
6. Remove the front and rear C-rings [C], gear [D], antistatic spacers [E]
isolating bushings [F] and bearings [G].
NOTE: When installing a new fusing roller:
1) Lubricate the inner and the outer surface of the isolating
bushings [F] with BARRIERTA L55/2 grease.
2) Lubricate the fusing drive gears and their shafts with grease
G501.
3) Peel off 3 cm (1 inch) form both ends of the protective sheet,
and install the hot roller.
Before applying fusing pressure, remove the rest of the
protective sheet.
A175/A176/A177 5-98 SM
7.6 PRESSURE AND BEARING ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
[C]
[A]
1. Remove the hot roller. (Refer to Hot Roller Replacement.)

2. Remove the lower fusing entrance guide [A] (2 screws).
Replacements
3. Lift the pressure roller [B] and remove it.
Adjustments
And
4. Replace pressure roller and bearings [C].
NOTE: When installing a new pressure roller:
1) Lubricate the roller shaft and the inner surface of the bearings
with BARRIERTA L55/2 grease.
2) Lubricate the fusing drive gears and their shafts with G501
grease.
5. Re-assemble the machine.
SM 5-99 A175/A176/A177
7.7 FUSING STRIPPER PAWL REPLACEMENT
[D] [E] [A]
[B]
[C]
[A]
[F]
[F]
1. Turn off the main switch and pull out the fusing unit.
2. Lower the fusing exit assembly [A].
3. Remove the two screws (the front screw [B] is a stepped screw) fixing
the upper exit guide [C].
4. Unhook the spring [D] then replace the strippers [E].
NOTE: After setting the fusing stripper pawl, confirm that the strippers
are correctly held by the stripper holders [F] as shown.
If not, remove the stripper and bend the holders [F] inward.
Apply the grease-Barrierta L55/2 on the inner surface of the
holder [F].
A175/A176/A177 5-100 SM
7.8 FUSING PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT
Rear
[A]
Front
[B]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
NIP BAND WIDTH ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: 8.1 ± 0.8 mm (A175), 10.0
± 0.5 (others)
1. Make a black copy (sky shot, A3/Double Letter paper).
2. As soon as the paper starts to exit, open the left door to stop the paper in
the fusing unit.
3. Wait about 20 seconds, then turn the fusing knob quickly to deliver the
paper.
4. Measure the nip band width [A] at the center.
5. If the nip band width is not within 8.1 ± 0.8 mm, change the spring hook
position [B].
SM 5-101 A175/A176/A177
7.9 PAPER EXIT UNIT REPLACEMENT
- Removal -
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
1. Remove the upper left cover. (Refer to Upper Left Cover Removal.)
2. Draw out the duplex unit [A].
3. Remove the lever bracket [B] (2 screws).
4. Disconnect the two connectors [C].
5. Take out the paper exit unit [D] (4 screws).
NOTE: Place the paper exit unit so that the paper exit roller comes to
the bottom to prevent the brush roller from being pressed and
damaged.
A175/A176/A177 5-102 SM
- Installation -
[B]
[D]
[A]
[F]
[C]
[E]
1. Set the paper exit unit in the following order:

1) Set the drive shaft [A] on the left rail [B].
2) Set the plate [C] on the right rail [D].
Replacements
Adjustments
3) Set the positioning pin [E] in the hole [F].
And
2. Install the paper exit unit (2 connectors, 4 screws).
3. Re-assemble the copier.
SM 5-103 A175/A176/A177
7.10 OIL SUPPLY/CLEANING ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[E]
[C] [F]
[D]
[G]
[E]
[I]
[H]
1. Pull out the fusing unit.
2. Lower the lever [A].
[F]
3. Remove the oil supply unit [B].
4. Remove the upper entrance guide [C] (1 screw).
5. Remove the mylar bracket [D] (2 screws).
6. Remove the springs [E].
7. Remove the bushings [F].
8. Remove the oil supply roller [G], the oil supply cleaning blade [H] (3
screws), and the cleaning roller [I].
9. Install the new cleaning blade [H], cleaning roller [I] and oil supply roller
[G] then reassemble the unit.
NOTE: Install the cleaning blade [H], cleaning roller [I], oil supply roller
[G] and bushing [F]. Then, install the assembled parts to the
bracket [J].
A175/A176/A177 5-104 SM
7.11 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING ROLLER
REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
Replacements
Adjustments
[D]
And
[C]
1. Pull out the fusing unit.
2. Remove the bottom plate [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the cleaning roller unit [B] (2 screws).
4. Remove the brackets [C] (1 screw each).
5. Remove the bushings [D].
6. Replace the cleaning roller [E].
7. Reassemble the unit.
SM 5-105 A175/A176/A177
8. DUPLEX UNIT
8.1 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[A]
[C] [B]
[D]
[E]
1. Open the front doors and draw out the duplex unit.
2. Remove the duplex front cover [A] (3 screws).
3. Slide the lever [B] to the rear then open the duplex reverse assembly [C].
4. Remove the lower separation guide plate [D] (2 screws).
5. Remove the snap ring [E].
A175/A176/A177 5-106 SM
[A]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[B]
6. Remove the harness bracket [A] (1 screw).

7. Remove the gear [B] (1 E-ring).
8. Remove the bushing [C] (1 E-ring).
Replacements
9. Slide the feed roller shaft [D] to the rear then slide the feed roller [E] to
Adjustments
the front and replace it as shown.
And
SM 5-107 A175/A176/A177
8.2 SEPARATION BELTS REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[F]
[E]
[D] [C]
[H]
[G]
1. Open the front doors and draw out the duplex unit.
2. Remove the gear [A] (1 E-ring).
3. Remove the bracket [B] (1 screw) then remove the gear [C].
4. Remove the gear [D] and the bushing [E] (1 E-ring).
5. Remove the separation belt unit [F].
6. Remove the guide mylar [G] (2 snap rings) and belt assembly [H] (1
screw).
A175/A176/A177 5-108 SM
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[G]
[F] [E]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
[H]
7. Remove the bushing [A] (1 snap ring).

8. Remove the drive roller [B].
9. Replace the three separation belts [C] as a set.
NOTE: When setting the tension spring [D], set it on the hook [E]
normally. The hook [F] applies higher separation pressure.
Confirm that the separation belt is correctly set between the
guides [G].
Confirm that the snap rings [H] do not touch the separation belts.
SM 5-109 A175/A176/A177
8.3 DUPLEX UNIT REMOVAL
[C]
[A]
[B]
[C]
1. Open the front doors and remove the left door.

2. Remove the right inner cover [A]. (Refer to the right inner cover removal.)
3. Draw out the duplex unit [B] until the stop position.
4. Take out the right and left stopper pulleys [C] (1 snap ring each).
5. Take out the duplex unit.
A175/A176/A177 5-110 SM
8.4 SEPARATION CLUTCH/TRANSPORT CLUTCH REMOVAL
[E]
[D] [B]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[G]
[F]
Replacements
Adjustments
[A]
And
Before replacing both clutches, take out the duplex unit. (Refer to Duplex
Unit Removal.)
NOTE: When installing both clutches, be sure to set the stopper [A] to the
projection [B].
- Separation Clutch -
1. Remove the harness bracket [C] (1 screw).
2. Remove the E-ring [D].
3. Replace the separation clutch [E].
- Transport Clutch -
1. Remove the E-ring [F].
2. Replace the separation clutch [G].
SM 5-111 A175/A176/A177
8.5 JOGGER MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[C]
[D]
[E] [B]
[G] [A]
[F]
1. Take out the duplex unit. (Refer to the duplex unit removal.)
2. Remove the duplex front cover (3 screws).
3. Slide the lever [A] to the rear then open the separation belt unit [B].
4. Remove the lower separation guide plate [C] (2 screws).
5. Remove the pressure arm [D] (1 snap-ring).
6. Remove the harness cover [E] (1 screw).
7. Remove the two connectors [F].
8. Remove the upper stay [G] (4 screws, 1 connector).
A175/A176/A177 5-112 SM
[D]
[C]
[B]
[E]
[A]
[G]
[F]
[G]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
9. Remove the positioning roller drive gear [A] (1 E-ring).
10. Remove the bushing [B] (1 E-ring).
11. Remove the positioning roller assembly [C].
12. Remove the front jogger fence [D] and the rear jogger fence [E] (1 screw
each).
13. Remove the duplex tray [F] (3 screws and a connector).
NOTE: To release the hooks [G], slide the duplex tray to the upper left
as shown.
SM 5-113 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[C]
[B]
[A] [H]
[F]
[G]
[I]
[D]
[J] [H] [E]
14. Remove the drive wire stoppers [A].

15. Unhook the tension spring [B] and remove the drive wire [C].
16. Remove the E-ring [D] and slide the shaft [E] to the left.
17. Remove the jogger motor bracket [F] (1 screw).
18. Remove the pressure arm solenoid [G] (1 screw).
19. Replace the jogger motor [H] (2 screws).
NOTE: When installing the drive pulley [I] to the jogger motor shaft, align
the shaft head [J] with the pulley head [H].
20. Re-assemble the duplex unit.
A175/A176/A177 5-114 SM
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[I]
Replacements
Adjustments
[G]
And
[F]
[H]
- Jogger Drive Wire Installation -

1) Set the bead [A] which is closer to the red colored hook [B] in the hole
[C] and install the stopper [D] (1 screw).
2) Round the drive wire twice around the drive motor pulley [E] as shown.
3) Move the rear jogger fence bracket [F] to the rear end position (until
the bracket [F] touches the screw [G]) and keep this condition.
4) Under the above condition, place the front jogger fence bracket [H] to
the front end position (until the bracket [H] touches the front screw).
5) Install the stopper [I] to fix the front jogger fence bracket with the wire.
SM 5-115 A175/A176/A177
[E]
[F]
[D] [G]
[A]
[I]
[C]
[B]
[H]
NOTE: 1) Adjust the position of the stopper [A] so that the jogger fences [B]
and side plate [C] are parrallel.
2) When installing the jogger fences, confirm if the two positioning
pins [D] are correctly set in the two holes on the side fences after
the screw is set.
3) When installing the positioning roller assembly, insert the plate [E]
in the hole [F] on the rear frame, then set the plate on the lever [G].
4) When installing the rear paper press mylar, set the hook [H] to the
rear jogger fence [I] as shown so that the mylar moves together
with the jogger fence [I].
5) After installing the jogger fences, manually move the jogger
fences [I] to confirm that they move smoothly.
6) After re-assembling the duplex unit, manually pull the plungers of
the positioning roller solenoid and the pressure arm solenoid to
confirm that the positioning roller assembly and the pressure arm
move up and down correctly.
7) After re-assembling the duplex unit, adjust the jogger fence width
so that the distance between both side fences become 1 mm
wider than the paper size, when paper is set on the duplex tray.
( SP Adjustment - PAGE 11.)
A175/A176/A177 5-116 SM
8.6 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT
8.6.1 SP Adjustment Mode
The copy quality adjustments in the table below can be performed by using
the appropriate SP Adjustment mode.
SP Adjustment Change
Item Standard Default
- PAGE- ITEM Amount/1 step
Leading edge registration 3-1 0 ± 2 mm 0.5 mm 00
Leading edge erase
3-2 3.5 ± 2.5 mm 0.5 mm 00
margin
Vertical magnification 3-3 100 ± 1% 0.1% 00
Horizontal magnification 3-4 100 ± 1% 0.1% 00
Side to side registration 4-5 0 ± 2 mm 0.1% 00
Focus in full size 5-1 — 0.1% 00
Focus in enlarge/ reduce
5-2 — 0.1% 00
(Lens error correction)
NOTE: When performing multiple adjustments, perform the items in order

from top to bottom.
Perform each adjustment as explained in the next pages.
Replacements
Adjustments
And
SM 5-117 A175/A176/A177
[A] [B]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[D]

access SP Adjustment mode.
2. Access the appropriate page by touching the "Prev." [A] or "Next" [B] key.
3. Touch the "Copy in SP" key [C] then select the proper copy mode.
4. Make a copy of the OS-A3 chart.
5. Confirm if copy quality is within the adjustment standard.
6. If the copy quality is not correct, touch the "SP Mode" key [D] at the left
upper corner of the LCD panel.
7. Touch the – key [E] or the + key [F] to change the data, then repeat
steps 3 to 6 until the copy quality becomes within the adjustment
standard.
8. Exit the SP mode.
A175/A176/A177 5-118 SM
8.6.2 Side-to-side Registration Adjustment (except for copier with RDH
and Finisher)
[D]
[A]
[C]
[F]
[B]
Replacements
Adjustments
– Rough Adjustment – [E]
And
1. Loosen the screws [A] for the tandem tray or built-in LCT, [B] for 550
sheets fixed tray or universal tray, or [C] for by-pass feed tray.
2. Move the tray position by moving parts [D], [E] and [F] of the trays.
– Fine Adjustment –
1. Enter SP mode (refer to the service program access procedure) and
access the side to side registration adjustment mode ( SP
Adjustment - PAGE 4).
2. Adjust side-to-side registration for each feed station by changing the SP

mode data.
NOTE: Copies can be made in SP mode. Touch "Copy in SP" key to
select the paper feed station.
Adjustment standard: Less than ± 2 mm difference between
original and copy.
SM 5-119 A175/A176/A177
8.6.3 Side-to-side Registration Adjustment (copier with RDH and
Finisher)
If the side-to-side image registration for paper fed from the duplex tray
should be adjusted, follow the entire procedure below.
If the side-to side registration for duplex tray feed does not need to be
adjusted but side-to-side registration for the paper feed tray should be
adjusted, follow only steps 4 and 5 of the procedure below.
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[F]
[E]
access the side to side registration adjustment mode ( SP
Adjustment - PAGE 4).
2. Adjust side-to-side registration for the duplex tray by changing the SP

mode data.
NOTE: Copies can be made in SP mode. Touch "Copy in SP" key to
Adjustment standard: Less than ± 2 mm difference between

original and copy.
3. Change the SP data of each paper feed tray so that it is the same as the
SP data of the duplex tray.
4. Loosen the screws [A] for the tandem tray or built-in LCT, [B] for
universal tray, or [C] for by-pass feed tray.
5. Reposition the tray by moving parts [D], [E] and [F] of the trays.
A175/A176/A177 5-120 SM
8.6.4 Uneven Exposure Adjustment
When: If the exposure is uneven.
Purpose: To maintain even exposure.
Adjustment standard: The side-to-side variation of the gray scales on
the test chart should be less than one level.
How: Change the position of the exposure lamp or
exposure adjustment wings to make light
intensity from the exposure lamp even across its
length.
[A]
Replacements
Adjustments
And
Wing positioning:
Image turns darker.
Image turns lighter.
1. Remove the exposure glass. (See Exposure Glass Removal.)

2. Position the adjustment wings [A] so that the side-to-side copy image
density variation is within the adjustment standard.
NOTE: If uneven density is not solved by this adjustment, proceed to the
steps 4 and 5 in the next page.
SM 5-121 A175/A176/A177
[B]
[B]
[C]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[A]
4. Turn the screw [A] to correct the position of the filament. The left edge of
the exposure lamp [B] should be directly beneath the center of the sight
hole [C] in the reflector cover.
CAUTION
Do not touch the screw [D].
A175/A176/A177 5-122 SM
8.6.5 Image Density Adjustment
When: The copy image density is already adjusted to the standard level
at the factory, and process control maintains copy image density
until the next PM. If the customer asks you to adjust the image
density, it can be done by using the User Tool mode.
Purpose: To adjust the copy image density.
How: The User Tool "image density level" mode changes the
development bias voltage.
1. Enter User Tool mode and access 3 Set operation modes.
2. Press the key once.
3. Select the appropriate image density

level (5 steps).
adjustment:
[C]
1) Press the appropriate ID level
key [A].
[B]
2) Press the enter key [B].
[A]
4. Press the "Menu" key [C].
Replacements
Adjustments
And
5. Press the "Exit" key [D] to exit
User Tool mode. [D]
6. Check copy quality.
SM 5-123 A175/A176/A177
8.6.6 Scanner Height Adjustment
When: If optically skewed images appear after
adjusting the 1st and 2nd scanner positions.
Purpose: To maintain a proper copy image.
How: Turn the 3rd scanner height adjusting cam.
This changes the 3rd scanner’s height.
[A]
[B]
[C]
Leading edge
Front advanced against leading and

trailing erase edge:
Raise adjustment screw
Rear advanced against leading and

trailing erase edge:
Original Copy Lower adjustment screw
1. Remove the exposure glass.

3. Adjust the 3rd scanner [B] height by the adjustment screw [C].
A175/A176/A177 5-124 SM
SECTION 6
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
1.1 SUMMARY
There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Display

The SC can only be reset by SC display will not be canceled.
service representative (see note
in the next page) to prevent the
machine from being damaged.
The copier cannot be operated
at all.
A
The copier can be operated as If the related function is selected, this display
usual except for the unit related appears.
to the service call.
Only the SC counter is SC will not be displayed.

incremented. The copier can be
Trouble -
shooting
C
operated as usual.
The SC can be reset by turning
main switch off and on if the SC
is caused by misdetection.
SM 6-1 A175/A176/A177
NOTE: 1) If the problem is related to electrical circuit boards, first disconnect
then reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs.
2) If the problem is related to motor lock, first check the mechanical
load before replacing motors or sensors.
3) To reset the SC of "Level: A", enter SP mode, then turn the main
switch off and on.
4) When an SC condition occurs while in SP mode, the display does
not indicate the SC number. You can recognize the SC condition
because in this condition, you cannot exit the SP mode by
touching the key.
If this occurs, confirm the SC number as follows:
1. Perform the same procedure to duplicate the SC condition.
2. Enter "Copy in SP" mode. You can see the SC number on the
display. You can also confirm the SC number by checking the
increment of the SP mode SC counter ( Jam/SC Counter
- PAGE 1).
NOTE: 1) When reference is made to a photointeruptor type sensors the

following conditions should be noted:
A. When a Sensor is off, it is unblocked, and the output
is OV (low).
B. When a Sensor is on, it is blocked, and the output is 5V (high).
A175/A176/A177 6-2 SM
1.2 EXPOSURE
SC101 - Exposure lamp malfunction - abnormal On/Off
Definition: [level: A]
During the lamp off condition, the optics control board detects a lamp
voltage.
Possible causes
• Exposure lamp open
• Triac shorted
• Exposure lamp thermoswitch open
• Optics control board defective
SC103 - Power source frequency detection error

Definition: [level: D]
Detects frequencies out of the 45Hz to 65Hz range.
Possible causes:
• Abnormal power source
• Electrical noise
• AC drive board defective
SC104 - Exposure lamp malfunction - abnormal off

The scanner start signal is received even if the main relay off condition is
detected.
Possible causes:
• Main relay defective
• Communication error between the main control board and the optics
control board because of a poor harness connection.
Trouble -
shooting
SM 6-3 A175/A176/A177
1.3 SCANNER
SC120 - Scanner home position sensor abnormal - stays off
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the on condition even
if the scanner returns home.
Possible causes:
• Scanner home position sensor defective
SC121 - Scanner home position sensor abnormal - stays on

The scanner home position sensor does not detect the off condition even
if the scanner leaves the scanner home position sensor by 120 mm.
Possible causes:
• Scanner home position sensor defective
• Scanner motor defective
• Scanner HP sensor short
SC125 - Low scanner speed

The scanner speed, detected by the optics control board through the
encoder, is lower than the specified speed.
Possible causes:
• Scanner drive motor defective
• Optics Control Board defective
SC126 - High scanner speed

The scanner speed, detected by the optics control board through the
encoder, is higher than the specified speed.
Possible causes:
SC127 - Scanner drive motor encoder failure

Scanner rotating direction detected by the optics control board through
the encoder is opposite to the specified direction.
Possible causes:
A175/A176/A177 6-4 SM
1.4 LENS MAGNIFICATION
SC140 - Lens vertical home position sensor abnormal - stays off
When the lens returns to the home position, the lens vertical home
position sensor does not detect the on condition for 2 seconds or more,
and more than twice.
Possible causes:
• Lens vertical home position sensor shorted
• Lens vertical drive motor defective
SC141 - Lens vertical home position sensor abnormal - stays on

When the lens leaves from the home position, the lens vertical home
position sensor does not detect the off condition for 3.5 seconds or more,
Possible causes:
• Lens vertical home position sensor open
SC142 - Lens horizontal home position sensor abnormal - stays off

When the lens returns to the home position, the lens horizontal home
potion sensor does not detect the on condition for 1.7 seconds or more,
Possible causes:
• Lens horizontal home position sensor short
• Lens horizontal drive motor defective
Trouble -
shooting
SC143 - Lens horizontal home position sensor abnormal - stays on
Definition: [level : D]
When the lens leaves from the home position, the lens horizontal home
potion sensor does not detect the off condition for 2.3 seconds or more,
Possible causes:
• Lens horizontal home position sensor open
SM 6-5 A175/A176/A177
SC144 - 3rd scanner home position sensor abnormal - stays off
When the 3rd scanner returns to the home position, the 3rd scanner
home position sensor does not detect the on condition for 1.2 seconds or
more, and more than twice.
Possible causes:
• 3rd scanner home position sensor shorted
• 3rd scanner drive motor defective
SC145 - 3rd scanner home position sensor abnormal - stays on

When the 3rd scanner leaves from the home position the 3rd scanner
home position sensor does not detect the off condition for 2.0 seconds or
more, and more than twice.
Possible causes:
• 3rd scanner home position sensor open
SC146 - Abnormal magnification operation

The lens vertical drive motor or the lens horizontal drive motor move for no
apparent reason in the ready condition.
Possible causes:
A175/A176/A177 6-6 SM
1.5 OPTICS THERMISTOR
SC190 - Optics thermistor open
The optics thermistor is open.
Possible causes:
• Optics thermistor open
NOTE: When the optics thermistor is shorted, no SC code is indicated.
The exhaust fan rotates quickly and continuously.
SC191 - Scanner motor thermistor open

The scanner motor thermistor is open.
Possible causes:
SC192 - High Scanner Motor Temperature (70 CPM)

The temperature of the scanner motor is 80°C or more.
Possible causes:
• Scanner motor clooing fan defective
1.6 MAIN CHARGE

SC302 - Charge corona leakage
The charge power pack detects a charge corona leakage (output: 0 V) for
4.8 ms, or detects the output to be more than 7 kV, 10 times in one job.
Possible causes:
• Main charge corona unit defective
• Main charge power pack defective
Trouble -
shooting
• High voltage control board defective
SM 6-7 A175/A176/A177
SC303 - Charge corona wire cleaner failure
Definition: [level: C]
The current of the charge corona wire cleaner drive motor is over the
specified current within 4 seconds after the cleaner motor starts.
The charge corona wire cleaner does not move back to the end block
within 30 seconds.
Possible causes:
• Charge corona wire cleaner drive motor defective
• Insufficient lubrication for the charge corona wire cleaner drive
mechanism (G501 grease)
1.7 DEVELOPMENT
SC341 - Development motor locked
Development motor lock signal stays low more than 1 second in
development motor on condition.
Possible causes:
• Extra load in the development unit
• Development motor defective
• Main control board defective
SC342 - Toner collection motor locked

The toner collection sensor output does not change (OFF → ON or ON
→ OFF) for more than 2.55 seconds in the toner collection motor on
condition.
Possible causes:
• Toner collection sensor defective
• Toner collection motor defective
• Toner clog in the toner collection pipe
SC343 - Toner collection bottle at improper position

Toner bottle set switch is off and the front door is closed.
Possible causes:
• Toner collection bottle set switch defective
• Toner collection bottle is set incorrectly
A175/A176/A177 6-8 SM
1.8 PROCESS CONTROL SENSORS
SC351 - Abnormal Vsg Detection (Vsg > 4.2V)
The detected Vsg value is over 4.2 V.
Possible causes:
• ID sensor defective
SC352 - Incomplete TD sensor initial setting

The output voltage of the TD sensor is higher than 2.6 V or lower than
2.4 V during the developer initial setting mode.
VOUT to get 2.5 V for the TD sensor output is higher than 10 V or lower
than 2 V.
Possible causes:
• Connector [A] not set correctly
• Toner density sensor defective
• Abnormal toner concentration
[A]
SC353 - Abnormal Vsp Detection (Vsp ≥ 2.5 V: lighter pattern)

Vsp is 2.5 V or higher.
Trouble -
shooting
Possible causes:
• OPC drum
• Poor contact of the development bias terminal
SM 6-9 A175/A176/A177
SC354 - Abnormal Vsg detection (Vsg ≤ 2.5 V)
Vsg is 2.5 V or less.
Possible causes:
• OPC drum
• Dirty charge corona casing
• Quenching lamp defective
• Erase lamp defective
• Cleaning blade defective
• Dirty ID sensor
SC355 - Abnormal VTD detection (VTD ≥ 4 V)

VTD is 4 V or higher.
Possible causes:
• Toner concentration too low
SC356 - Abnormal VTD detection (VTD < 0.5 V)

VTD is less than 0.5 V.
Possible causes:
• Toner concentration is too high
SC357 - Abnormal Vsp detection (Vsp/Vsg ≥ 25%)

Vsp/Vsg is 25% or higher.
Possible causes:
• OPC drum
• Dirty ID sensor
SC358 - Abnormal Vsp detection (Vsp/Vsg < 2.5%)

Vsp/Vsg is less than 2.5%.
Possible causes:
• OPC drum
• Toner scattering
A175/A176/A177 6-10 SM
SC361 - Incomplete drum potential sensor calibration
When the process control initial setting is performed and a development
bias of --100 V or --800 V is applied to the drum shaft, the drum potential
voltage is out of these ranges:
0.1 ≤ V--100 ≤ 0.7 [V] or 2.7 ≤ V--800 ≤ 4.2 [V].
Possible causes:
• Drum potential sensor defective
• Drum shaft terminal not grounded
• OPC drum
SC364 - Abnormal VD detection

VD is out of specification (VR + 770 ± 20 V).
Possible causes:
• OPC drum
SC365 - Abnormal VL detection

VL is out of specification (VR + 140 ± 20 V).
Possible causes:
• OPC drum
• Optics too dirty
SC366
Trouble -
shooting
VR is larger than 360 V in the process control initialization.
Possible causes
• OPC drum
• Drum shaft terminal not ground
SM 6-11 A175/A176/A177
1.9 TRANSFER CURRENT
SC402 - Transfer current leakage
When the transfer power pack output voltage exceeds 4.5 kV for 200 ms
or more, the output current is multiplied by 0.8. If this condition occurs 11
time in a row, an SC is displayed.
Possible causes:
• Transfer belt defective
• Transfer power pack defective
• Poor contact at transfer bias roller, discharge plate terminals
1.10 DRUM
SC440 - Abnormal main motor speed
Lock signal stays low in the main motor on condition for 1.0 second or
more.
Possible causes:
• Main motor defective
SC442 - Drum thermistor open

The drum thermistor is open.
Possible causes:
• Drum thermistor defective
A175/A176/A177 6-12 SM
1.11 PAPER FEED
SC500 - Abnormal manual feed drive motor speed
Definition: [level : D]
Lock signal stays low in the manual feed motor on condition for 1.0
second or more.
Possible causes:
• Manual feed motor defective
SC501 - Abnormal paper feed drive motor speed

Lock signal stays low in the paper feed motor on condition for 1.0 second
or more.
Possible causes:
• Paper feed motor defective
• Paper feed control board defective
SC502 - Abnormal 1st lift motor movement

Definition: [level: B]
The 1st lift sensor detects high condition for 10 seconds or more after the
1st lift motor starts. The first time, after the paper tray is opened and
closed, the 1st lift motor starts again. If the above condition occurs twice,
this SC is displayed.
Possible causes:
• 1st lift sensor shorted
• 1st lift motor defective
SC503 - Abnormal 2nd lift motor movement

The 2nd lift sensor detects the high condition for 10 seconds or more
after the 2nd lift motor starts. The first time, after the paper tray is opened
Trouble -
shooting
and closed, the 2nd lift motor starts again. If the above condition occurs
twice, this SC is displayed.
Possible causes:
• 2nd lift sensor shorted
• 2nd lift motor defective
SM 6-13 A175/A176/A177
SC504 - Abnormal 3rd lift motor (1.5 k LCT motor for A096 copier)
movement
The 3rd lift sensor detects the high condition for 10 seconds or more
after the 3rd lift motor starts. The first time, after the paper tray is opened
and closed, the 3rd lift motor starts again. If the above condition occurs
Possible causes:
• 3rd lift sensor shorted
• 3rd lift motor (1.5 k LCT motor for A096 copier) defective
SC506 - Abnormal 3.5 k LCT motor movement

The LCT lift sensor detects the low condition for 10 seconds or more
after the LCT motor starts. The first time, after the LCT cover is opened
and closed, the LCT motor starts again. If the above condition occurs
Possible causes:
• LCT motor defective
• LCT lift sensor shorted
SC507 - Abnormal 3.5 k LCT feed motor movement

The LCT feed motor is locked for 1 second or more after this motor starts.
Possible causes:
• LCT feed motor defective
SC508 - Abnormal tandem rear fence drive motor movement

It takes 10 seconds or more for the rear fence return sensor to detect the
on condition after the rear fence drive motor starts.
It takes 10 seconds or more for the rear fence home position sensor to
detect the on condition after this fence starts moving to the home
position.
When the tray is set, the rear fence return sensor and the rear fence the
home position sensor are on.
Possible causes:
• Rear fence drive motor defective
• Rear fence HP sensor defective
• Rear fence return sensor defective
A175/A176/A177 6-14 SM
SC510 - Abnormal tandem side fence home position detection - stays
off
When the side fence goes back to the home position or the side fence
drive motor works to open the fence, the side fence positioning sensor
does not detect the on condition for 5 seconds or more.
Possible causes:
• Side fence drive motor defective
• Side fence positioning sensor open
SC511 - Abnormal tandem side fence home position detection - stays

on
When the side fence goes back to the home position or the side fence
drive motor works to close the fence, the side fence positioning sensor
stays on for 5 seconds.
Possible causes:
• Side fence drive motor defective
• Side fence positioning sensor shorted
1.12 DUPLEX
SC520 - Abnormal fusing/duplex drive motor movement
The lock signal stays low for 1.0 second after the fusing/duplex drive
motor starts.
Possible causes:
• Fusing/duplex drive motor defective
• Cleaning roller is too dirty and applies a great load to the
fusing/duplex drive motor.
Trouble -
shooting
SC522 - Abnormal jogger home position sensor detection - stays off
The jogger home position sensor does not detect the on condition for 5
seconds or more after the fusing/duplex drive motor starts.
Possible causes:
• Jogger motor defective
• Jogger HP sensor open
SM 6-15 A175/A176/A177
SC523 - Abnormal jogger home position sensor detection - stays on
The jogger home position sensor does not detect the off condition for 1
second after its sensor detects the on condition in the initializing mode.
Possible causes:
• Jogger drive motor defective
• Jogger HP sensor shorted
1.13 FUSING
SC541 - Fusing thermistor open
Detects the fusing thermistor open condition for 2 ms or more after
turning the main switch on.
Possible causes:
• Fusing thermistor open
SC542 - Start key stays red

The fusing temperature does not reach the specified temperature after 5
minutes from turning the main switch on.
Possible causes:
• Fusing lamp defective
• AC Drive board defective
• Fusing thermistor defective
SC543 - Fusing overheat (detected by the main control board)

SC544 - Fusing overheat (detected by the optics control board)
The fusing temperature stays over 231°C for 5 seconds.
Possible causes:
A175/A176/A177 6-16 SM
SC545 - Low fusing temperature (detected by the main control board)
SC546 - Low fusing temperature (detected by the optics control board)
The fusing temperature stays lower than 100°C for 5 seconds after the
machine becomes ready.
Possible causes:
• Fusing lamp open
SC547 - Fusing lamp continuously lit

Fusing lamp continuously lights for 70 seconds after the machine
becomes ready. However, if the door is open, paper jams, or the fusing
unit is out of position, the ready condition is canceled and the main relay
opens.
Possible causes:
• AC drive board
SC548 - Unstable fusing temperature

If the fusing temperature changes by 21°C/second four times in 1 minute,
this SC is displayed.
Possible causes:
• Thermistor defective
Trouble -
shooting
SM 6-17 A175/A176/A177
1.14 SYSTEM CONTROL
SC600 - Communication error (main control board and operation panel)
The main control board does not communicate with the operation panel.
Possible causes:
• Operation panel defective
• Harness defective
SC601 - Communication error (main control board and optics control

board)
The main control board does not communicate with the optics control
board.
Possible causes:
SC603 - Main control board malfunction (CPU)

Communication to the main control board is not completed.
Possible causes:
SC620 - Communication error (main control board and DJF/RDH main

board)
The main board does not communicate with the DJF/RDH main board.
Possible causes:
• DJF/RDH main board defective
• Fiber optics defective
A175/A176/A177 6-18 SM
SC621 - Communication error (main control board and sorter staplers/
finisher main board)
The main control board does not communicate with the sorter stapler/
finisher main board.
Possible causes:
• Sorter stapler/finisher main board defective
• Fiber optics defective
1.15 DUAL JOB FEEDER/RECIRCULATING DOCUMENT

HANDLER
SC700 - Abnormal DJF/RDH feed-in motor movement
SC701 - Abnormal DJF/RDH transport belt motor movement
SC702 - Abnormal DJF/RDH feed out motor movement
SC703 - Abnormal RDH inverter motor movement
Encoder pulse is not detected by the DJF/RDH main board in the main
motor on condition. The first time, a jam occurs. The second time, an SC
is displayed.
Possible causes:
• DJF/RDH feed motor defective
• DJF/RDH transport motor defective
• DJF/RDH feed out motor defective
• DJF/RDH inverter motor defective
Trouble -
shooting
SM 6-19 A175/A176/A177
1.16 FINISHER/SORTER STAPLER
SC730 - Abnormal *transport motor sorter stapler/finisher) movement
When the encoder pulse is not detected by the SS (or finisher) main board
for 200 ms after the *transport motor starts, a jam is displayed. If this occurs
twice, an SC is displayed.
Possible causes:
• *Transport motor
Sorter Stapler Finisher

* Main motor Transport drive motor
SC731 - Abnormal bin drive (lift) motor movement (sorter staplers)

If the wheel sensor (bin lift timing sensors) is not off after 2 seconds from
when the bin drive (lift) motor stars, jam "R2" is indicated.
If the wheel sensor (bin lift timing sensors) is not on after 2 seconds from
when the wheel sensor (bin lift timing sensors) detects off, jam "R2" is
indicated.
If the condition above occurs twice, an SC is displayed.
Possible causes:
• Wheel sensor (bin lift timing sensors) defective
• Bin drive (Lift) motor defective
SC732 - Tray shift motor (finisher)

The shift tray half turn sensor does not detect the on condition for 2
seconds after the finisher tray shift motor starts.
The first time, a jam is indicated. The 2nd time, an SC is displayed.
Possible causes:
• Tray shift motor defective
• Shift tray half turn sensor defective
SC733 - Shift tray lift motor (finisher)

The stack height sensor 1 or 2 do not detect the on condition for the
specified time after the finisher shift tray lift motor.
Possible causes:
• Shift tray lift motor defective
• Stack height sensor 1 or 2 defective
A175/A176/A177 6-20 SM
SC735 - Abnormal jogger motor movement (sorter staplers/finisher)
When the jogger moves back to the home position, the jogger home
position sensor does not detect the on condition within 650 pulses. Then,
a jam is indicated.
When the jogger moves from the home position forward, and moves
back to the home position, the jogger home position sensor does not
detect the on condition within 100 pulses. Then, a jam is indicated.
If the above condition occurs twice, an SC is displayed.
Possible causes:
• Jogger motor defective
• Jogger home position sensor defective
SC737 - Abnormal gripper motor movement (sorter staplers)

When the gripper moves to the staple position, the gripper home position
sensor does not detect the on condition. Then a jam is indicated.
When the gripper moves from the staple position to the bin position, the
gripper home position sensor does not detect the on condition within
1070 pulses. Then a jam is indicated.
When the gripper moves to the home position, the gripper home position
sensor does not detect the on condition within 1.25 seconds. Then a jam
is indicated.
When the gripper moves from the home position forward, and moves
back to the home position, the gripper home position does not detect the
on condition within 500 ms or more. Then a jam is indicated.
If the above condition occurs twice, an SC is displayed.
Possible causes:
• Gripper motor defective
• Gripper home position sensor defective
SC738 - Abnormal staple motor movement (sorter staplers)
Trouble -
shooting
The staple home position sensor does not detect the on condition within
600 ms after the motor starts. Then a jam is indicated. If this occurs
Possible causes:
• Staple unit (staple motor) defective
• Staple is jammed in the staple unit.
SM 6-21 A175/A176/A177
SC740 - Abnormal staple unit drive motor movement (sorter stapler/
finisher)
The staple unit home position sensor does not detect the on condition
when the staple unit is in the home position. A jam is indicated.
(within 1640 pulses) when the staple unit moves to the home position. A
jam is indicated.
(within 280 pulses) when the staple unit moves forward from the home
position and moves back to the home position. A jam is indicated.
If the above condition occurs twice, this SC is displayed.
Possible causes:
• Staple unit drive motor defective
• Staple unit home position sensor defective
SC741 - Abnormal bin rear plate motor movement (sorter stapler)

When the rear bin plate is open, the bin rear plate open sensor does not
detect the on condition for 750 ms or more after the motor starts. Then a
jam is indicated.
When the rear bin plate is closed, the bin rear plate home position
sensor does not detect the on condition for 750 ms or more after the
motor starts. Then a jam is indicated.
In the initial condition, the bin rear plate open sensor does not detect the
on condition for 1.25 seconds or more after the motor starts. Then a jam
is indicated.
If the above condition occurs twice, this SC is displayed.
Possible causes:
• Bin rear plate drive motor defective
• Bin rear plate open sensor defective
• Bin rear plate home position sensor defective
SC742 - Abnormal stack feed out motor movement (finisher)

No encoder pulses is detected for 500 ms. or more.
Possible causes:
• Stack feed out motor defective
A175/A176/A177 6-22 SM
SC743 - Punch motor abnormal (sorter stapler with punch)
When turning on the main switch, the punch home position sensor is not
activated within 1100 pulses. Then an R2 jam is indicated.
In punch mode, the punch home position sensor is not activated within
950 pulses after rotating the punch motor. Then an R2 jam is indicated. If
the above condition occurs twice, this SC is displayed.
Possible causes:
• Punch motor
• Punch home position sensor
SC744 - Staple jam release abnormal (sorter stapler)

Definition: [level B]
In the initial condition the paper sensor is activated and the staple home
position sensor is de-activated. Then, an R3 (staple) jam is indicated. If
this condition occurs 4 times in a row, this SC is displayed.
Possible causes:
• Stapler
Trouble -
shooting
SM 6-23 A175/A176/A177
1.17 OTHERS
SC900 - Total counter failure (staying in the off condition)
The total counter stays in the off condition.
Possible causes:
• Total counter defective
SC901 - Total counter failure (staying in the on condition)

The total counter stays in the on condition.
Possible causes:
• Total counter defective
SC full used toner bottle

The toner overflow switch is activated.
Possible causes:
• Toner collection bottle is full
• Toner overflow switch defective
NOTE: Clear the SC full used toner bottle as follows:
1) While the main switch is on, open the front doors then take
out the toner collection bottle (used toner bottle).
2) Remove the toner collection bottle then empty and clean the
bottle.
3) Install the empty toner collection bottle.
4) Close the front doors.
SC940 - Main Switch Abnormal (U.S.A. version only)

The Main switch does not turn off after sending the reset signal two times
in a row.
Possible causes:
• Main switch
• Main PCB
A175/A176/A177 6-24 SM
2. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
2.1 SENSORS
NOTE: All photo-interrupters go low (GND) when the actuator interrupts the
gap between the LED and the photo transistor.
Component Symptom
CN Condition
(Symbol) (when the main switch turns on)
Scanner HP Open SC125 is displayed
(S-1) 512-1
Shorted SC121 is displayed
Platen Cover Open APS and AMS do not function correctly.
Position-1 512-7
(S-2) Shorted ----
Platen Cover "Original is on the glass" indicator is

Position-2 Open displayed even if the original on the glass
518-1
(S-3) has already been removed.
Shorted ----
Lens vertical HP Open SC141 is displayed
(S-4) 512-5
Lens Horizontal HP Open SC143 is displayed
(S-5) 513-1
3rd Scanner HP Open SC145 is displayed
(S-6) 511-1
By-Pass Paper End "Paper end" indicator is not displayed even if
Open
(S-7) there is no paper on the by-pass feed table.
108-A5
"Paper end" indicator is displayed even if
Shorted
paper is set on the by-pass feed table.
Guide Plate "Guide plate open" indicator is not displayed
Open
Position even if the guide plate is open.
(S-8) 108-B9
"Guide plate open" indicator is displayed
Shorted
even if the guide plate is closed.
Jogger HP Open Jogger motor locks (SC522 counts up)
(S-9) 112-A10
Trouble -
shooting
Shorted Jogger motor locks (SC523 counts up)
Vertical Transport Open ----
108-A2
(S-10) Shorted ----
Duplex Exit "Paper Jam T" indicator is displayed even if
Open
(S-11) there is no paper.
112-A8
Whenever a duplex copy is made, "Paper
Shorted
Jam T" occurs.
Duplex Entrance "Paper Jam T" indicator is displayed even if
Open
Sensor there is no paper.
(S-12) 112-A7
Shorted
Jam T" occurs.
SM 6-25 A175/A176/A177
Component Symptom
CN Condition
Duplex Paper End "Copies left in the duplex tray...." indicator is
(S-13) Open displayed even if there is paper in the duplex
112-A9 tray.
Only one rear side copy is made regardless
Shorted
of the quantity of copies.
Duplex Transport "Paper Jam T" indicator is displayed even if
Open
109-A4
Shorted
Jam T" occurs.
Exit "Paper Jam E" indicator is displayed even if
Open
109-A2
Whenever the copy is fed out, "Paper Jam
Shorted
D" occurs.
Fusing Exit "Paper Jam D" indicator is displayed even if
Open
109-B7
Whenever a copy is made, "Paper Jam C
Shorted
and D" occurs.
Paper Guide Open ----
(S-17) 109-B4 Whenever a duplex copy is made, "Paper
Shorted
Jam T" occurs.
Auto Image Density Open
507-1
(S-18) Shorted Image density will be abnormal.
Original Length-1 508-8, 9, Open The CPU cannot properly detect original
(S-19) 10 Shorted size. APS and AMS do not function correctly.
Original Length-2 Open The CPU cannot properly detect original
509-3, 4, 5
(S-20) Shorted size. APS and AMS do not function correctly.
Original Width Open The CPU cannot properly detect original
508-3, 4, 5
(S-21) Shorted size. APS and AMS do not function correctly.
By-Pass Paper Size The CPU recognizes that the paper width is
(S-22) Open 319 mm regardless of the side fence
position.
114-6
The CPU recognizes that the paper width is
Shorted 100 mm regardless of the side fence
position.
Toner Density Open Machine quits auto toner supply mode and
114-3
(S-23) Shorted enters fixed supply mode.
Registration "Paper Jam C" indicator is displayed even if
Open
108-A7
Whenever a copy is made, "Paper Jam C"
Shorted
occurs.
Toner End Toner is added even if there is too much
Open
(S-25) toner in the toner hopper.
108-B14
Toner is not supplied even if there is no
Shorted
toner in the toner hopper.
A175/A176/A177 6-26 SM
Component Symptom
CN Condition
Auto-Response The machine does not exit "Screen Saver"
(S-26) Open mode even if an operator approaches the
113-B3 machine.
Shorted "Screen Saver" mode does not work.
Drum Potential Open Machine quits auto process control and
110-10
(S-27) Shorted enters fixed toner supply mode.
Image Density Open Machine quits auto toner supply mode and
111-3
(S-28) Shorted enters detect mode.
1st Paper End "Paper end" indicator is not displayed even if
(S-29) Open there is no paper on the paper tray.
401-A5
Shorted
paper is set.
1st Paper Near End "Paper near end" indicator is not displayed
Open
(S-30) even if the tray is almost empty.
412-A2
"Paper near end" indicator is displayed even
Shorted
if there is enough paper on the paper tray.
1st Paper Feed Open Whenever paper is fed, it is folded.
(S-31) 402-A1 "Paper jam A" indicator is displayed even if
Shorted
there is no paper.
2nd Paper Near "Paper near end" indicator is not displayed
Open
End even if the tray is almost empty.
(S-32) 412-A5
Shorted
1st Lift "Add paper" indicator is displayed even if
Open
(S-33) there is paper on the tray.
401-A2
The tray bottom plate locks at the upper
Shorted
position.
2nd Paper End "Paper end" indicator is not displayed even if
Open
(S-34) there is no paper on the paper tray.
401-B5
Shorted
paper is set.
Trouble -
shooting
Toner Collection Open SC342 is displayed.
Motor 412-B5
(S-35) Shorted
2nd Lift "Add paper" indicator is displayed even if

Open
(S-36) there is paper on the tray.
401-B2
Shorted position.
3rd Lift "Add paper" indicator is displayed even if
(S-37) Open there is paper on the tray.
403-A2
Shorted position.
SM 6-27 A175/A176/A177
Component Symptom
CN Condition
3rd Paper Near End "Paper near end" indicator is not displayed
Open
(4 Tray version even if the tray is almost empty.
only) 412-A8
(S-38) Shorted
3rd Paper End "Paper end" indicator is not displayed even if
Open
(S-39) there is no paper on the paper tray.
403-A5
Shorted
paper is set.
3rd Paper Feed Open Whenever paper is fed, it is folded.
(S-40) 402-A8 "Paper jam A" indicator is displayed even if
Shorted
there is no paper.
2nd Paper Feed Open Whenever paper is fed, it is folded.
(S-41) 402-B1 "Paper jam A" indicator is displayed even if
Shorted
there is no paper.
Base Plate Down The bottom plate lift lever locks at the lowest
Open
(Tandem version position.
only) (S-42) 404-A10 The bottom plate is not lowered when paper
Shorted on the left tray shifts to the right tray and
paper is set in the improper position.
Side Fence Open SC510 is displayed
Positioning SC511 is displayed
404-A13
(Tandem version Shorted
only) (S-43)
Rear Fence Return When the rear fence reaches the return
(Tandem version Open position, the rear plate locks there then
only) (S-44) 404-B10 SC508 is displayed.
Shorted SC508 is displayed.
Rear Fence HP Open SC508 is displayed.
(Tandem version 404-B6 When the rear fence reaches the return
only) (S-45) Shorted
position, SC508 is displayed.
Left Tandem Paper The rear fence moves back and forth
Open
End (Tandem continuously.
version only) (S-46) 404-B12
The paper on the left tray is not moved to
Shorted
the right tray.
LCT Near End "Paper near end" indicator is not displayed
Open
(1,500 Tray version even if the tray is almost empty.
only) (S-47) 412-A7
Shorted
Tray Down When the bottom plate is lowered, it locks at
Open
(1,500 Tray version the lowest position.
only) (S-48) 403-B2
Shorted
there is paper on the tray.
Tray Paper End The bottom plate raises & lowers even if no
Open
(1,500 Tray version paper is set.
only) (S-49) 412-A11 The bottom plate does not raise even if
Shorted paper is set on the tray.
A175/A176/A177 6-28 SM
2.2 SWITCHES
Component CN No. Condition Symptom
By-Pass Table "Open the by-pass tray" indicator is
(SW-1) Open displayed even if the by-pass tray is opened.
108-B11 Print key stays red.
Shorted By-pass feed motor continuously turns.
Front Door Safety "Close the door" indicator lights even if the
Open
(SW-2) front door is closed.
----
Copier does not turn off when the front doors
Shorted
are open.
1st Tray Set When the 1st tray is selected, SC502 is
Open
(A175 copier only) displayed.
(SW-3) 407-B8
The 1st tray cannot be selected even if the
Shorted
1st tray is set in the machine.
2nd Paper Size Open The CPU cannot detect proper paper size,
407-A2 ~
(SW-4) and misfeeds may occur when a copy is
A6 Shorted made.
Toner Overflow SC "Full Used Toner Bottle" indicator lights
Open
(SW-5) even if the toner bottle is not full.
412-B9
SC "Full Used Toner Bottle" indicator does
Shorted
not light even if the toner bottle becomes full.
Toner Collection No caution is displayed on the LCD even if
Open
Bottle Set 412-B7 the toner collection bottle is set incorrectly.
(SW-6) SC343 is displayed.
Shorted
Lower Front Whenever paper is fed from the tray unit,
Open
Door Safety 410-1 SC501 is displayed.
(SW-7) Shorted ----
3rd Tray Set When the 3rd tray is selected, SC504 is
Open
(4 Trat version only) displayed.
(SW-8) 407-B1
The 3rd tray cannot be selected even if the
Shorted
3rd tray is set in the machine.
Main Open The copier does not turn on.
(SW-9) ----
Shorted The copier does not turn off.
Trouble -
shooting
Tray Down The 3rd tray bottom plate stays at the lowest
Open
(1,500 Tray version position.
only) (SW-10) 402-B14
The 3rd tray bottom plate stays at the
Shorted
highest position.
SM 6-29 A175/A176/A177
2.3 FUSES
2.3.1 DC Power Supply Board
Component Condition Symptom
FU801 (125 V, 10 A) Power is not provided when the main switch is on
Open
(No indicator displayed on the operation panel).
FU802 (125 V, 5 A) Power is not provided when the main switch is on
Open
(No indicator displayed on the operation panel).
FU803 (125 V, 6.3 A) When the 3rd feed station is selected, SC504 is
Open
displayed.
FU804 (125 V, 6.3 A) When the main switch is turned on, SC900 is
Open
displayed.
FU805 (125 V, 6.3 A) When each feed station is selected, the following
indication is displayed:
1st : SC510
Open 2nd : Add Paper
3rd : SC504
When the paper is fed from the By-pass feed table,
SC342 is displayed.
FU806 (125 V, 6.3 A) When the 3rd feed station is selected, SC504 is
displayed.
Open
DJF (RDH) and Sorter Stapler (Finisher) do not
operate.
A175/A176/A177 6-30 SM
SECTION 7
DUAL JOB FEEDER
DF62 (A610)
1. SPECIFICATIONS
Original Feed Mode: Automatic document feed mode
Automatic reverse document feed mode
Semi-automatic document feed mode
Combine 2 originals mode
Mixed sized mode
Preset mode
Original Size and Weight: Thick original mode (default mode)

Use this setting for normal paper types
Maximum: A3, 11" x 17"
Minimum: B6, 51/2" x 81/2"
2
Weight: 52 ~ 128 g/m (14-34 lb)
Thin original mode

Minimum: B6, 51/2" x 81/2"
2
Weight: 40 ~ 128 g/m (11-34 lb)
Auto reverse mode

Minimum: B6 (lengthwise)
Weight: 52 ~ 105 g/m2 (14-28 lb)
Combine two originals mode

Maximum: A4 (sideways), 81/2" x 11" (sideways)
Minimum: B5 (sideways), 51/2" x 81/2" (sideways)
2
Weight: 52 ~ 128 g/m (14-34 lb)
Mixed size Mode

Minimum: B5, 81/2" x 11"
Weight: 52 ~ 80 g/m2 (14-21 lb)
2
Original Table Capacity: 50 sheets at 80 g/m (21 lb)
(or stack height of less than 5 mm)
Dual Job Feeder
Original Standard Position: Rear left

DF62 (A610)
Original Separation: Feed and friction belt

Original Transport: One flat belt
SM 7-1 A175/A176/A177
Power Source: DC24 V from the copier, 2.5 A (average)
Power Consumption: 70W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 680 x 522 x 133 mm
(26.8" x 20.0" x 4.6")
Weight: 14.5 kg (32.0 lb)
A175/A176/A177 7-2 SM
2. COMPONENT LAYOUT
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2 3 4 5
12
6
11
10
9 8 7
1. Original Stopper 7. Inverter Roller

2. Press Roller 8. Transport Belt
3. Side Fence 9. Pick-up Rollers
4. Original Table 10. Pull-out Rollers
5. Exit Roller 11. Feed Roller
6. Inverter Pawl 12. Friction Belt
Dual Job Feeder

DF62 (A610)
SM 7-3 A175/A176/A177
2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1
22 2
21 3
4
20
5
6
19
7
8
18
9
17
10
16
15
11
14
12
13
1. Feed-in Cover Open Sensor 12. Pulse Count Sensor

2. Friction Belt Motor 13. Registration-2 Sensor
3. Feed-in Motor 14. Original Width-1 Sensor
4. Indicator Panel Lamps 15. Original Width-2 Sensor
5. Belt Drive Motor 16. Original Width-3 Sensor
6. DF Main Board 17. Registration-1 Sensor
7. DF Position Sensor 18. Original Set Sensor
8. APS Start Sensor 19. Original Feed Sensor
9. Inverter Solenoid 20. Friction Belt Turn Sensor
10. Feed-out Motor 21. Feed-in Clutch
11. Feed-out Sensor 22. Stopper Solenoid
A175/A176/A177 7-4 SM
Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the
point-to-point diagram for symbols and index numbers.
Motors
M1 Friction Belt Drives the friction belt. 2
Feed-in Drives the feed-in system (pick-up, feed,
M2 3
pull-out rollers)
M3 Belt Drive Drives the transport belt. 5
Feed-out Drives the feed-out and the inverter
M4 10
system.
Sensors
Feed-in Cover Open Detects whether or not the feed-in cover is
S1 1
open.
DF Position Informs the CPU whether the DJF is in the
S2 7
up or down position.
APS Start Informs the CPU when the DJF is being
closed so that the original size sensors in
S3 8
the main body can check the original size
(in platen mode).
Feed-out Checks for original misfeeds and sets
S4 original stop timing when in auto-reverse 11
mode.
Pulse Count Counts the pulses generated by the pulse
S5 generator disc to determine the original 12
length.
Registration-2 Detects the leading edge of the original to
turn off the feed-in clutch and to change
S6 13
the feed-in motor speed. Also detects the
original length.
S7 Original Width-1 Detects the original width. 14
Registration-1 Detects the original length and original
S10 jam by detecting the trailing edge of the 17
original.
Dual Job Feeder
Original Set Detects if originals have been placed on

DF62 (A610)
S11 the feed table. 18
Original Feed Detects if the originals have reached the

S12 feed roller or not. 19
Friction Belt Turn Counts the pulses generated by the pulse

generator disk to monitor the friction belt
S13 20
motor.
SM 7-5 A175/A176/A177
Solenoids
Inverter Inverts the original when copying
SOL1 9
two-sided originals.
Stopper Lifts the original stopper and lowers the
SOL2 press roller to feed the set of originals to 22
the feed roller.
PCBs
PCB1 DF Main Board Controls all DJF functions. 6
Magnetic Clutch
Feed-in Transmits the feed-in motor drive to the
CL1 21
pick-up, feed, and pull-out rollers.
Indicator Lamps
Ready Informs the operator that the DJF is in the
down position.
L1 4
Auto Informs the operator that the auto feed
mode is available.
A175/A176/A177 7-6 SM
4. ORIGINAL PICK-UP MECHANISM
[D]
[C]
[A]
[E]
[B]
[C]
[J]
[F]
[I]
[G]
[H]
When an original [A] is placed on the original table [B], the leading edge is
stopped by the stopper [C], and the feeler [D] is pushed out of the original
set sensor. The Insert Original indicator light goes out and the DJF informs
the copier’s CPU that the originals have been placed on the original table.
When the Start key is pressed, the copier’s CPU sends the feed-in signal to
the DJF. On receipt of this signal, the stopper solenoid [E] activates to raise
the stopper, to allow the originals to be fed in, and to lower the press rollers
[F] to press the originals against the pick-up rollers, as shown.
The feed-in clutch [G] also activates when the DJF receives the feed-in
Dual Job Feeder
DF62 (A610)
signal. 200 ms after the feed-in clutch activates, the feed-in motor feeds all
originals to the feed roller [H].
When the originals reach the feed roller, the stopper solenoid de-activates to
lower the original stopper [I] and to lift up the press rollers [J].
SM 7-7 A175/A176/A177
5. SEPARATION AND FEED MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[E]
[F]
[D] [B]
[F]
[C]
Drive from the feed-in motor [A] is transmitted to the pick-up [B], feed [C],
and pull out rollers [D], through the feed-in clutch [E], as shown. The feed
roller and the friction belts [F] are used to feed and separate the originals.
Only the bottom original is fed because the friction belt prevents any other
original from feeding.
Original feed starts when the feed roller starts turning to advance the bottom
original of the stack. The feed roller moves the original past the separation
belt because the driving force of the feed roller is greater than the resistance
of the friction belt. The friction belt prevents multiple feeds because the
resistance of the friction belt is greater than the friction between original
sheets. At this time, the feed-in motor rotates slowly to ensure proper feed
and separation of the original.
When the leading edge of the original activates registration sensor-2 [G], the
feed-in clutch turns off and the motor rotates more quickly. To reduce
mechanical load, only the pull-out rollers are driven to feed the original to the
exposure glass.
To prepare the next original, it is separated in the same manner as explained
above, and stopped when the leading edge is detected by the registration
sensor-2 [G]. When it is time to feed this sheet to the exposure glass, the
feed-in motor rotates at high speed.
A175/A176/A177 7-8 SM
6. FRICTION BELT DRIVE MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
The friction belts [A] are driven by the friction belt drive motor [B] through
timing belts, as shown.
When the Start key is pressed, the friction belts are not rotated (the motor is
electrically ON but the motor does not turn as the voltage is too low; see the
timing chart in section 13.1). As the leading edge of the original activates
registration sensor-2, the friction belts rotate in the reverse direction. This
moves the next original from in between the friction belts and feed rollers
and back to the original stack. This results in less of a chance for originals to
be damaged or become dirty. Also, the area of the friction belt that contacts
the feed roller or the original changes, to prevent multiple feeding.
The friction belt turn sensor [C] counts the pulses generated by the pulse
generator disk [D] on the friction belt shaft. The sensor detects friction belt
motor error conditions.
Dual Job Feeder
DF62 (A610)
SM 7-9 A175/A176/A177
7. ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
[D]
[E]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[F] [G]
The DJF detects original width through the on/off combination of the three
original width sensors-1 [A], -2 [B], -3 [C]. It also detects the original length
using registration sensors-1 [D], -2 [E] and the pulse count sensor [F].
The DJF CPU counts the pulses between registration sensor-2 [E] on timing,
and registration sensor-1 [D] off timing. Based on this pulse count, the CPU
determines the original length.
The reasons for using two registration sensors are:
1) Registration sensor-2 [E] is used to stop the pre-fed original, which
waits until the previous original is fed out. For precise control, the
original stop position must be after the pull-out rollers [G]. Therefore,
registration sensor-2 is placed after the pull-out rollers.
2) Registration sensor-1 [D] checks the trailing edge of the original. This
check is used to place the original in the correct position on the
exposure glass. Because this is a fast feeding mechanism, some
distance is required between the sensor and the original scale. If
sensor-2 was used to detect the stop timing, there would not be
enough time to stop the original at the correct place. Therefore,
registration sensor-1 is used for this; it is placed 34.9 mm before
sensor-2.
(The diagram at the start of section 8-1 shows the position of the
sensors with respect to the rollers.)
A175/A176/A177 7-10 SM
Width Sensor Upper: Original Size
1 2 3 Lower: Threshold Level for Each Size (Pulse Count)
A4S A3
231 mm
(78)
B5S LTS B4 11" x 15" A3

201 mm 236 mm 377 mm 399 mm
(68) (80) (136) (145)
B6S A5S B6 L A5 L B5 L LT L A4 L B4 A3
or
143 mm 166 mm 201 mm 231 mm 271 mm 294 mm 316 mm 387 mm
(44) (54) (68) (78) (95) (103) (115) (140)
: Paper Present
: No Paper
S : Sideways
L : Lengthwise
Width Sensor Position
Original Alignment
C B A
Width Sensor 1: A = 210 mm
Width Sensor 2: B = 235 mm
Width Sensor 3: C = 284 mm
The original size is determined by the combination of the detected original

width and length as shown above. Note that when only width sensor 1 detect
that paper is preset, or if all width sensors are off, the original size is
detected only by the pulse count sensor data.
Dual Job Feeder

DF62 (A610)
SM 7-11 A175/A176/A177
8. TRANSPORT MECHANISM
8.1 BASIC OPERATION
[D] [E] [A]
[B]
[C]
The transport belt [A] is driven by an independent motor called the belt drive
motor [B]. The belt drive motor starts rotating soon after the copier sends an
original feed-in signal. Inside the transport belt are five pressure roller shafts
[C], which achieve the proper amount of pressure between the belt and the
original.
When the leading edge of the original reaches the exposure glass, the
original is transported by the transport belt (the belt drive motor turns on 200
ms after the start key is pressed).
When the trailing edge of the original passes through registration sensor-1
[D], the feed-in motor turns off. When the trailing edge of the original passes
through registration sensor-2 [E], the belt drive motor gradually decreases its
speed to stop the original at the proper place on the exposure glass.
100 ms after the belt drive motor turns off, the feed-in motor turns on until
the next original activates registration sensor-2 [E], the next original waits
until the first original copy job is complete. This operation reduces the
original feed in time.
When the scanner reaches the return position, the copier’s CPU sends the
feed-out and feed-in signals to the DJF CPU, in order to exchange the
original for the next original.
If the original is A4/ 81/2 x11 sideways or smaller, the original just copied is
transported to the right side of the exposure glass then waits until the next
original copy job is completed. Then the previous original is delivered. This
operation also reduces the original feed-in time.
A175/A176/A177 7-12 SM
Left Scale
Rear Scale 5.0 mm
Original
Since the copier’s original alignment position is at the left rear corner (not in
the center), the originals fed from the DJF must also be at this position. But if
the original was to be fed along the rear scale, original skews, jams or
wrinkling, may occur.
To prevent such problems, the original is positioned 5.0 mm away from the
rear scale as shown. The correction for this 5.0 mm gap is compensated for
by the base copier’s optics unit.
Dual Job Feeder

DF62 (A610)
SM 7-13 A175/A176/A177
8.2 THIN/THICK ORIGINAL MODES
Fig. 1
10±2 mm Fig. 2
25 mm Fig. 3
This document feeder has two different ways of stopping originals on the
exposure glass at the correct position. They are thin original mode and thick
original mode. The user can select the desired settings to match the type of
original being used.
1. Thick Original Mode

When thick original mode is selected, the belt drive motor remains
energized to carry the original approximately 10 mm past the left scale
(Figures 1 and 2). Then, the belt drive motor pauses and reverses to
feed the original back against the original scale for about 25 mm (Fig. 3).
This forces the original against the left scale and thus aligns the trailing
edge of the original with the scale.
Thick original mode is selected at the factory.
2. Thin Original Mode
To protect originals from being damaged by the movements of the
transport belt, thin original mode can be selected. The original is stopped
at the correct position on the exposure glass based on an encoder pulse
count. The belt drive motor stops shortly after the original trailing edge
passes registration sensor-2. (Exact timing depends on registration
adjustment.) In the pasted original mode, the DJF automatically selects
this mode.
The feed amount for both modes can be adjusted.
For more details, refer to the "Replacement and Adjustment" section.
A175/A176/A177 7-14 SM
9. ORIGINAL FEED-OUT MECHANISM
[A]
feed-out signal to the DJF CPU.
When the DJF receives the feed-out signal, the belt drive and feed-out
motors [A] turn on.
The feed-out sensor [B] installed in the feed-out section counts the number
of pulses to calculate how long the feed-out motor must stay on to feed the
original out of the machine properly. Also, the motor rotates at low speed for
the last 50 mm of the detected trailing edge to improve stacking efficiency.
Dual Job Feeder
DF62 (A610)
During the pasted original mode, the motor rotates only at the slow speed.
SM 7-15 A175/A176/A177
10. TRANSPORT BELT LEVELING MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
[F]
[D]
[F]
[E]
[C]
The transport belt assembly [A] and the two support arms [B] are formed as
one unit, (made of aluminum). This results in a more flexible structure than
the type in which the cover carries all of the stress, and the gap between the
transport belt and the original can easily be kept precise during belt transport.
On the support arm linked with the DJF hinge [C], there is a fulcrum [D] to
support the DJF. When the DJF is being closed, the rear stopper [E]
contacts the base copier first, the belt unit then rotates about the fulcrum,
until the front stopper [F] contact the base copier to level the belt with the
exposure glass.
A175/A176/A177 7-16 SM
11. LIFT MECHANISM
➁
[A]
[E] ➂
➀
➁
[B]
[C]
[D]
When the DJF is opened, the lift springs [A] provide enough force to ensure
that the DJF does not fall onto the exposure glass. When the DJF is closed,
points "➀", "➁", and "➂" are positioned as shown and no upward force is
provided to the DJF.
The position sensor [B] is actuated when the DJF is closed. The copier then
shifts to the document feeder mode. The position sensor also serves as the
reset sensor for DJF misfeeds.
When the DJF is closed, the APS start sensor [C], which is below the DF
position sensor, informs the base copier CPU that original size sensors in
Dual Job Feeder
the main body can check the original size for the platen mode.
DF62 (A610)
When a book or thick original (maximum thickness 60 mm) is copied, the

DJF acts as a cover for the original as shown in the diagram [D]. The
position sensor is turned off during this condition, so the DJF does not
function. The tension of spring [E] returns the DJF to the normal condition
after copying a thick original.
SM 7-17 A175/A176/A177
12. SPECIAL FEATURES
12.1 PRESET MODE
[C] [E] [B]
[D]
[F]
[A]
Two sets of originals for independent copy jobs can be set on the original
tray at the same time.
While the first set of originals [A] remains on the original tray, both the
original set sensor feeler [B] and original feed sensor feeler [C] are lifted out
of their sensors. A second set of originals [D] can be placed in the feeder on
top of the first set, this second set will be stopped by the original stopper [E].
In this case, when the first set of originals are all fed-in, the original set
sensor feeler is still lifted out of its sensor, while the original feed sensor
feeler has dropped into the sensor. Therefore, the copier’s CPU recognizes
that the first job is completed.
If the second job is already preset, the second set of originals are
automatically fed to the feed roller [F] and fed one-by-one into the machine
in the same manner as the first set of originals.
A175/A176/A177 7-18 SM
12.2 TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL FEED (AUTO REVERSE) MODE
[B]
[A]
[C]
[B]
Unlike one-sided original feed, the back side of the original must be copied
first to keep the originals and copies in the correct order.
During original feed-in, the sequence is the same as for one-sided feed;
however, the belt drive motor continues rotating until the original reaches the
inverter section. The DJF CPU also energizes the feed-out motor and the
inverter solenoid [A] for a short time to lift the inverter pawls [B].
After the inverter mechanism inverts the original (10 pulses after the feed-out
sensor [C] activates), the belt drive motor reverses and the original is fed
towards the original scale. It is stopped at the correct position on the
exposure glass, and the DJF CPU sends the copy start signal.
invert original signal to the DJF CPU in order to make a copy of the front
side. The original is inverted in the same way as for the back side copying,
as explained above. Dual Job Feeder
DF62 (A610)
SM 7-19 A175/A176/A177
12.3 COMBINE TWO ORIGINALS MODE
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
- Overview -
Two originals are fed onto the exposure glass at once in the combine two
originals mode as shown in figure 1. This allows copying two originals onto
one sheet of paper automatically either in the full size mode or in reduction
mode. If it is used together with the duplex mode, from (4) originals can be
copied on a single sheet of paper automatically.
If an odd number of originals is placed on the original table, the first original
is placed on the exposure glass as shown in figure 2.
In this mode, only one-sided originals can be used, and Auto Paper Select
(APS) and Auto Reduce/Enlarge modes cannot be used.
A175/A176/A177 7-20 SM
Figure 1
Figure 2
- Operation - Figure 3
The DF operates in the combine two originals mode as follows:
Figure 1
The first original is fed in the same manner as in one-sided original
mode. When registration sensor-2 detects the trailing edge of the first
original, the feed-in and the belt drive motors stop once and the feed-in
clutch turns on again to prepare for the second original feed.
Figure 2
As soon as the feed-in and the belt drive motor turn off, the belt drive
motor starts rotating in reverse to align the first original against the
original scale. Then the belt drive motor turns off.
Figure 3
50 ms after the feed-in motor turns off, the feed-in motor turns on again
Dual Job Feeder
at a lower speed (372 mm/) to feed the second original.

DF62 (A610)
A few pulses (0 ∼ 14 pulses: depending on the SP Adjustment page 6

item 6) after the registration sensor-2 is activated by the leading edge of
the second original, the feed-in motor and the feed-in clutch turn off.
SM 7-21 A175/A176/A177
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 4
Soon after the feed-in motor turns off, both the feed-in and the belt drive
motors turn on again at the lower speed (372 mm/s).
After registration sensor-2 detects the trailing edge of the second
original, the feed-in and the belt drive motors turn off and gradually the
belt drive speed reduces to stop the original at the proper place on the
exposure glass.
Figure 5
After these originals have been copied, the belt drive motor and the
feed-out motor turn on to feed out the originals. 50 mm before the trailing
edge of the first original de-activates the feed-out sensor, both the belt
drive and the feed-out motor rotate at the lower speed to improve original
stacking.
48 pulses later, the belt drive motor turns off and 60 pulses after the
feed-out sensor detects the trailing edge of the second original, the
feed-out motor turns off.
A175/A176/A177 7-22 SM
13. TIMING CHARTS WITH ORIGINAL MISFEED
DETECTION
13.1 A4 /81/2 x 11 SIDEWAYS: ONE-SIDED, TWO ORIGINALS
Dual Job Feeder

DF62 (A610)
SM 7-23 A175/A176/A177
13.2 COMBINE TWO ORIGINALS MODE
A175/A176/A177 7-24 SM
13.3 A4\81/2 x 11 SIDEWAYS: TWO-SIDED, TWO ORIGINALS
Dual Job Feeder

DF62 (A610)
SM 7-25 A175/A176/A177
14. SERVICE TABLES
14.1 DIP SWITCHES AND SWITCH
0: OFF 1: ON ↓ : Push
DPS101 DPS102 SW
Modes Function
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 101
Feed-in motor (M2) activates (High
1 0 0 0 — Speed)
Feed-in motor (M2) activates (Low

1 0 0 1 — Speed)
Motor Tests
1 1 0 1
(Speed Adj.) 0 1 0 0 — Belt drive motor (M3) activates
Feed-out motor (M4) activates
0 0 1 0 — (High Speed)
Feed-out motor (M4) activates

0 0 1 1 — (Low Speed)
Friction belt motor (M1) activates

1 0 0 0 ↓ (Reverse)
Friction Belt Friction belt motor (M1) activates
1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 ↓
Free Run (Forward)
Push SW101 to feed the page in.
1 0 0 — ↓ Push it again to feed the sheet out.
1 0 0 0 — Stopper solenoid (SOL2) activates
MC, SOL 0 1 0 0 — Not used
0 0 1 1
Tests
0 0 1 0 — Feed-in clutch (CL1) activates
0 0 0 1 — Inverter solenoid (SOL1) activates
Feeds the original in and out
0 0 0 0 ↓ (thick / one-sided)
0 0 0 1 ↓ (thin / one-sided)
1 0 0 0 ↓ (thick / two-sided)
1 0 0 1 ↓ (thin / two-sided)
Original Feeds the original in and out
Feed 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 ↓ (low speed / thick / one-sided)
Tests
0 0 1 1 ↓ (low speed / thin / one-sided)
1 0 1 0 ↓ (low speed / thick / two-sided)
1 0 1 1 ↓ (low speed / thin / two-sided)
0 1 0 0 ↓ (pasted original mode)
1 1 1 0 ↓ (combine original mode)
A175/A176/A177 7-26 SM
DPS101 DPS102 SW
Modes Function
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 101
0 0 0 0 ↓ Thick / one-sided original mode
0 0 0 1 ↓ Thin / one-sided original mode
1 0 0 0 ↓ Thick / two-sided original mode
1 0 0 1 ↓ Thin / two-sided original mode
Free Run
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 ↓ Thick / mixed size original mode
Mode
0 1 0 1 ↓ Thin / mixed size original mode
0 0 1 0 ↓ Low speed / thick / one-sided
0 0 1 1 ↓ Low speed / thin / one-sided
1 0 1 0 ↓ Low speed / thick / two-sided
1 0 1 1 ↓ Low speed / thin / two-sided
1 1 1 0 ↓ Combine two originals mode
LED 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 — Turns on the indicator lamp (L1)
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 — Standard setting for A172/A199
Standard
Operation Standard setting for A175/A176/
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 — A177/A191/A192
14.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS

VR No. FUNCTION
101 Adjusts the registration in one-sided original mode
102 Adjusts the registration in two-sided original mode
103 Adjusts the feed-in motor (M2) speed (high speed)
104 Adjusts the feed-in motor (M2) speed (low speed)
105 Adjusts the belt drive motor (M3) speed
106 Adjusts the feed-out motor (M4) speed (low speed)
107 Adjusts the feed-out motor (M4) speed (high speed)
14.3 LEDs
These LEDs monitor motor speed. Use in conjunction with VRs 103 - 107.
LED 101 LED 102 FUNCTION
Correct speed, if they stay on for more than
ON ON 10 s
Dual Job Feeder
DF62 (A610)
ON OFF The motor is too fast

OFF ON The motor is too slow
14.4 FUSE
Fuse No. FUNCTION
101 Protects all voltage lines (5 V, 12 V, 24 V)
SM 7-27 A175/A176/A177
15. REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
15.1 UPPER COVER REMOVAL
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B] [E]
[F]
1. Turn off the main switch and open the feed-in cover [A].
2. Remove the stopper screw [B].
3. Remove the 2 screws securing the table bracket [C].
4. Remove the original table [D] (3 screws).
NOTE: Do not loosen the 2 screws securing the original table to the
table bracket.
5. Remove the small cover [E] at the rear side of the upper DJF cover (1
screw).
6. Remove the upper cover [F] (6 screws).
A175/A176/A177 7-28 SM
15.2 TRANSPORT BELT REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
NOTE: Never use alcohol to clean the transport belt. The coating will be
damaged.
1. Turn off the main switch and lift up the DJF.
2. Remove the front cover [A] (3 screws).
3. Remove the 4 screws securing the transport belt guide assembly [B].
4. Fold the stay [C] as shown.
5. Remove the transport belt [D].
Dual Job Feeder
DF62 (A610)
SM 7-29 A175/A176/A177
[A]
[B]
[C]
6. Install the new belt on the belt guide assembly [A].

NOTE: When installing the new belt, set the belt between the belt
guides [B].
7. While opening the original guide [C], carefully install the belt guide
assembly on the DJF (4 screws), making sure that the mylars on the
feed-in unit side are not damaged.
8. Reinstall the machine and check the machine operation.
A175/A176/A177 7-30 SM
15.3 FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
[A]
1. Turn off the main switch and open the feed cover [A].
2. Remove the snap ring [B].
3. Push the feed roller shaft to the front, then remove the roller assembly
[C] as shown.
4. Remove the 4 snap rings, then replace the feed rollers.
NOTE: When reinstalling the feed rollers, be sure that the one-way bearing
(silver color) is located at the front side (the roller must rotate only
counter-clockwise when the shaft is fixed).
Do not touch the rollers with bare hands.
Dual Job Feeder

DF62 (A610)
SM 7-31 A175/A176/A177
15.4 FRICTION BELT REPLACEMENT
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
1. Turn off the main switch and open the feed cover.
2. Remove the shaft receiving bracket [A] (1 screw).
3. Gently pull up the friction belt assembly [B] and remove it from the drive
shaft [C].
4. Replace the friction belts [D].
NOTE: Use alcohol to clean the friction belts.

Do not touch the belts with bare hands.
A175/A176/A177 7-32 SM
15.5 ORIGINAL SET/FEED, REGISTRATION-1/-2, AND
ORIGINAL WIDTH-1/-2/-3 SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
[F]
[G]
[E]
1. Turn off the main switch and open the feed cover [A].
2. Remove the stopper screw [B] and open the original stopper [C].
3. Locate the reference marks (G) and note the location of the original
guide [E] against the guide plate [F] as shown. This is to keep the same
original side-to-side registration after re-installation.
4. Remove the original table [D] (5 screws).
5. Remove the original guide (3 screws).
Dual Job Feeder
6. Replace the required sensor.

DF62 (A610)
7. After this replacement, adjust the side-to side original registration if

necessary.
SM 7-33 A175/A176/A177
15.6 FEED-OUT UNIT REMOVAL
[C]
[B] [A]
[D]
[E]
1. Turn off the main switch and remove the upper cover. (Refer to Upper
Cover Removal)
2. Disconnect the 4P and 2P connectors [A] of the feed-out motor [B].
3. Disconnect all the connectors from the DJF main board and remove the
DJF main board [C].
4. Disconnect the APS start/DJF position sensor connector [D].
5. Remove the feed-out unit [E] (4 screws).
A175/A176/A177 7-34 SM
15.7 FEED-OUT MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[F]
[D]
[E] [C]
[G]
1. Remove the feed-out unit. (Refer to Feed-out Unit Removal.)

2. Remove the spring [A].
3. Remove the bracket [B] with the feed-out motor from the feed-out unit (3
screws).
NOTE: When reinstalling the bracket, be sure to set the arm [C] on the
plunger pin [D].
4. Remove the pulley [E] (1 Allen screw [F]).
5. Remove the feed-out motor [G] (4 screws).
Dual Job Feeder

DF62 (A610)
SM 7-35 A175/A176/A177
15.8 INVERTER SOLENOID REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D] OFF ON
[E]
[F]
ON
OFF
1. Remove the feed-out unit. (Refer to Feed-out Unit Removal.)

2. Remove the inverter solenoid [A] (2 screws).
NOTE: When installing the inverter solenoid, check the following:
1) The arm [B] must be set on the plunger pin [C].
2) The inverter solenoid connector harness [D] should be facing
the outside of the unit as shown.
3) Manually push the plunger and check that it works smoothly
4) When the inverter solenoid does not activate (OFF), the
inverter guide [E] must be inside the outer inverter guide [F],
and when the inverter solenoid activates (ON), the inverter
guide must be outside the outer inverter guide, as shown.
A175/A176/A177 7-36 SM
15.9 FEED-OUT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
1. Turn off the main switch and remove the feed-out unit. (Refer to Feed-out
Unit Removal.)
2. Remove the right cover [A] (1 screw).
3. Replace the feed-out sensor [B] (1 screw and 1 connector).
Dual Job Feeder

DF62 (A610)
SM 7-37 A175/A176/A177
15.10 INVERTER ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E] [D]
1. Turn off the main switch and remove the feed-out unit. (Refer to
Feed-out Unit Removal.)
2. Remove the feed-out motor [A]. (Refer to Feed-out Motor Removal.)
3. Remove the exit guide [B] (3 screws).
4. Remove the inverter roller [C] with the inverter guide [D] (2 E-rings, 1
pulley, 1 pin [E], and 2 bushings).
5. Replace the inverter roller.
A175/A176/A177 7-38 SM
15.11 DF POSITION/APS START SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
1. Turn off the main switch and lift up the DF.

2. Remove the sensor bracket [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the harness clamp [B] and replace the DF position sensor [C] or
the APS start sensor [D] (1 connector each).
Dual Job Feeder

DF62 (A610)
SM 7-39 A175/A176/A177
15.12 BELT DRIVE MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[A] [G] [I]
[D]
[H]
[B]
[E]
[C]
[F]
[E]
Cover Removal.)
2. Disconnect the 2 connectors [A] of the belt drive motor [B].
3. Disconnect the connector [C] of the indicator panel [D] as shown.
4. Remove the tension spring [E] and loosen the tension bracket [F] as
shown.
5. Remove the belt drive motor bracket [G] (3 screws), making sure not to
damage the 2 timing belts [H].
6. Remove the drive pulley [I] (1 Allen screw) then replace the belt drive
motor (4 screws).
A175/A176/A177 7-40 SM
15.13 FEED-IN UNIT REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[G]
[F]
[D]
[C]
[E]
Cover Removal.)
2. Remove the screw [A], then remove the feed cover [B].
3. Disconnect the 2 connectors [C] of the feed-in motor [D].
4. Disconnect the connector [E] of the friction belt motor [F].
Dual Job Feeder
5. Disconnect CN104, 105, 108, 109, 110, and 111 on the DJF main board.
DF62 (A610)
6. Disconnect the connector of the indicator panel as well.

7. Remove the feed-in unit [G] (5 screws).
SM 7-41 A175/A176/A177
15.14 FEED-IN MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
[A]
Cover Removal.)
2. Remove the feed-in motor bracket [A] (3 screws), making sure not to
damage the timing belt.
3. Remove the drive pulley [B] (1 Allen screw), then replace the feed-in
motor [C] (4 screws).
A175/A176/A177 7-42 SM
15.15 FRICTION BELT MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
Cover Removal.)
2. Remove the friction belt motor bracket [A] (2 screws), making sure not to
damage the timing belt.
3. Replace the friction belt motor [B] (4 screws).
Dual Job Feeder

DF62 (A610)
SM 7-43 A175/A176/A177
15.16 FEED-IN CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C] [A]
[D]
[E]
Cover Removal.)
2. Remove the friction belt motor. (Refer to Friction Belt Motor
Replacement.)
3. Replace the feed-in clutch [A] (2 Allen screws).
NOTE: When reinstalling, make sure of the following.
1) The clutch stopper groove [E] must engage the clutch stopper [C].
2) The end of the clutch stopper must be flush with the head of the
shaft [D].
A175/A176/A177 7-44 SM
15.17 STOPPER SOLENOID REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C] [A]
[D]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[E]
Cover Removal.)
2. Disconnect the connector [A] of the stopper solenoid.
3. Open the feed-in cover and remove the stopper screw [B].
4. Open the original Stopper.
5. Remove the bracket with the stopper solenoid (1screw and 1 E-ring.)
6. Remove the stopper solenoid [D] (2 screws).
NOTE: When installing the stopper solenoid, pay attention to the following
points:
1) The spring [E] must be correctly hooked onto the stopper [F], as
Dual Job Feeder
DF62 (A610)
shown.
2) Manually pull the stopper solenoid plunger to confirm that the
press rollers firmly contact the pick-up rollers. When the pick-up
rollers are manually rotated, the press rollers should also rotate. If
not, adjust the stopper solenoid position.
SM 7-45 A175/A176/A177
15.18 VERTICAL REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
15.18.1 One-sided Original Mode (Thin Paper)
The original stopping position in thick original mode also depends on the
setting of this adjustment. (For details, refer to Detailed Descriptions.)
NOTE: 1) After replacing the DJF main board, always perform the
adjustment using VR101 on the DJF main board.
2) At other times, adjust with either the base copier SP mode or
VR101. Both procedures will move the original stopping position.
3) After finishing the adjustment, be sure to turn off the dip switches.
[C]
[A] [E]
[B]
[D] 0 ~ 2 mm
0
– Using VR101 –
1. Remove the small cover at the rear of the DJF upper cover (1 screw).
2. Turn on dip switch 101-2 and -4 [A].
3. Turn on dip switch 102-4 [B]. (Off for thick original mode)
2
4. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper [C] (64g/m , 14-22lb) on
the original table.
5. Press switch 101 [D]. (Paper will be fed to the exposure glass.)
6. After the original stops on the exposure glass, gently raise the DJF so
that the original does not move.
7. Confirm that the gap between the trailing edge of paper and the left
original scale [E] is 0, ± 2mm.
8. If the gap is not within this specification, adjust registration with VR101.
(Looking from the front, turning VR101 counter-clockwise will decrease
the gap.)
9. Return the user settings to their defaullts, if you have changed any.
A175/A176/A177 7-46 SM
– Using The Copier SP Mode –
NOTE: 1) When performing this adjustment, always make test copies with
the "Copy In SP" mode. If you do not, the adjustment will not be
performed properly.
2) Make sure that the DJF dip switches are returned to the standard
setting of the base copier, if you have performed the adjustments
using the DJF main board.
3) Make sure that the "Thin Mode" is selected with the customer
settings of the base copier.
1. Turn the copier main switch off and on to initialize the machine.
2. Enter the copier SP mode, and open the DJF Registration Adjustment
page. ( 1 SP Adjustment pg. 6)
3. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper (64g/m2, 14 - 22lb) on
the original table, and press the Copy In SP key.
Next, select 81/2" x 11", then press the Start key.
4. After the original stops on the exposure glass, raise the DJF carefully so
5. Check that the gap between the trailing edge of paper and the left
original scale is within 0, ± 2mm.
6. If the gap is not within this specification, adjust registration by pressing
the and keys of the thin mode inside the SP mode. The original
paper stopping position will change accordingly. (If you press , the
gap will decrease.)
7. Return the user settings to their defaults, if you have changed any.
Dual Job Feeder

DF62 (A610)
SM 7-47 A175/A176/A177
[F]
15.18.2 Two-sided Original Mode
[A]
0 ~ 5 mm
[D] 0
[B]
[C]
[E]
NOTE: 1) After replacing the DJF main board, always perform the
adjustment using VR102 on the DJF main board.
2) At other times, adjust with either the base copier SP mode or
VR102. Both procedures will move the original stopping position.
3) After finishing the adjustment, be sure to turn off the dip switches.
– Using VR102 –
1. Remove the copier’s left original scale [A] (2 screws).
2. Remove the small cover at the rear of the DJF upper cover (1 screw).
3. Turn on dip switch 101-2 and -4 [B].
4. Turn on dip switch 102-1 and -4 [C].
5. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper [D] (64 g/m2, 14-22 lb) on
the original table.
6. Press switch 101 [E]. (Paper will be fed to the exposure glass.)
7. After the original stops on the exposure glass gently raise the DJF so
8. Confirm that the distance between the trailing edge of the paper and the
left edge of the rear original scale [F] is between 0 ~ 5 mm.
9. If the distance is not within this specification, adjust the registration with
VR102. (Looking from the front, turning VR102 counter-clockwise will
feed the paper more towards the left.)
A175/A176/A177 7-48 SM
– Using the Copier SP Mode –
NOTE: 1) When performing this adjustment, always make test copies using
the "Copy In SP" mode. If you do not, the adjustment will not be
performed properly.
2) Make sure that the DJF dip switches are returned to the standard
setting of the base copier, if you have performed the adjustments
using the DJF main board.
1. Remove the copier’s left original scale (2 screws).

2. Turn off and on the copier main switch to initialize the machine.
3. Enter the copier SP mode, and open the DJF Registration Adjustment
page. ( 1 SP Adjustment pg 6)
4. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper (64g/m2, 14 - 22lb) on
the original table, and press the Copy In SP key.
Select the two-sided original mode to invert the original paper, select
81/2" x 11" size paper. Then press the Start key.
5. After the original stops on the exposure glass, raise the DJF carefully so
6. Check that the distance between the trailing edge of the paper and the
left edge of the original rear scale is between 15 ~ 20 mm.
7. If the distance is not within this specification, adjust the registration by
pressing the and keys of the two-sided mode inside the SP
mode. The original paper stopping position will change accordingly. (If
you press , the original will be fed more towards the left.)
Dual Job Feeder

DF62 (A610)
SM 7-49 A175/A176/A177
15.19 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
[C]
[E]
[A]
[D]
5 ± 2 mm
[F]
2
1. Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper [A] (64 g/m , 17 lb) on
the original table and press the Start key.
2. Check the side-to-side registration comparing the original paper and the
copied paper.
3. If the side-to-side registration is not within 0 ± 2 mm, enter the SP mode

and perform the following steps:
1) Open the DJF Side To Side Registration Adjustment page.
2) Change the setting with the and keys to meet the above
specification. (The original stopping position will not change.)
Note that the direction of the image shift will differ for each base copier.
4. If it is still out of specification, leave SP mode and perform the following
original table positioning adjustment:
1) Place a sheet of A4/81/2" x 11" sideways paper [A] (64 g/m2 , 17 lb) on
the original table and press the Start key.
2) After the original stops on the exposure glass, gently raise the DJF so
3) Check if the gap between the rear edge of the paper and the original
rear scale is 5 ± 2 mm.
4) It the gap is not within specification, remove the stopper screw [C],
loosen the 8 screws securing the original table [D] and the original
guide [E] and shift the original table and the original guide position
accordingly.
NOTE: Before putting an original on the original table again, open and close
the feed unit cover [F].
A175/A176/A177 7-50 SM
15.20 PREVENTING THE REAR SIDE OF ORIGINALS FROM
BECOMING DIRTY
[A]
NOTE: Perform the following adjustment only when needed (if the friction
belt needs to be changed but there is no spare friction belt
available). However, after this adjustment, thick originals are likely to
be misfed, so it is best to avoid this adjustment if the customer says
that thick originals will be used.
1. Remove the friction belt assembly. (Refer to Friction Belt Replacement.)
2. Remove the adjusting plate [A] and re-install it as shown (the belt folds
about 1 degree) or remove the adjusting plate (the belt folds about 2
degrees).
Dual Job Feeder

DF62 (A610)
SM 7-51 A175/A176/A177
SECTION 8
SORTER STAPLER
ST28/28P (A606)
1. SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration: Console
Number of Bins: 20 + Proof Tray
Paper for Proof Tray:
Size Maximum: A3, 11" x 17"
Minimum: A6 lengthwise, 51/2" x 81/2"
Weight: 52 ~ 157 g/m2,14 ~ 42 lb
Capacity: 250 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Paper for Bins: See the table below.
Sort Stack Staple Punch
Maximum paper A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 17"
size
Minimum paper Sideways: Sideways: B5, 81/2" x 11" A5 (2 holes)
size A5, 81/2" x 11" A4, 81/2" x 11" B5 sideways
Lengthwise: Lengthwise: 81/2" x 11" side
A5, 51/2" x 81/2" A5, 51/2" x 81/2" ways (3 holes)
Maximum paper 157 g/m2, 42 lb 157 g/m2, 42 lb 80 g/m2, 20 lb 128 g/m2, 34 lb

weight (2 holes)
104 g/m2, 28 lb
(3 holes)
Minimum paper 52 g/m2, 14 lb 52 g/m2, 14 lb 64 g/m2, 17 lb 52 g/m2, 14 lb
weight
Maximum all sizes: all sizes: all sizes: all sizes:
capacity 50 sheets/bin 40 sheets/bin 50 sheets 40 sheets
2 sided copies: 2 sided copies:
40 sheets/bin 35 sheets/bin
Staple Position: a = 6 ± 3 mm
a b = 6 ± 3 mm
c = 6 ± 3 mm
c d = 66 ± 3 mm
e = 132 ± 2 mm
d θ = 45 ± 5°
e
b
Sorter Stapler
θ
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-1 A175/A176/A177
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge refile (5,000 pieces/cartridge)
Power Source: DC24 V (from copier)
Power Consumption: Average: less than 60 W (without punch)
less than 70 W (with punch)
Maximum:
in sort/stack mode: less than 60 W (without
punch)
less than 70 W (with punch)
in staple mode: less than 45 W
Dimensions: 566 x 583 x 978 mm
(W x D x H)
Weight: Approximately 52 kg
Punch Position: 2 Holes (European version)
a = 12 ± 3 mm
b = 40 ± 3 mm
c = 80 ± 1 mm
a
3 Holes (U.S.A. version)
a = 9.5 (3/8") ± 3 mm
c = 216 (81/2") ± 1 mm
φ d = 108 (41/4") ± 1 mm
d’ = ± 3 mm
d b
c Punch Hole Size:
d’ 2 Holes: φ = 6. 5 ± 0. 5 mm
3 Holes: φ = 8. 0 ± 0. 5 mm
A175/A176/A177 8-2 SM
2. COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2
3
15
4
14 5
6
13
7
12
8
11
9
10
1. Proof Tray 9. Staple Unit

2. Proof Exit Rollers 10. Grip Assembly
3. Proof Transport Rollers 11. Helical Wheels
4. Upper Entrance Guide 12. Jogger Plate
5. Turn Gate 13. Bins
6. Lower Entrance Guide 14. Upper Guide Plate
7. Sorter Transport Rollers 15. Punch Unit (Punch version only)

Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
8. Sorter Exit Rollers
SM 8-3 A175/A176/A177
2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
3
2 4
1
13
16
5
15
14
13
6
7
5
8
9
13
12
9
11
9
10
1. Main Motor 9. Wheel Drive Belts

2. Main Drive Belt 10. Grip Drive Belt
3. Proof Drive Belt 11. Jogger Motor
4. Sorter Drive Belt 12. Staple Unit Drive Motor
5. Helical Wheels 13. Jogger Drive Belts
6. Staple Unit Drive Belt 14. Bin Rear Plate Drive Motor
7. Gripper Motor 15. Sorter Exit Drive Belt
8. Bin Drive Motor 16. Sorter Exit Motor
A175/A176/A177 8-4 SM
Please refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the
Point to Point (Water Proof Paper) for symbol and index number.

Motors
M1 Main Drives the paper transport rollers. 1
Staple Feeds the staples and drives the
M2 10
stapler hammer.
Grip Drives the grip assembly forward and
backward into the bin to grip the
M3 16
copies and bring them to the stapling
position.
Bin Drive Drives the bins upward and
M4 downward by rotating the three helical 18
wheels.
Jogger Drives the jogger plate to jog the
M5 20
copies against the front side plate.
Staple Unit Drive Drives the staple unit according to the
M6 23
staple position and angle.
M7 Bin Rear Plate Drive Drives the bin rear plate down and up. 24
M8 Sorter Exit Delivers the paper into the bins. 27
Punch Drive Drives the hole puncher.
M9 33
(Punch version only)
Sensors
Bin Jam (LED) Detects if there is paper jams at the
distribution section and detects if
S1 3
there is paper in the bins (light
emitting element).
Proof Exit Detects paper jams at the proof tray
S2 4
exit.
Entrance Detects paper jams at entrance
S3 5
guides.
Staple HP Detects if the staple hammer is in the
S4 8
home position.
Paper Detects whether copies are under the
S6 11
hammer.
Staple Unit HP Detects if the staple unit is in the
S7 13
home position.
Grip HP Detects if the grip assembly is in the
S8 15
home position.
Bin Jam (Photo Tr.) Detects paper jams at the distribution
S9 section and detects if there is paper in 17
the bins (light receiving element).
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
Wheel Sensor Detects the bin position.

(A606)
S10 19
Bin HP Detects if the bins are in the home

S11 21
position.
SM 8-5 A175/A176/A177
Jogger HP Detects if the jogger plate is in the
S12 22
home position.
Bin Rear Plate Open Detects if the bin rear plate is in the
S13 25
open position.
Bin Rear Plate HP Detects if the bin rear plate is in the
S14 26
home (closed) position.
Punch Home position Detects if the hole puncher is in the
S15 30
(Punch version only) home position.
Punch Rubbish (waste) Detects punch rubbish overflow.
S16 Overflow 31
Staple Unit Detects if the staple unit is in the
S18 ----
Pulled-out position pulled-out position.
Sensors 5 and 17 do not
*
exist
Solenoids
Turn Gate Opens and closes the turn gate to
SOL1 direct the copies into either the proof 2
tray or the bins.
Grip Opens and closes the grip arms to
SOL2 12
grip copies on the bins.
Grip Arm Positioning Moves the grip ass’y to the rear and
SOL3 front to catch or release the paper to 14
carry to the stapler.
PCBs
PCB1 Main Control Controls all sorter stapler functions. 28
Punch Control Control the punch function
PCB2 29
Switches
Door Safety Cuts the DC power when the front
SW1 6
door is opened.
Cartridge Set Detects if the staple cartridge is
SW2 7
installed or not.
SW3 Staple End Detects staple end. 9
Others
Punch Unit
Ohter1 ---- 32
A175/A176/A177 8-6 SM
4. BASIC OPERATION
4.1 NORMAL (PROOF MODE) AND SORT/STACK MODE
[D]
[C]
[A]
[A]
[B]
Copies exiting the copier pass through the entrance guide plates [A] to the
turn gate section. The turn gate [B] will send copies either to the proof tray or
to the bins, depending on the mode.
- Normal (proof) mode - (from the turn gate section to the proof tray)-
The turn gate solenoid energizes to turn the turn gate clockwise when the
Start key is pressed. The main motor turns counterclockwise to rotates the
vertical transport rollers [C] and proof exit roller [D]. The turn gate directs
copies through the proof transport section to the proof tray.
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-7 A175/A176/A177
- Sort mode - (from the turn gate section to the bins)
[F]
[A]
[E]
[D]
[B]
[H]
[C]
[I]
[G]
In this mode, the turn gate solenoid stays off to keep the turn gate [A] at the
upper position. The main motor turns clockwise to rotates the sorter
transport rollers [B] and the exit motor rotates the exit rollers [C].
The turn gate directs copies to the sorter bins through the sorter transport
section, then the first copy is delivered between the top bin [D] and the upper
guide plate [E].
The jogger plate [F] then jogs to square the copies each time.
Before the next copy reaches the sorter exit roller, the bin drive motor [G]
rotates and advances the bin one step (the helical wheels [H] rotate once).
When the cut out of the actuator reaches below the wheel sensor [I], the bin
drive motor turns off.
Bins advances each time copies are delivered.
A175/A176/A177 8-8 SM
- Stack mode - (from the turn gate section to the bins)
[F]
[A]
[E]
[D]
[B]
[H]
[C]
[I]
[G]
As with sort mode, the turn gate solenoid stays off and the turn gate [A] also
stays up when the start key is pressed. The main motor turns clockwise to
rotate the sorter transport rollers [B] and the exit motor rotates the exit rollers
[C].
The turn gate directs copies to the sorter bins through the sorter transport
section, then the copies are delivered between the top bin [D] and the upper
guide plate [E].
The jogger plate [F] then jogs to square the copies each time.
All copies of the copy run are then fed to the first bin. When the final copy is
delivered, the wheel drive motor [G] turns and advances the bin one step
(the helical wheels [H] rotate once). When the cut out of the actuator reaches
below the wheel sensor [I], the bin drive motor turns off.
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-9 A175/A176/A177
4.2 STAPLE MODE
[Fig. 1]
[Fig. 2]
[Fig. 3]
When the final set of copies is jogged [Fig. 1], the staple unit staples the
stacked copies as follows: The grip arms move inside the front side plate
and catches the paper. The bin rear plate is turned so as to be flat with the
sorter bin. The grip assembly brings the copies down underneath the stapler
[Fig. 2]. The staple unit changes the position (the position varies depending
on the copy size and staple mode) and the stapler staples the copies [Fig. 3].
A175/A176/A177 8-10 SM
[Fig. 4]
[Fig. 5]
The grip assembly brings the stapled copies back to the bin and the bin rear
plate returns to the original position.
The grip assembly releases the copies and return to outside the front side
plate so as not to disturb the bin movement [Fig. 4].
The bin advances one step [Fig. 5].
When the final set of copies is stapled, the staple unit is returned to the
home position.
There are two staple modes.
1) Automatic stapling:
In ADF mode, when the staple mode is selected before pressing the start
key, copies will be delivered to each bin and stapled automatically.
2) Manual stapling:
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
In sort mode, after copies are sorted in the bins, the copies will be
(A606)
stapled when the manual staple key is pressed then staple position is
selected. In stack mode, manual stapling is impossible.
SM 8-11 A175/A176/A177
5. TURN GATE SECTION
[I]
REAR VIEW
[A] [D]
[G]
[C]
[B]
[C]
[H]
[E]
[F]
The turn gate [A] sends copies to the proof tray or the sorter bins depending
on the mode. In the proof mode, the turn gate solenoid [B] turns on and the
main motor [C] turns clockwise (rear view) when the start key is pressed.
The turn gate [A], directs copies upward through the proof transport section
to the proof tray. In this mode, the main motor drive is transmitted by both
the proof drive belt [D] and sorter drive belt [E]. However the one way clutch
in each sorter transport roller drive gear [F] does not transmit the drive to the
sorter transport rollers.
In the sort, stack and staple modes, the turn gate solenoid stays off to direct
copies downward to the sorter transport section. When the start key is
pressed, the main motor [C] turns counterclockwise (rear view).
In this mode, the main motor drive is not transmitted to the proof drive belt
[D] because of the one way clutch in the pulley [G].
The entrance [H] and the proof exit [I] sensors monitor the paper jam.
A175/A176/A177 8-12 SM
6. BIN DRIVE MECHANISM
[B]
[E]
15
30
[G]
45
[D] [F]
40
40
[A]
15
15
[C]
The bin drive mechanism moves the bins up and down to receive copies.
The main components in this mechanism are the bin drive motor [A], the
three helical wheels [B], the wheel sensor [C], and the bins [D] themselves.
There are four pins on each bin. Three of them fit in the slot on the helical
wheels. Another pin fits into the slot [E] of the front side frame.
The pins slide up and down in these slots.
Three timing belts transmit the drive from the bin drive motor to the three
helical wheels. When it rotates clockwise, the bins lift (black arrow) and
when it rotates counterclockwise, the bins lower (white arrow). There is a
wheel sensor actuator on the front helical wheel, the actuator has a slot
which detects when the helical wheel has rotated 360 degrees.
When the bins are advanced, the helical wheels rotate once (360 degrees )
for each step.
As the pitch of the spiral on the helical wheel is greater when bins are at the
staple and paper exit area than when bins are elsewhere, the amount of bin
shift is greater when bins are at the staple and paper exit area. This leaves
enough space to staple [F] and stack paper [G] and reduces the total
machine height.
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-13 A175/A176/A177
7. BIN HOME POSITION
[A]
[E]
[B]
[D]
[C]
The bin home position sensor [A] and the wheel sensor [B] ensure that the
sorter exit roller is between the upper guide plate [C] and the 1st bin [D]
when all the bins are in the home position.
When the main switch is turned on, the bin lift motor [E] lowers the bins
(turns counterclockwise) until the bottom bin actuates the bin home position
sensor. Then, the bin lift motor raises the bins (turns clockwise) until the
wheel sensor activates. Thus, the bins are in the home position.
A175/A176/A177 8-14 SM
8. JOGGER SECTION
[B]
[A]
ON
Copier Main
Motor
Jam Sensor
300 ms
Jogger Motor
When the Start key is pressed in the sort, staple and stack modes, the copier
sends the paper size information to the sorter stapler. In accordance with
this data, the jogger motor [A] drives the jogger plate [B] from the jogger
home position to where the width is 10 mm wider than the selected paper.
300 ms after the trailing edge of the copy passes underneath the jam sensor,
the jogger motor rotates forward and in reverse. This makes the jogger plate
push all the copies against the front side plate to square the sheets. When
the jogger plate pushes the paper, the plate shifts to a position 5 mm wider
than the paper size when the bins lift. It shifts to a position 1 mm narrower
than the paper size when the bins lowers.
The jogger plate returns to 10 mm away from the selected paper size for the
next copy.
When the bin sensor detects that all copies are removed from the bins after
jogging is finished, the jogger plate returns to its home position.
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-15 A175/A176/A177
[C]
[B]
Fig. 1
[D] [A]
[E]
[C]
Normally all rollers in the sorter stapler transport the paper at a speed of 360
mm/s.
To have enough paper jogging time, the sorter exit motor [A] rotation speed
changes to transport the paper quickly and to stack the paper smoothly into
the bins as follows:
360 mm/s: When the sorter exit roller [B] catches the leading edge of the
paper
1,000 mm/s: After the jam sensors [C] detects the leading edge of the paper
600 mm/s: When releasing the trailing edge of the paper
The transport roller [D] is driven at a speed of 360 mm/s constantly,
however, when the sorter exit roller [B] rotates quickly, the transport rollers
also rotate quickly with the pulled paper because of the one way clutch in the
drive gear [E].
- Jogger Off Conditions -

1. Under the following conditions, the jogger plate does not jog after copies
are delivered to the bins.
• If paper is loaded in a bin by hand while the sort/stack or staple mode
is selected.
• If the selected paper size does not match stapling specifications.
• If copy of smaller width is delivered in the bins later in the "Mixed
sizes" mode.
2. If paper is in a bin before the main switch is turned on, the sort/stack
mode is disabled when the sort key is touched.
A175/A176/A177 8-16 SM
9. BIN REAR PLATE DRIVE SECTION
[A] [I]
[C]
[G]
[F]
[J]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[A] [H]
[I]
[F] [G]
The bin rear plates [A] basically stand up as shown in Fig. 1. They are
lowered only during stapling as shown (Fig. 2).
In the staple mode when all copies have been jogged by the jogger plate, the
bin rear plate drive motor [B] rotates gear [C]. Gear [C] drives the piston rod
[D] to push the lever [E] down.
The holder [F] engaging the pin [G] on the bin rear plate lowers in
accordance with the lever [E] position. Thus, the bin rear plate becomes flat
so as not to interfere with the copies being brought to the staple position by
the grip assembly.
During stapling, the bin rear plate open sensor [H] is interrupted by the
actuator [I] (Fig. 2).
When the bin rear plates are in the home position, the bin rear plate HP
sensor [J] is interrupted by the actuator [I](Fig. 1).
Under this condition, a pin [G] enters the holder [F] or passes through it.
After stapling is completed and stapled paper is returned to the bin, gear [C]
rotates 180 degrees and the bin rear plate returns to its home position.
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-17 A175/A176/A177
10. GRIP ASSEMBLY
[C]
[B]
[A]
Staple Unit Drive

Motor OFF
❶
Grip Arm Positioning
Solenoid OFF
❷
Grip solenoid OFF
Bin Rear Plate

OFF
Drive Motor
The grip assembly works as follows:

❶ When the staple unit reaches the staple position, the grip arm positioning
solenoid [A] activates and the plunger is pulled in to move the grip arms
[B] to the rear side of the machine. This is to access the paper on the bin.
Since the grip arm positioning solenoid has a strong magnet inside, the
plunger keeps this condition until the solenoid is energized by an
opposite charge.
The right upper part of the illustration (squared part) shows the
mechanical linkage as seen from the top.
❷ The grip solenoid [C] activates to close the grip arms and the grip arms
catch the papers.
The grip arm positioning solenoid, plunger keeps the grip arms closed
until the solenoid is energized by an opposite charge.
A175/A176/A177 8-18 SM
[C]
[B]
[E]
[A]
[D]
[F]
Bin Rear Plate
OFF
Drive Motor ❸
Grip Motor OFF
❹
Staple Motor OFF
❺
Grip Solenoid OFF
Grip Arm Positioning ❻
OFF
Solenoid
❸ After the bin rear plate drive motor lowers the bin rear plate, the grip
motor [A] turns clockwise (white arrow) until the gripper [B] carries the
paper to the staple position.
❹ After stapling is finished, the grip motor turns counterclockwise to move
the stapled copies caught by the grip arms back to the bin.
❺ When the grip solenoid [C] activates in the opposite way (as when it
activates to catch the paper), the return springs [D] opens the grip arms
to release the papers which remains in the bin.
❻ The grip arm positioning solenoid [E] activates to return the grip arms to
the home position to prepare for the next staple cycle.
The grip home position sensor [F] is actuated while the gripper is in the
home (grip) position.
The sorter stapler main control board sends the appropriate pulses to the
grip motor (stepping motor) [A] to determine the grip position and staple
position.
Vertical staple positions are adjustable by changing the number of the
stepping motor pulses from the home position ( SP Adjustment -
Sorter Stapler
Page 13).
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-19 A175/A176/A177
11. STAPLE UNIT
11.1 STAPLE UNIT DRIVE MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
The staple unit moves from the home position (top slant position) to the rear
side of the machine in order to change the staple position. The staple HP
sensor [A] activates when the staple unit is in the home position. In Top
Slant mode, the stapler is only at the home position. In "Top" ("Bottom")
single staple mode, the staple unit moves to the front (rear) single staple
position and stays there until all stapling is completed. It then returns to the
home position. In "2 Staples" mode or "Bottom" single staple mode, the
staple positions differ according to the paper size. The staple unit drive
motor [B] is a stepping motor, and the staple position is decided by the
number of steps from the home position.
During stapling in the "2 Staples" mode, the staple unit goes back and forth
to staple the two positions.
Horizontal staple positions are adjustable by changing the number of
stepping motor pulses from the home position ( SP Adjustment -
Page 13).
A175/A176/A177 8-20 SM
11.2 STAPLER
[D]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[A] [J]
[F]
[G] [H]
The stapler motor [A] drives the staple sheet drive belt.
The staple sheets are fed under the hammer [B].
The stapler motor drives the staple hammer via gears [C], two eccentric
cams [D].
When the aligned copies are brought to the staple position by the grip, the
stapler motor starts rotating. When the cams complete one rotation, the
staple home position sensor [E] is de-actuated (blocked). The stapler motor
then stops.
When the paper sensor [F] in the grip assembly does not detect that the
copies are under the hammer, the stapler motor does not rotate.
There are two switches in the staple unit. One is the staple end switch [G] to
detect staple end conditions. The other is the cartridge set switch [H] to
detect when the staple cartridge is not installed.
The staple cartridge has a clinch area [J], in which the jammed staples are
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
left. Operators can remove the jammed staples from the cartridge.
(A606)
SM 8-21 A175/A176/A177
- Staple Prohibit Conditions -
1. Under the following conditions, the staple mode is disabled when the
staple key on the operation panel is pressed.
If paper is in a bin before the main switch is turned on.

If the selected paper size does not match stapling specifications.
If the paper is fed from the by-pass feed table.
2. Under the following conditions, the staple mode is canceled.
If paper is loaded in a bin by hand while the staple mode is selected.

If only one sheet is delivered to the bin.
If the stack, slip sheet or interrupt modes are selected.
3. Under the following conditions, the manual stapling mode in sort mode is
prohibited.
If paper is loaded in a bin by hand while the sort mode is selected.

If the paper size in the bin does not match stapling specifications.
If only one sheet is delivered to the bin.
If smaller width paper is delivered on the bin later in "Mixed Sizes" mode.
If copies already stapled are left in the bin.
A175/A176/A177 8-22 SM
11.3 PUNCH MECHANISM
[C] [E]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[G]
[F]
The punch unit [A], which is installed in the copy transport path, makes
punched holes in every copy, when in the punch mode.
The punch drive motor [B] (stepping motor) drives the punch unit. At the
appropriate timing after the entrance sensor [C] detects trailing edge of the
copy paper, the punch drive motor rotates and the hole puncher [D] makes
holes of copy paper. The punch home position sensor [E] detects if the hole
puncher is in the home position.
The punch rubbish (waste) is collected into the punch collection cartridge [F].
When the punch rubbish (waste) overflow sensor [G] detects the overflow
condition, the machine indicates the condition in the operation panel after
punch job is finished.
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-23 A175/A176/A177
11.4 STAPLE UNIT PULLED-OUT MECHANISM
[C]
[B]
[D]
[A]
For easy staple cartridge replenishment, the staple unit can be pulled-out to
the front. When pulling out the R3 release grip [A] , the stopper is released
and the staple unit can be pulled out (staple unit pulled-out position).At this
position, the stopper arm[B] locks the staple unit by dropping the arm to the
edge of bracket [C].
When the staple unit is not pushed in completely (the staple unit is in the
position between the staple unit home position and staple unit pulled-out
position [D]), a message is displaying advising the user to set the staple unit
at the home position.
A175/A176/A177 8-24 SM
12. JAM DETECTION
Copier Exit
Sensor (1,250 ms)
280 pls
Entrance
ON Check
Sensor
Proof Exit
Sensor
Jam Sensor
*This is the jam checking timing for the 1st bin. 1 pulse ¢ 3.61 ms
Timing depends on the bins.
- Sorter Jams -
The sorter stapler main control board detects jams when the following
conditions are detected. In these cases, a jam signal is sent to the copier,
the copier stops the paper feed and indicates a sorter misfeed.
- Normal (Proof) mode -

J1: The entrance sensor has not turned on for the 1,250 ms after the copier
exit sensor turns on.
J2: The entrance sensor stays on for the appropriate number of pulses (for
example, 280 pulses for A4 sideways) or more.
J3: The proof exit sensor has not turned on for 300 pulses after the entrance
sensor turns on.
J4: The proof exit sensor stays on for the appropriate number of pulses (for
- In Sort/stack or Staple Mode -

J1 and J2: Same as the Normal mode.
J5: The jam sensor has not turned on for 600 pulses after the entrance
sensor turns on.
J6: The jam sensor stays on for the appropriate number of pulses (for
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
J7: The jam sensor turns on while the bin drive motor turns on.
(A606)
SM 8-25 A175/A176/A177
13. TIMING CHART
13.1 SORTER/STAPLER TIMING CHART (PROOF MODE)
Signal Timing Chart
Motor ON
Proof mode
Paper size
data
Exit signal
Sorter busy
S/S exit
signal
S/S main
motor ON
Entrance Sensor
Proof exit Sensor
A175/A176/A177 8-26 SM
13.2 SORTER/STAPLER TIMING CHART (STAPLE MODE)
Signal Timing Chart
Motor ON
Staple ON
Proof mode
Staple mode
Exit signal
Paper size data
Bin data
Sorter busy
S/S Exit signal
Proof count
Job complete
Entrance sensor
Jam sensor
Sorter exit motor

Sorter main motor 300 ms
Jogger motor
NOTE 1 NOTE 1
Staple unit
drive motor
NOTE 2
Grip motor
Grip HP sensor
Grip positioning
solenoid
Grip solenoid
Staple motor
Bin rear plate
drive motor
Bin drive motor
NOTE 3
NOTE: 1) Jogger motor on time differs depending on the paper size.

2) Staple unit drive motor on time differs depending on the paper size.
3) Bin drive motor on time differs depending on the number of copy
sets.
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-27 A175/A176/A177
14. SERVICE TABLES (MAIN CONTROL
BOARD)
14.1 DIP SWITCHES
DIP SW 100 0: OFF 1: ON
Function 1 2 3 4
Standard setting 0 0 ---- ----
Raises all bins to the top position. 1 0 0 0
Free run 0 1 0 0
2 Hole punch setting (Europe) ---- ---- 0 0
3 Hole punch setting (U.S.A.) ---- ---- 0 1
DIP SW 101 Vertical Staple Position Adjustment

DIP SW 102 Horizontal Staple Position Adjustment
Adjustment Value 1 2 3 4
Standard Position 0 0 0 ----
0.5 mm 1 0 0 0/1
1.0 mm 0 1 0 0/1
1.5 mm 1 1 0 0/1
2.0 mm 0 0 1 0/1
2.5 mm 1 0 1 0/1
3.0 mm 0 1 1 0/1
3.5 mm 1 1 1 0/1
-- direction (See the illustration below.) ---- ---- ---- 0
+ direction (See the illustration below.) ---- ---- ---- 1
NOTE: The adjustment value and the combination of the dip switch
positions are exactly the same on DIP SW 101 and DIP SW 102.
Feed Feed
direction direction
↑ + direction
↓ -- direction
+ direction -- direction
A175/A176/A177 8-28 SM
14.2 PUNCH POSITION
DPS 100 0: OFF 1: ON
Adjustment value 1 2 3 4
Standard (2 Holes) Feed
---- ---- 0 0
12 mm from trailing edge direction
Standard (3 Holes)
---- ---- 0 1
9.5 mm from trailing edge
14.3 TEST POINTS

Number Function
TP100 GND
TP101 +5V
14.4 FUSES
FUSES Connected Point Rated Current and Voltage
FUSE100 CN100-3 (+24 V) 250 V T5A
FUSE101 CN100-1 (+5 V) 250 V T2A
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-29 A175/A176/A177
15.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL
- Front side -
Remove the covers in the order as follows.
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
[F]
[E]
1. Remove the proof tray [A] (4 screws).

2. Open the front door.
3. Remove the front inner cover [B] (3 screws).
4. Remove the front wheel cover [C] (3 screws).
5. Remove the four screws fixing the front left cover [D] and remove the
front left cover by shifting the cover up to release the two hooks.
6. Remove the front lower cover [E] (3 screws).
7. Remove the front door [F] (2 hinge pins).
A175/A176/A177 8-30 SM
- Rear side -
[A]
[B]
1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws).

2. Remove the bottom plate [B] (2 screws and 1 hook).
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-31 A175/A176/A177
15.2 STAPLER REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION
[A] [B]
[F]
[D]
[E] [C]
1. Return the staple unit [A] to the home position by pulling out the staple
unit.
2. Pull out the R3 release lever [B] and pull out the staple unit.
3. Remove the harness cover [C].
4. Remove the staple unit [D] (1 connector and 1 screw).
NOTE: When re-assembling the parts, hook the cut-out [E] to the shoulder
screw [F].
A175/A176/A177 8-32 SM
15.3 JOGGER PLATE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[A]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[D]
- Removal -
1. Remove the proof tray. (Refer to Exterior Cover Removal.)
2. Release the spring [A] of the upper jogger holder [B], then pull out the
jogger plate [C].
- Installation -
1. Insert the jogger plate through the upper holder [B].
2. Push down the jogger plate towards the lower holder [D].
3. Set the jogger plate in the lower holder [D].
4. Hook the spring [A] of the upper jogger holder to the stopper [E].
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-33 A175/A176/A177
15.4 BINS
- Removal -
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
1. Remove the rear cover.
2. Raise all bins to the highest position by turning on DIP SW100-1 on the
sorter main PCB then turn off the main switch of the copier.
3. Remove the jogger plate (refer to Jogger Plate Removal) then move the
upper jogger holder [A] to the front side.
4. Remove the rear cover then remove the bottom plate to access the drive
belt. (Refer to Exterior Cover Removal section.)
5. Manually rotate the helical wheel drive belt [B] and move up the top
guide [C] until the three guide pins [D] reach the top of the helical wheel
as shown.
A175/A176/A177 8-34 SM
[B] [D]
[A] [C]
[F]
[H]
[E]
[G]
6. Remove the top guide by releasing the pins [A] and [B] from cut-outs [C]
and [D] at the end of the bin guide slots. Then remove the pins [E] and
[F] from cut-outs [G] and [H].
7. Move up the next bin to the top position by manually rotating the helical
wheel drive belt and remove it as in the top guide removal procedure
(step 5 and 6).
8. Remove the other nineteen bins by repeating step 7.
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-35 A175/A176/A177
- Installation -
[C] [A]
[F]
[E]
[H]
[G]
[B]
[E]
[D]
[J]
[I]
1. While holding the bin rear plate [A] straight, insert rear right guide pin [B]
to the slot [C], then lower the rear guide pin to the corner [D].
2. While still holding the bin rear plate straight, insert the front right guide
pin [E] to guide slot [F].
3. Insert the other guide pins [G] and [H] to the slots [I] and [J].
A175/A176/A177 8-36 SM
[A]
4. Manually rotate the helical wheel drive belt [A] and lower the bin.
NOTE: Before installing the next bin, rotate the helical wheels only once.
Otherwise, the distance between the guide pins [B] become
uneven and the bin tilts
[B]
Good No good
5. Set all bins and the top cover by repeating steps 1 to 4.
6. Re-install the jogger plate and all covers.
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-37 A175/A176/A177
15.5 MAIN MOTOR REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
1. Remove the rear cover (4 screws).

2. Disconnect the connector [A].
3. Remove the main motor bracket [B] (3 screws) with the main motor.
A175/A176/A177 8-38 SM
15.6 GRIP ASSEMBLY REMOVAL, AND GRIP SOLENOID
AND GRIP POSITIONING SOLENOID ADJUSTMENT
[A] [B]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[C]
[D]
- Grip assembly removal -

1. Open the front cover then remove the front inner cover. (Refer to Exterior
Cover Removal.)
2. Remove the grip assembly [A] (4 connectors, 3 screws).
3. Replace the grip solenoid [B] and the grip arm positioning solenoid [C].
- Grip solenoid [B] and the grip arm positioning solenoid [C]
adjustments -
It is impossible to perform the fine positioning adjustments for both solenoids
because magnets in both solenoids pull the plunger very strongly.
So, mark the original position of each solenoid and remove it. Then place the
solenoid at the original position by referring to the mark you made [D] and
tighten the screws (4 screws for the grip solenoid and 3 screws for the grip
arm positioning solenoid).
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-39 A175/A176/A177
15.7 MAIN CONTROL BOARD REPLACEMENT
[A]
1. Remove the rear cover (refer to Exterior Cover Removal) then

disconnect all connectors (17 connectors and 1 fiber optics connector).
2. Remove the main control board [A] (6 studs).
3. Install the new main control board and set all connectors.
4. Position DIP SW 100, 101 and 102 as on the original main control board
(DIP SW 101 and 102 are for staple position adjustment and DIP SW
100 is for SP mode).
5. Turn on the copier main switch then confirm the staple position. If
incorrect, adjust the staple position. (Refer to the Staple Position
Adjustment.)
A175/A176/A177 8-40 SM
15.8 GRIP MOTOR REMOVAL
[A]
1. Remove the grip assembly.

2. Remove the grip motor [A] (4 screws and 2 allen screws).
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-41 A175/A176/A177
15.9 STAPLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT & PUNCH POSITION
ADJUSTMENT STANDARD
Staple Position: a = 6 ± 3 mm
b = 6 ± 3 mm
c = 6 ± 3 mm
a d = 66 ± 3 mm
e = 132 ± 2 mm
θ = 45 ± 5°
c
d [A]
e
[B]
b
θ [C]
[D]
Punch Position: 2 Holes (European version)

a = 12 ± 3 mm
b = 40 ± 3 mm
c = 80 ± 1 mm
a
3 Holes (U.S.A. version)
a = 9.5 (3/8") ± 3 mm
φ c = 216 (81/2") ± 1 mm
d = 108 (41/4") ± 1 mm
d b 66 ± 3 mm
d’ = ± 3 mm
c
d’ Punch Hole Size:
2 Holes: φ = 6. 5 ± 0. 5 mm
3 Holes: φ = 8. 0 ± 0. 5 mm
A175/A176/A177 8-42 SM
ADJUSTMENT
Both the vertical and the horizontal staple positions are adjustable as follows:
a. Press the clear modes key.
b. Enter 107.
c. Press and hold the clear/stop key for three seconds.
2. Touch the "SP Adjustment" key.

3. Touch the Prev. key [A] four times to access page 13.
4. Adjust the vertical staple position by touching the , keys
[B] and the horizontal staple position by touching
the , keys [C].
NOTE: 0.5 mm/step
5. Adjust the punch position by touching the , keys [D]
(vertical position only).
NOTE: 1 mm/step
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-43 A175/A176/A177
15.10 HELICAL WHEELS
- Removal -
Before removing the helical wheels, remove all bins and all exterior covers.
(Refer to Exterior Cover and Bins Removal.)
- Front Helical wheel -
[A]
[F]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D] [D]
[E]
1. Remove the bracket [A] (4 screws).

2. Remove the wheel sensor bracket [B] (1 screw).
3. Unhook the two springs [C].
4. Loosen the two Allen screws [D].
5. While holding the pulley [E] to keep it in position, remove the helical
wheel [F].
A175/A176/A177 8-44 SM
- Rear Long Helical Wheel -
[A]
[D]
[D]
[C]
[B]
1. Remove the bracket [A] (3 screws).

2. Loosen the two Allen screws [B] on the drive pulley.
3. While holding the pulley [C] to keep it in position, remove the helical
wheel [D].
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-45 A175/A176/A177
- Installation -
NOTE: After installing the helical wheels, perform the helical wheels
alignment which is explained later.
- Rear Long Helical Wheel -
[B]
[A]
[C] [E]
[D]
0.4 mm
[B]
[F]
1. Place the bearing [A] on the notch on the bottom plate.

2. Set the helical wheel [B] into the pulley [C] then set the helical wheel on
the bearing [A].
3. Set the bracket with the bushing [D] on top of the helical wheel then
install and slightly tighten three screws [E].
4. Place a 0.4 mm thickness gauge [F] between the helical wheel [B] and
the bushing [D] on the bracket. While holding the bushing down to the
helical wheel, tighten the three screws [E].
A175/A176/A177 8-46 SM
- Front Helical Wheel -
[J] [K]
[F]
[G] [H] [K]

[O]
[H] [L]
[E]
[A]
[B] [D]
[N]
[M]
[I]
[P] [I]
1. Place the bearing [A] on the notch [B] on the bottom plate then set timing
belt-300XL [D] around the pulley.
2. Set the pulley [E] on the bearing. The direction of the pulley should be as
shown in the illustration.
3. Slide the wheel sensor actuator [F] onto the helical wheel. Leave the
Allen screw [G] loosened.
4. Set the helical wheel [H] in the pulley [E]. Leave the Allen screws [I]
loosened.
5. Set the bracket with a bushing [J] on top of the helical wheels then install
and slightly tighten the four screws [K].
6. Place a 0.4 mm thickness gauge [L] between the helical wheel and the
bushing on the bracket. While holding the bushing down to the helical
wheel [H], tighten the four screws [K].
7. Hook tension springs [M] and [N] then tighten the screw [O].
8. Install the wheel sensor bracket [P].
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-47 A175/A176/A177
- Alignment of the 2 Helical Wheels -
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[C] [E]
G = 22.5 ± 0.5 mm
[G]
[F] F = 1.7 ± 0.5 mm
Front Rear
1. Confirm all belts are set correctly.

2. Align all holes [A] at the middle of the helical wheels at the center of the
bin guide slots [B], as shown.
3. In this condition, tighten all Allen screws [C] on the helical wheel drive
pulleys (2 Allen screws on each drive pulley).
4. In this condition, place the cut out [D] on the wheel sensor actuator under
the wheel sensor [E] then tighten the Allen screw on the wheel sensor
actuator.
5. Make sure that the gaps [F and G] between the base plates and the
pulleys are as shown in the illustration.
A175/A176/A177 8-48 SM
15.11 PUNCH UNIT REMOVAL
[B]
[C]
[A]
1. Open the front door.

2. Remove the knob [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the shoulder screw [B].
5. Remove the punch unit (2 screws and 3 connector).
NOTE: To prevent the punch unit from being distorted, re-assemble the
parts as follows:
a) Push in the punch unit and install the shoulder screw [B].
b) Install the 2 screws at the rear.
c) Install the connectors (3) at the rear.
d) Replace knob [A] (1 screw).
Sorter Stapler
ST28/ST28P
(A606)
SM 8-49 A175/A176/A177
SECTION 9
RECIRCULATING
DOCUMENT HANDLER
DH500 (A607)
1. SPECIFICATIONS
Original Size: Max A3, 11" x 17"
DH500 (A607)
Recirculating
Min A5 lengthwise, 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
Document
Handler
(No A5 Sideways, 8 1/2 x 5 1/2)
Original Weight: 52 ~ 104 g/m2 (14 ~ 28 lb) (ARF)
52 ~ 128 g/m2 (14 ~ 34 lb) (ADF)
Original Feed Mode: Automatic Feed (ADF)
Automatic Recycle Feed (ARF)
Original Capacity: Max 50 sheets (A4, 8 1/2" x 11")
Original Separation: Feed and Friction Belts system
Original Transport: One flat belt
Original Stop System: DC servo motor control system
Copying Speed: Same as copier’s copying speed
Number of Cycles Max 30 times
per Document:
Power Source: 24 V (from copier), 5 A
Power Consumption: 70 W
Dimensions: 685 x 516 x 132 millimeters
(W x D x H) (27.0 x 20.4 x 5.2 inches)
Weight: Approximately 18 kg (39.7 lb)
SM 9-1 A175/A176/A177
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13 12 11
1. Friction Belts 8. Exit Relay Belts

2. Feed Roller 9. Inverter Pawls
3. Original Gate 10. Inverter Roller
4. Pick-up Rollers 11. Transport Belt
5. Original Stacker 12. Pull-out Roller
6. Push-plate 13. Pulse Generator
7. Feed-out Rollers
A175/A176/A177 9-2 SM
3. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
DH500 (A607)
Recirculating
Document
Handler
Motors
Feed-in Motor Drives the feed-in system (pick-up
M1 rollers, feed roller, and pull-out roller). 3
(dc servo)
M2 Transport Belt Motor Drives the transport belt. (dc servo) 4
Inverter Motor Drives the inverter roller and the exit
M3 9
relay belts.
M4 Feed-out Motor Drives the feed-out unit. 15
M5 Friction Belt Motor Drives the friction belts 21
Solenoids
SOL1 Original Gate Solenoid Energizes to open the original gate. 22
Inverter Solenoid Energizes to invert the original when
SOL2 8
copying a two-sided original.
Push Plate Solenoid Energizes to push the stack of
SOL3 14
originals to the feed-in section.
Switches
Lift Switch Informs the copier CPU when the
SW1 RDH is lifted and also serves as the 7
jam reset switch for the RDH.
Sensors
Original Set Sensor Informs the copier CPU that originals
S1 have been placed and causes the 17
Insert Original indicator to go out.
Recycle Sensor Informs the CPU when the top original
S2 19
is fed from the original stacker.
Registration Sensor Sets original stop timing and
S3 17
measures the original’s length.
S4 Original Width Sensor Determines the width of the original. 20
Pulse Generator Sensor Generates the pulses used to
S5 1
measure the original’s length.
Inverter Sensor Sets original stop timing when in auto
S6 11
reverse mode.
S7 Feed-out Sensor Checks for original misfeeds. 13
One Turn Sensor Informs the CPU when the pick-up
S8 6
roller turns one rotation.
RDH Position Sensor Informs the CPU when the RDH is
being closed so that APS sensor can
S9 16
begin checking the original size.
Feed-out Unit Safety Detects if the feed-out unit is set

S10 Sensor correctly. 10
SM 9-3 A175/A176/A177
Feed-in Unit Safety Detects if the feed-in unit is set
S11 23
Sensor correctly.
Magnetic Clutch
CL1 Feed-in clutch Energizes to rotate the feed roller. 2
Printed Circuit Boards

PCB1 RDH Main PCB Controls all RDH functions. 12
Others
LED Indicator Panel LED Contains indicators for the operator. 5
A175/A176/A177 9-4 SM
4. BASIC OPERATION
4.1 ONE-SIDED ORIGINAL FEED
DH500 (A607)
Recirculating
Document
When an original is placed in the RDH, the Set Original indicator goes out
Handler
and the RDH informs the copier that originals have been set.
When the Start key is pressed, the copier CPU sends the feed-in signal to
the RDH. On receipt of this signal, the gate solenoid turns on, opening the
original gate. At the same time the push-plate solenoid and the feed-in motor
turn on. The push-plate and pick-up rollers move the entire stack of originals
to the feed position.
After that, the feed-in motor starts turning again. The bottom original is fed in
by the feed roller and the friction belts and delivered to the exposure glass
by the transport belt.
After a very short period, the second original is also fed in until its leading
edge reaches the registration sensor. This is in preparation for the next copy
cycle.
When the scanner reaches the return position, the copier CPU sends the
feed-out and the feed-in signals to the RDH in order to feed in the second
original. If the first original is A4/Letter size (sideways feed) or smaller, it is
not fed out as the next original is transported to the exposure glass. It is just
moved to the right side of the exposure glass. After completing the second
scan, the third original is fed in and the first original is fed out from the unit.
This continues until all originals have been copied.
The originals are stacked on the original table where they wait for the next
copy cycle.
4.2 TWO-SIDED ORIGINAL FEED

Unlike one-sided original feed, the back-side of the original must be copied
first to keep the originals and copies in correct order.
During original feed-in, the sequence is the same as for one-sided feed;
however, the RDH CPU also energizes the feed-out motor and the inverter
solenoid a short time after the original’s leading edge has passed the RDH
registration sensor. The transport belt motor continues to feed the original
until the inverter mechanism inverts the original for the back-side copying.
Then, the transport belt motor reverses to feed the original towards the
scale, and stops the original at the correct position on the exposure glass.
When the scanner reaches the return position, the copier CPU sends the
feed-out signal to the RDH CPU. The RDH then inverts the original in the
same way as for back-side copying.
SM 9-5 A175/A176/A177
5. FEED-IN DRIVE MECHANISM
[C]
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
The pick-up rollers [A], feed roller [B], and the pull-out rollers [C] are driven
by the feed-in motor [D] through the timing belt, the gears and the feed-in
clutch [E].
- Basic Operation -
The feed-in motor is a reversible dc motor. When the feed-in motor rotates
forward (counterclockwise), all the rollers turn in the original feed direction.
(The feed roller can rotate only when the feed-in clutch is on.)
When the feed-in motor reverses, the pick-up rollers stop. However, the feed
roller and the pull-out rollers continue turning in the same direction.
Feed-in Motor
Roller(s)
Forward Reverse
Pick-up On Off
Feed On/Off On/Off
Pull-out On On
(* Only when the feed-in clutch turns on, the feed roller rotates.)
A175/A176/A177 9-6 SM
DH500 (A607)
Recirculating
Document
Handler
[G]
[F]
[L]
[K]
[H] [I] [J]
When the Start Key is pressed, the feed-in motor starts turning
counterclockwise. Drive is transferred to the pick-up rollers through gears [E]
and [G] and to the feed-in clutch through gears [H] and [J]. The timing of the
feed roller rotation is controlled by the feed-in clutch [K].
Next, the feed-in motor reverses (clockwise). The pick-up rollers stop turning
due to the one-way bearing inside the gears [F] and [H]. However, the feed
roller continues turning in the same direction through gears [H], [I], [J], [L],
and the feed-in clutch.
Since the pull-out roller is installed on the shaft of gear [H], the pull-out roller
always turns in the original feed direction whenever the feed-in motor is
turned on.
SM 9-7 A175/A176/A177
6. ONE-TURN SENSOR
[B]
[A]
The one-turn sensor [A] is located at the rear end of the pick-up roller shaft.
It counts the rotations of the pick-up rollers.
Every 360o, the notch [B] in the one-turn disk returns to the one-turn sensor
and the sensor turns on.
When feeding an original, the RDH CPU monitors the rotation of the pick-up
rollers through this sensor. It always stops the rollers with their flat surfaces
facing up.
A175/A176/A177 9-8 SM
7. ORIGINAL SETTING FOR RECYCLE
DH500 (A607)
Recirculating
Document
Handler
[A]
[B]
When the Start Key is pressed, the original gate solenoid [A] is energized to
open the original gate. At the same time, the push plate solenoid [B] is
energized and the pick-up rollers start turning. The pick-up rollers and the
push plate move the entire stack of originals to the feed-in section.
At this time, the originals turn the recycle sensor on. After that, the originals
are fed one by one from the bottom of the stack. The recycle sensor stays on
until the last original is fed.
The copied originals are fed out from the feed-out unit onto the original
stacker where they wait for the next cycle.
When the last original is fed in from the feed-in section, the recycle sensor
turns off. This informs the RDH CPU that all the originals have been fed in
for the first set of copies.
Soon after the last original passes the recycle sensor, the original gate is
opened again and the push plate and the pick-up rollers move the stack of
originals to the feed-in section for the second cycle. This is the pre-stacking
cycle. However, the last few originals of the first cycle have not fed out yet,
at this moment. In order to set them on the pre-stacked originals, the original
gate, and the push plate are energized again after the last original is fed out.
This recycle system increases the total copy productivity to 55 cpm for A4, or
81/2"x11" originals (sideways feed and 100% reproduction ratio).
SM 9-9 A175/A176/A177
8. ORIGINAL FEED-IN
(1)
(2)
(3)
Soon after the entire stack of the originals are moved to the feed-in position
(1), the feed-in clutch and the friction belt motor turn on. The friction belt
motor rotates for 50 milliseconds counter to the direction of the feed roller
rotation to ensure the separation of the bottom original (2).
When the leading edge of the original reaches the registration sensor, the
feed-in clutch turns off and the feed-in motor reverses (3). From this time
onward, the pull-out rollers take over and feed the original to the transport
section.
The registration sensor also serves to measure the original length. The RDH
CPU determines the original size by counting how many pulses it receives
while the original passes the sensor.
The original width is checked by the original width sensor, which is located
next to the registration sensor.
The original stop position is determined by pulse count from the time the
original trailing edge passes the registration sensor.
A175/A176/A177 9-10 SM
9. ORIGINAL INVERSION MECHANISM
DH500 (A607)
Recirculating
Document
Handler
[C]
[B]
[E]
[A]
[D]
Two sided originals are inverted by the inverter rollers [A] and the inverter
pawls [B]. When the inverter solenoid [C] is energized, the inverter pawls are
opened and the original is inverted.
SM 9-11 A175/A176/A177
When the Start key is pressed, the two sided original is fed into the transport
section. The inverter solenoid is energized at the same time as the transport
belt motor and the friction belt motor turns on. (1)
When the trailing edge of the original passes the registration sensor, the
inverter motor [D] starts turning. (2)
The original passes over the exposure glass and goes into the inverter
section. Since the inverter pawls are already open at that time, the original is
inverted and directed back to the transport belt section. The transport belt
motor reverses 239 pulses after the leading edge of the original passes the
inverter sensor [E]. (3)
The transport belt then moves the original to the original scale.
The back side of the original is copied first.
After the back side is exposed, the transport belt motor and the inverter
solenoid turn on again. The original is moved to the inverter rollers and
inverted, and then moved back to the scale.
After the front side is exposed, the original is fed out of the RDH unit.
A175/A176/A177 9-12 SM
10. ORIGINAL FEED-OUT MECHANISM
DH500 (A607)
Recirculating
Document
Handler
[B]
[A]
[C]
When the RDH receives the feed-out signal from the copier, the transport
belt motor, the inverter motor, and the feed-out motor [A] start turning. Since
the inverter solenoid is off at this time, the inverter pawls are positioned to
direct the original to the exit relay belts [B]. The original is fed to the feed-out
unit by the exit relay belts and then fed out of the RDH unit.
The feed-out motor drops to half of its normal speed 100 milliseconds after
the original’s leading edge passes the feed-out sensor [C]. It stays at half
speed until 180 milliseconds after the original’s trailing edge passes the
feed-out sensor. This lower speed prevents uneven stacking of originals.
For B4/81/2" x 14" and larger originals, the feed-out motor changes its speed
280 milliseconds after the original’s leading edge passes the feed-out sensor.
SM 9-13 A175/A176/A177
11. ALTERNATE PAPER FEED
An alternate paper feed system is used when the RDH and Finisher are
installed.
This alternate paper feed system is a relatively efficient way to make two or
more two-sided copies from two or more one-sided originals when the copier
is equipped with an RDH.
When making two-sided copies, first of all, the even pages of the originals
placed on the RDH are copied to the paper from the paper tray. They are
then stored in the duplex tray. Then the originals are recirculated, the odd
pages of the originals are copied to the sheets stored in the duplex tray.
When making two or more sets of copies, the even pages of the recirculated
originals are copied and they are stored in the duplex tray. The odd pages of
the recirculated originals are copied to the sheets stored in the duplex tray.
There are many benefits for this system.
Reduced transport time:

Before performing the two-sided copy process, the one-sided copy which
has been stored in the duplex tray is fed onto a point near the registration
rollers simultaneously with other copy processes, thereby saving transport
time.
A175/A176/A177 9-14 SM
-- Operation --
(For example)
Two sets of two-sided copies are made from four one-sided originals.
DH500 (A607)
Recirculating
Document
Handler
1) When the start key is pressed the 4th and 2nd originals are scanned,
and the copies are stacked in the duplex tray. The 3rd and 1st originals
have only passed over the exposure glass [Fig 1].
2) The 4th original is scanned a second time and the copy is stacked in the
duplex tray.
Soon after this, the bottom copy in the duplex tray is fed until its leading
edge reaches the duplex exit sensor (standby position). This is in
preparation for the reverse side copying [Fig 2].
3) The 3rd original is scanned. The copy which has been in the stand-by
position is fed for copying the 3rd original and then fed out onto the copy
tray [Fig 3].
4) The 2nd original is scanned and then it is stacked in the duplex tray.
Soon after this, the bottom copy in the duplex tray is fed in preparation
for the reverse side copying [Fig 4].
5) The 1st original is scanned. The copy which has been in the stand-by
position is fed for copying the 1st original and then fed out onto the copy
tray [Fig 5].
6) The 4th original is fed in the scanner and it is fed out from the RDH
without exposing. After this, the bottom copy in the duplex tray is fed in
preparation for the reverse side copying [Fig 6].
7) The 3rd original is scanned. The copy which has been in the stand-by
position is fed for copying the 3rd original and then fed out to the exit tray
[Fig 6].
8) The 2nd original passes over the exposure glass. After this, the bottom
copy in the duplex tray is fed in preparation for the reverse side copying
[Fig 7].
9) The 1st original is scanned, the copy which has been in the stand-by
position is fed for copying the 1st original and then fed out onto the copy
tray [Fig 7].
SM 9-15 A175/A176/A177
<RDH> ① ❹
② ①
1
2 ③ ②
3 ④ ③
4
③
④
2 4 ④
2
4 2
4
4 4
<Duplex tray>
<Paper tray>
Fig 1 Fig 2 Fig 3
❸
❷
❹ ❶
❸
① ❷
❹
② ❸
③ ①
❹
4 ① ❸
② 2
③ ① ④
④ 4 ② ③ 2 ②
2 ④ 4
2 2 ④
Fig 4 Fig 5 Fig 6
3
4
❶ ❍: Recirculated
❷ ●: 3rd recirculated
❶ : Without exposing (for RDH)
❸ ②
① ④
③ 2
4 ②
Fig 7
A175/A176/A177 9-16 SM
12. ORIGINAL MISFEED SENSING
The copier CPU lights the original misfeed indicator if the previous original
DH500 (A607)
Recirculating
remains on the exposure glass after manual copying and RDH feed is
Document
Handler
attempted. When the RDH is lifted and the previous original is removed,
RDH copying is permitted.
12.1 One-sided original
If the registration sensor is not actuated within 750 milliseconds after the
feed-in motor starts turning, the Original Misfeed indicator lights (ON check).
If the registration sensor does not turn off within 640 milliseconds, the CPU
determines that there has been an original misfeed (OFF check).
If the inverter sensor is not actuated within 700 milliseconds after the inverter
motor starts turning (ON check) or if the inverter sensor does not turn off
within 850 milliseconds, the Original Misfeed indicator turns on.
If the feed-out sensor is not actuated within 700 milliseconds after the
inverter sensor turns off (ON check), or if the feed-out sensor does not turn
off within 1250 milliseconds, the Original Misfeed indicator lights (OFF
check).
SM 9-17 A175/A176/A177
12.2 Two-sided original
The ON/OFF check timing of the registration sensor is the same as in the
one-sided original mode.
For original inversion, if the inverter sensor is not actuated within 750
milliseconds after the inverter motor turns on (ON check) or if the inverter
sensor does not turn off within 700 milliseconds (OFF check), the Original
Misfeed indicator lights.
During original feed-out, ON/OFF checks are performed at both the inverter
sensor and the feed-out sensor at the same time as in the one-sided original
mode.
A175/A176/A177 9-18 SM
13. SERVICE TABLE
13.1 TEST POINT TABLE
DH500 (A607)
Recirculating
Document
Handler
Number Function
TP1 GND
13.2 FUSE TABLE (Main Board)

Number Rated Current
FU101 5A
13.3 LED TABLE

LED No. ON Status
LED 101 Motor speed is too high.
LED 102 Motor speed is low.
NOTE: While each motor is adjusted, if the motor speed is normal LED 101
and 102 light, if the motor speed is too high LED 101 lights, if the
motor speed is too low LED 102 lights.
SM 9-19 A175/A176/A177
13.4 DIP SWITCH TABLE
Factory Setting
DPS 102 DPS 101
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
After performing the following tests, these DIP switches should be returned
to the factory settings.
NOTE: U.S.A. version only DPS 101-1 on; "81/2 x 101/2" size can be
detected.
DPS 101-1 off; "8 x 10" side can be detected.
Motor Test
DPS 102 DPS 101
Description Note
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 0 0 0 Feed-in Motor
1
1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 Transport Belt Motor
0 0 1 0 Inverter Motor
2
0 0 0 1 Feed-out Motor
Note 1: When these DIP SW combinations are set. The motors start
rotating. While SW 101 is held down. The motor rotates in the
reverse direction.
Note 2: When these DIP SW combinations are set, the motors start rotating.
While SW 101 is held down, the motor rotates slowly.
Paper Feed
DPS 102 DPS 101
Description
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Feeds a sheet of paper
0 0 0 0
(Scale Registration)
0 1 0 1
Feeds a sheet of paper
0 1 0 0
(Timing Registration)
NOTE: With these DIP SW combinations, press SW 101 to feed a sheet of
paper. Press SW101 again to reverse the paper feed direction, then
press SW101 to feed out the paper sheet.
A175/A176/A177 9-20 SM
Clutch and Solenoid Test
DPS 102 DPS 101
Description
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
DH500 (A607)
Recirculating
Document
1 0 0 0 Push Plate Solenoid
Handler
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Feed-in Clutch
0 0 1 0 Inverter Solenoid
0 0 0 1 Original Gate Solenoid
NOTE: Press SW 101 to energize the clutches and solenoids.
Free Run Mode (With paper)

DPS 102 DPS 101
Description Note
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Single Operation
0 0 0 0
(Scale Registration, Single Side)
Single Operation 1
1 0 0 0
(Scale Registration, Double Side)
1 0 0 1
Single Operation
0 1 0 0
(Timing Registration, Single Side)
* * 0 1 Repeat Operation (Up to 30 sets)
2
* * 1 1 Repeat Operation (Limitless)
Note 1: With these DIP SW combinations, press SW 101 to start feeding
sheets from a paper stack in and out. Each sheet is fed once.
Note 2: With these DIP SW combinations, press SW 101 to feed paper in
and out continuously. (The same stack of sheets is fed in and out
repeatedly.)
Free Run (Without paper)

DPS 102 DPS 101
Description
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 Free Run
NOTE: With this DIP SW combination, press SW 101 to start RDH
operation without paper. Press SW 101 again to stop.
* Not Applicable
SM 9-21 A175/A176/A177
14.1 TRANSPORT BELT REPLACEMENT
[E]
[A]
[D]
[C]
[B]
1. Turn off the copier main switch and lift the RDH unit.
2. Open the transport belt unit [A] (2 screws).
3. Slide the belt tension plate [B] to the left (1 screw), then lower
the belt tension unit [C].
4. Replace the transport belt.
NOTE: The RDH belt has to be installed in the notch as shown [D].
The feed out unit [E] has to be opened when the transport belt
unit is reinstalled.
A175/A176/A177 9-22 SM
14.2 PAPER FEED ROLLER REMOVAL
DH500 (A607)
Recirculating
Document
Handler
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
[F]
[G]
[E]
1. Turn off the copier main switch, then remove the RDH front cover [A]
(remove 2 screws, loosen 3 screws [B]).
2. Open the feed-in unit [C].
4. Remove the paper guide mylar [D] (2 screws).
5. Loosen the feed-in unit release button holder pins [E], then slide the
holder to the front and remove the paper feed guide plate [F] (2 screws).
6. Remove the paper feed roller [G] (3 snap rings, 1 bearing, 2 pins, and 2
pull-out rollers).
NOTE: Be careful not to lose the pins.
SM 9-23 A175/A176/A177
14.3 FRICTION BELT REPLACEMENT
[B] [A]
[C]
1. Turn off the copier main switch, then open the paper feed unit [A].
2. Remove the paper guide plate [B] (2 screws).
3. Replace the 3 friction belts [C] (1 E-ring and 1 busing).
A175/A176/A177 9-24 SM
14.4 PAPER EXIT TRANSPORT BELT REMOVAL
[C]
DH500 (A607)
Recirculating
Document
Handler
[A]
[B]
[E]
[D]
[G]
Turn off the[F]copier main switch.

1.[H]
2. Remove the lower rear cover [A], rear cover [B] and the right side cover
[C] (2 screws).
3. Remove the inverter solenoid bracket [D] (2 screws).
4. Slide the paper exit unit all the way to the left.
5. Remove the 2 screws for the transport unit [E] , and open the exit unit.
Then remove the other 2 screws [F].
6. Carefully lift the front end of the transport unit [G], then remove the 4
paper exit transport belts [H].
NOTE: Reinstall the inverter solenoid bracket, after sliding the paper exit
unit all the way to the right.
SM 9-25 A175/A176/A177
14.5 RDH MAIN CONTROL BOARD REMOVAL
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
1. Turn off the copier main switch, then remove the rear cover.
2. Disconnect all connectors for the main control board and for the flexible
cable (8 connectors, 1 optics cable, 1 harness clamp).
3. Remove the LED bracket [A] (1 screw) and the flexible cable [B]
(2 screws).
4. Remove the main board cover [C] (2 screws).
5. Remove the main control board [D].
NOTE: After replacing the main control board, perform the leading edge
registration and the motor speed adjustments.
A175/A176/A177 9-26 SM
14.6 RDH LEADING EDGE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
DH500 (A607)
Recirculating
Document
Handler
NOTE: Before confirming the original registration, make sure that the main
frame registration is within specifications.
1. Confirm the original front side registration as follows:

1) Make a copy of the test chart in platen mode (A4/81/2" x 11",
sideways).
2) Make a copy of the test chart in RDH mode.
3) Compare the registration of the copy in platen mode with that in RDH
mode, and confirm that there is no more than a 1.0 mm difference.
4) If the difference is more than 1.0 mm, adjust the registration by using
the copier’s SP mode (SP Adjustment - PAGE 6).
5) Install the RDH rear cover.
SM 9-27 A175/A176/A177
[B]
[A]
0 ± 1 mm
2. Confirm the original reverse side registration as follows:

1) Make a copy of the test charts 2nd side in platen mode (A4/81/2" x 11",
sideways).
2) Make a copy of the test chart in RDH 2-sided mode.
3) Compare the registration of the copy in platen mode with that in RDH
2-sided mode, and confirm that there is no more than a 2.0 mm
difference.
4) Set DPS 101 and 102 on the main PCB as follows:
DPS 102 DPS 101
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
5) Set a test chart on the RDH, then press SW 101 to feed the test chart
through the RDH.
6) When the test chart stops on the exposure glass, then press SW 101
again to feed the test chart in the reverse direction.
7) Open the RDH slowly so that the test chart [A] does not move from the
stop position.
8) Confirm that the test chart has stopped at the correct position, 0 ± 1
mm from the scale edge (0 position) [B].
9) If the test chart did not stop at the correct position, adjust the
registration by using the copier’s SP mode (SP Adjustment - PAGE 6).
3. Turn all DPS SW’s off and turn off the main switch, then reassemble the
machine (DPS 101-1 setting is depend on customer’s request).
4. Check the operation of the RDH.
A175/A176/A177 9-28 SM
14.7 MOTOR SPEED CHECK & ADJUSTMENT
DH500 (A607)
Recirculating
Document
Handler
1. Remove the RDH rear cover (4 screws), and set DPS 101 and 102 as
follows:
DIP SW
DIP SW
DPS 102 DPS 101 Combination
Description
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 0 0 0 Feed-in Motor 1
1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 Transport Belt Motor 2
0 0 1 0 Inverter Motor 3
0 0 0 1 Feed-out Motor 4
SM 9-29 A175/A176/A177
2. Close the RDH.
NOTE: For the DIP SW combinations, refer to the table on the previous
page.
3. Set DIP SW 1 combination #1. The paper feed motor starts turning. Turn
VR 108 (Low) and 109 (High) until both LED 101 and 102 light.
4. Set DIP SW 1 combination #1. The paper feed motor reverses direction
while SW 101 is pressed (ON). Turn VR 2 until both LED 101 and 102
light.
5. Set DIP SW 1 combination #2. The transport belt motor starts. Turn VR
105 until both LED 101 and 102 light.
6. Set DIP SW 1 combination #3. The inverter motor starts turning. Turn VR
104 until both LED 101 and 102 light.
7. Set DIP SW 1 combination #4. The feed-out motor starts turning. Turn
VR 107 until both LED 101 and 102 light.
8. Check the operation of the RDH.
9. Turn all DIP SW’s off.
10. Reassemble the machine.
A175/A176/A177 9-30 SM
SECTION 10
FINISHER
SR900 (A608)
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Paper Size: Maximum: 11" x 17"/A3
Minimum: 51/2" x 81/2"/A6 sideways
Paper Weight: Standard copying/Stack mode
14 ~ 42 lb/52 ~ 157 g/m2
Staple mode
SR900 (A608)
17 ~ 20 lb/64 ~ 80 g/m2
Finisher
Paper Capacity: 1,500 sheets:
81/2" x 11"/A4 or smaller size (20 lb/80 g/m2)
1,000 sheets:
81/2" x 14"/B4 or larger size (20 lb/80 g/m2)
Stapler Capacity: 81/2" x 11"/A4 or smaller size (20 lb/80 g/m2):
from 2 to 50 sheets
81/2" x 14"/B4 or large size (20 lb/80 g/m2):
from 2 to 30 sheets
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge refile (5,000 pieces/cartridge)
Power Source: DC 24 V (from copier)
Power Consumption: 48.0 W (average)
Weight: 35 kg (77.1 lb)
Stapling Position:
(1 staple) (2 staples)
a
b
b
a a
a = 0.24" ± 0.12" (6 ± 3 mm) a = 0.24" ± 0.12" (6 ± 3 mm) a = 0.24" ± 0.12" (6 ± 3 mm)
b = 0.24" ± 0.12" (6 ± 3 mm) b = 0.24" ± 0.12" (6 ± 3 mm) b = 5.20" ± 0.8" (132 ± 2 mm)
Dimensions: 26.5" x 20.3" x 37.5"

(671 mm x 514 mm x 950 mm)
SM 10-1 A175/A176/A177
2 1 13 12
11
3
4
10
5 9
8
7
A608V501.img
1. Stack Height Sensor Feeler 8. Alignment Brush Roller

2. Shift Tray 9. Lower Transport Rollers
3. Shift Tray Positioning Roller 10. Entrance Rollers
4. Jogger Unit 11. Junction Gate
5. Positioning Roller 12. Upper Transport Rollers
6. Stack Feed-out Belt 13. Exit Rollers
7. Stapler Unit
A175/A176/A177 10-2 SM
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the Point to
Point (water proof paper) index numbers.

Motors
M1 Transport Drive Drives transport rollers. 21
SR900 (A608)
M2 Shift Tray Lift Moves the shift tray up or down. 25
Finisher
Exit Drive Drives the exit and shift tray
M3 27
positioning rollers.
M4 Stack Feed-out Drives the stack feed-out belt. 5
M5 Jogger Moves the jogger fences. 19
M6 Stapler Drive Moves the stapler unit. 17
M7 Shift Moves the shift tray side to side. 7
M8 Staple Drives the staple hammer. 13
Sensors
Entrance Detects copy paper entering into the
S1 26
finisher.
Jogger Unit Entrance Detects copy paper entering into the
S2 24
jogger unit.
S3 Jogger Unit Paper Detects copy paper in the jogger unit. 8
Stack Feed-out Belt HP Detects the home position of the
S4 9
stack feed-out belt.
S5 Jogger HP Detects the jogger home position. 18
S6 Exit Detects misfeeds in exit area. 3
Stack Height 1 Detects copy paper stack height in
S7 2
staple mode.
Stack Height 2 Detects copy paper stack height in
S8 1
sort/stack mode.
Shift Tray Lower Limit Detects the lower limit of the shift tray
S9 15
position.
Stapler Hammer HP Detects the staple hammer home
S10 14
position.
S11 Shift Tray Half-Turn Detects shift tray side-to-side position. 6
S12 Stapler Unit HP Detects the stapler unit home position. 10
Switches
Front Door Safety Cuts dc power when the front door is
SW1 22
(Switch) opened.
Shift Tray Upper Limit Detects the upper limit of the shift tray
SW2 4
(Switch) position.
Cartridge Set Detects whether a staple cartridge is
SW3 12
installed.
SW4 Staple End Detects staples in the cartridge 11
SM 10-3 A175/A176/A177
Solenoids
Positioning Roller Lowers the positioning roller in the
SOL1 20
jogger unit.
SOL2 Junction Gate Drives the junction gate. 23
PCBs
PCB1 Main Control Controls overall finisher operation. 16
A175/A176/A177 10-4 SM
1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
4 3 2 1
10
5 9
SR900 (A608)
Finisher
6
7 8
12 11
16
15
13 14
1. Exit Drive Motor 9. Shift Cam

2. Upper Transport Drive Belt 10. Exit Roller
3. Shift Tray Lift Motor 11. Stack Feed-out Motor
4. Transport Drive Motor 12. Jogger Motor
5. Transport Drive Belt 13. Stapler Drive Motor
6. Lower Transport Drive Motor 14. Stapler Drive Belt
7. Shift Tray Lift Belt 15. Jogger Drive Belt
8. Shift Motor 16. Stack Feed-out Belt
SM 10-5 A175/A176/A177
1.5 BASIC OPERATION
[B]
[A]
[F] [D]
[C]
[E]
After the copy is completed, the paper is directed to the finisher. If the
sort/stack mode is selected, the junction gate [A] directs the paper upwards
to transport it to the shift tray [B]. In these modes, the shift tray is shifted from
side to side to stagger and separate sets of copies. The amount of shift is
approximately 30 mm.
When the staple mode is selected, the junction gate directs the paper below
to transport the paper to the jogger unit [C]. Each time a copy is delivered to
the jogger unit, the positioning roller [D], the alignment brush roller [E], and
the jogger fences [F] square the stack of copies. After the final copy of the
set is squared, the set is stapled, and then delivered to the shift tray.
A175/A176/A177 10-6 SM
2. SECTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 PAPER DELIVERY SWITCHING
[A]
[B]
SR900 (A608)
Finisher
Sort/Stack Mode Staple Mode
Depending on the selected finishing mode, the copies are directed up or

down by the junction gate [A], is controlled by a solenoid.
(1) When the exit sensor of the copier is activated while in staple mode, the
solenoid [B] is energized. Then, the junction gate directs the copies down
to transport them to the jogger unit.
(2) When the exit sensor of the copier is activated while in the sort/stack
mode, the solenoid stays off. The junction gate directs the copies up to
deliver them to the shift tray.
SM 10-7 A175/A176/A177
2.2 SHIFT TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISM
[E] [D]
[F]
[A]
[B]
[J]
[J]
[H]
[I] [G]
[C]
The shift tray lift motor (a dc motor) [B] controls the vertical position of the
shift tray [A] through gears and timing belts [C]. When the main switch is
turned on, the tray is initialized at the upper position. The tray’s upper
position is detected when the shift tray pushes up actuator [D] until stack
height sensor 1 [E], is just unblocked and the actuator is now between the
two sensors [E] and [F].
During copying, the actuator [D] gradually rises as the copy stack grows, and
the actuator gradually moves towards stack height sensor 2 [F].
In sort/stack mode, if the actuator remains inside stack height sensor 2 [F]
for 4 s, the shift tray lift motor lowers the tray unit for 50 ms. In staple mode,
if the actuator leaves stack height sensor 1 for 4 s during a copy run, the
motor lowers the tray until stack height sensor 1 is actuated. This means the
tray lowers earlier in staple mode, to prevent problems caused by sudden
arrivals of stapled stacks of paper on the tray (stapling is done inside the
machine, and the stapled copy is fed out to the tray; the second copy may
suddenly exceed the space currently available on the tray).
For both modes, the shift tray will rise when the user takes the stack of paper
from the tray during copying.
When the tray reaches its lower limit, actuator [H] enters the lower limit
sensor [G], and copying stops. After copying ends and the machine stops,
the tray is raised to its uppermost position 4 s after the copies are removed.
The shift tray upper limit switch [I] prevents the drive gears from being
damaged if stack height sensor 2 fails. When the shift tray pushes up the
shift tray positioning roller [J], the switch cuts the power to the shift tray lift
motor.
A175/A176/A177 10-8 SM
2.3 SHIFT TRAY SIDE-TO-SIDE SHIFT MECHANISM
[B]
[C] [E]
[A]
SR900 (A608)
[D]
Finisher
[F]
[G]
[H]
In the sort/stack mode, the shift tray [A] moves from side to side to stagger
and separate sets of copies.
The horizontal position of the shift tray is controlled by the shift motor (dc
motor) [B] and the shift cam (helical cam) [C]. After one set of originals is
copied and delivered to the shift tray, the shift motor [B] starts rotating,
driving the shift cam through the timing belt. The pin [D] fixed to the shift tray
base plate [E] is positioned in the groove on the shift cam, creating the
side-to-side movement required to stagger copies.
When the shift cam rotates 180 degrees (when the tray is fully shifted.), the
plate [F] on the shift cam pushes the actuator [G] of the shift tray half-turn
sensor [H] and the shift motor stops. The next set of copies is then delivered.
The motor rotates repeating the same process and moving the tray back to
the previous position.
SM 10-9 A175/A176/A177
2.4 STAPLE UNIT PAPER POSITIONING
[C]
[B] [F]
[E]
[A]
[H]
[G]
[F]
[D] [C]
In the staple mode, copies are vertically and horizontally aligned in the
jogger unit before being stapled.
For horizontal paper alignment, the jogger motor [A] moves both the front
and the rear jogger fences [B] to align the copies.
For vertical paper alignment, the positioning roller [C] and the alignment
brush roller [D] push the copy against the stack stopper [E].
After the trailing edge of the copy passes the jogger unit entrance sensor [F],
the positioning roller solenoid [G] is energized for 280 ms pushing the
positioning roller into contact with the paper. The positioning roller rotates to
push the paper back and align the trailing edge of the paper against the
stack stopper. Both the positioning roller and the alignment brush roller are
driven by the transport drive motor through the timing belt [H].
A175/A176/A177 10-10 SM
2.5 JOGGER MOVEMENT
SR900 (A608)
Finisher
7 mm 2 mm
(1) [A] (2) [B] (3)
When the Start key is pressed, the copier sends the paper size information
to the finisher. In accordance with that data, the jogger motor (stepper motor)
starts rotating to position the front and rear jogger fences [A] 7 mm away
from the selected paper’s edges. (1)
After the trailing edge of the copy passes the jogger unit entrance sensor,
each jogger fence moves inward 5 mm. They stop 3 mm away from the
paper edges. (2)
Just after the positioning roller pushes the copy back, each jogger fence
moves inward 2 mm more so that the leaf spring [B] on the rear jogger fence
pushes the copy side edge slightly.
After a copy is stacked in the jogger tray, the jogger fences move back 7 mm
from the copy edge for the next copy.
SM 10-11 A175/A176/A177
2.6 STAPLER [A]
[E] [D]
[B]
[C]
[F]
[G]
[H]
[J]
The staple hammer [A] is driven by the stapler motor [B] via gears [C], two
eccentric cams [D], and two links [E].
When the aligned copies are brought to the stapling position by the
positioning roller, alignment brush roller and jogger fences, the stapler motor
starts. When the cams complete one rotation, the staple hammer home
position sensor [F] turns on, detecting the end of the stapling operation. The
stapler motor then stops.
There are two switches in the stapler unit. One is the staple end switch [G]
for detecting staple end conditions (it detects when there is only one sheet of
staples left in the cartridge). The other is the cartridge set switch [H] for
detecting whether a staple cartridge is installed.
When a staple end or no staple cartridge condition is detected, a message is
displayed advising the operator to install a staple cartridge. If this condition is
detected during a copy job, the indication will appear, but will not stop the
copy job in any way.
The staple cartridge has a clinch area [J], in which the jammed staples are
left. Operators can remove the jammed staples from the cartridge.
A175/A176/A177 10-12 SM
2.7 STAPLER UNIT SIDE-TO-SIDE MOVEMENT
[A]
SR900 (A608)
Finisher
[B]
[C]
Customers can select one of the following three different staple modes:
Staple 1: Top left
Staple 2: Bottom left
Staple 3: Top/Bottom left
The stapler drive motor [A] (stepper motor) moves the stapler unit [B] from
side to side. When the Start key is pressed, the stapler moves from its home
position to the staple position.
If staple mode 3 is selected, the stapler unit moves to the front staple
position first, then moves to the rear staple position. However, for the next
copy set, it staples in the reverse order; that is, at the rear side first and then
at the front.
After the job is completed, the stapler unit moves back to its home position.
(The stapler unit home position sensor [C] is actuated.)
SM 10-13 A175/A176/A177
2.8 FEED-OUT TO SHIFT TRAY
[E]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[B]
After being stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts rotating. The pawl [B]
on the lift belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up, and feeds it to the
shift tray. Approximately 0.6 second after the stack feed-out motor starts, the
motor stops for 400 ms. At this moment, the exit rollers catch the stapled
copies to feed them out to the shift tray. Then the motor rotates again until
the pawl actuates its home position sensor [D].
The exit drive motor starts rotating to drive the exit rollers [E] when the first
copy activates the entrance sensor. The exit drive motor speed is reduced
just before each copy paper is completely fed out. This is to ensure an even
copy stack.
A175/A176/A177 10-14 SM
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 TEST POINT TABLE (Main Board)
Number Function
TP100 GND
TP101 5V
TP102 24 V
SR900 (A608)
Finisher
3.2 FUSE TABLE
Number Rated Current Location
Fuse 100 5A Main PCB
3.3 LED TABLE

LED No. ON Status During Adjustment
LED 100 Stack feed-out motor speed is normal.
*NOTE: Adjust the speed of the stack feed-out motor by setting DIP SW
100/101 to Motor Test Mode (see below). Then adjust VR 100. If the
motor speed is either too high or too low, LED 100 will blink.
3.4 DIP SW TABLE

3.4.1 Factory Setting
DIP SW 100 DIP SW 101
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3.4.2 Motor Test Mode

Motor
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 Stack Feed-out Motor
After setting DIP SW 101-3, turn on switch 1, 2, and 4 of DIP SW 100 to start
the stack feed-out motor. Turn off 1, 2, and 4 of DIP SW 100 to stop the
motor.
SM 10-15 A175/A176/A177
3.4.3 Free Run Test Mode Without Paper
Test Type
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Shift tray mode
1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 Staple mode - Top left
1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 Staple mode - Bottom left
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 Staple mode - Top/Bottom left
Start the free run test mode by changing DIP SW 100 then DIP SW 101
to select the required test as shown in the table.
In shift tray mode, the finisher works as if 10 sets of 5 LT pages
are being sorted. The machine then initializes itself and repeats the
operation.
In staple mode, the finisher works as if 5 sets of 5 LT pages are being
stapled and delivered. The machine then initializes itself and repeats the
operation.
3.4.4 Off Line Test Mode

Mode
1 2 3 4 1 2 Copy Q’ty 3 4 Paper Size
1 1 0 0 Shift Tray Mode 0 0 2 sheets 0 0 A4 Sideways
1 0 0 1 Staple Mode (1) 1 0 10 sheets 1 0 A4 Length- wise
0 1 1 0 Staple Mode (2) 0 1 30 sheets 0 1 LT Sideways
0 1 0 1 Staple Mode (3) 1 1 50 sheets 1 1 LT Length- wise
Off line test mode starts when SW 100 appropriate settings of on the main
board are turned on, and stops when the settings of DIP SW 100 are turned
off to "0" is changed.
The operation of the finisher can be checked without the main copier.
A175/A176/A177 10-16 SM
3.4.5 Shift Tray Rise Mode
0: OFF 1: ON
DIP 100 DIP 101
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
In this mode, the shift tray moves to its uppermost position if the copy paper
stacked on the tray is removed while staple mode copying.
When the staple mode is used with the shift tray rise mode, the shift tray
SR900 (A608)
moves up and down slightly for each stapled copy set delivered to the tray.
Finisher
[A] OFF
ON
NOTE: In the stapling copy mode (unlike the sort copy mode), the machine
cannot detect if the copy stack on the tray is removed. This is
because the stack height sensor 1 [A] is always ON while in this
copy mode. To counter this, when the shift tray rise mode is
selected by turning on DIP switch 100-1 on the finisher main control
board, the shift tray slightly moves up just when the stapled copy is
delivered. At this time, if the stack height sensor 1 turns off, this
means that the tray is in the proper position. The tray moves down
soon and returns to the original position (until the sensor turns on
again). If the sensor remains ON, this means that the tray position is
too low. The tray continuously moves up until the sensor turns off
then moves down until the sensor turns on. In this mode the shift
tray motor frequently raises or lowers the shift tray to monitor the
paper height.
To reduce the load to the shift tray motor, this mode is not enabled
as the factory setting.
SM 10-17 A175/A176/A177
4.1 EXTERIOR REMOVAL
[G]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[D]
[H]
[I]
[J]
[I] [F] [E]
1. Remove the left upper cover [A] (2 screws).

2. Remove the upper cover [B] (3 screws).
3. Remove the upper door bracket [C] (1 screw) and remove the front door
[D].
4. Remove the lower front cover [E] (2 screws).
5. Remove the front shift cover [F] (2 screws).
6. Remove the rear cover [G] (6 screws).
7. Remove the shift tray [H] (4 screws).
8. Remove the front and rear tray cover [I] (1 screws at the front, 2 screws
at the rear).
9. Remove the left cover [J] (4 screws).
A175/A176/A177 10-18 SM
4.2 ALIGNMENT BRUSH ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[B]
SR900 (A608)
[A] [D]
Finisher
[C]
[H]
[I]
[J]
[I]
[E]
[F]
[G] [H]
[E]
[F]
1. Open the front door and slide out the jogger unit.
3. Loosen the screw [A] and flip the tension bracket [B] to release the
tension of the lower transport drive belt.
4. Remove the E-ring [C], slide out the pulley [D], remove 2 E-rings [E],
then remove 2 bushings [F].
NOTE: When reinstalling, the metal bushing goes at the front side.
5. Remove the alignment brush roller assembly [G].
6. Remove the 2 E-rings [H] and the brush rollers [I].
NOTE: Do not lose the link keys [J].
SM 10-19 A175/A176/A177
4.3 SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[E]
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C]
Stack Height Sensors

1. Remove the upper cover.
2. Remove the stack height sensor actuator [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the bracket [B] (1 screw, 2 connectors).
4. Replace stack height sensor 1 [C] and stack height sensor 2 [D].
NOTE: When reinstalling the bracket [B], align the edge of the bracket
with the stay [E].
A175/A176/A177 10-20 SM
4.4 POSITING ROLLER REPLACEMENT
SR900 (A608)
Finisher
[A]
1. Open the front door and slide out the jogger unit.
2. Remove the positioning roller [A] (1 clip).
SM 10-21 A175/A176/A177
4.5 BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT
[B]
[A]
[C]
1. Remove the rear cover and adjust the belt [A]
tension with tightener [a].
Remove the left upper cover, the upper cover,
the front door, and the front shift cover and the
front supporting cover (2 screws). Adjust the [A, B]
belt [B] with tightener [b].
Standard: 10 mm deflection at 180 ± 100 g

pressure.
[a, b]
2. Open the front door and slide out the

jogger unit. Adjust the belt [C] tension [C]
with tightener [c].
Standard: 3 mm deflection at 100 ± 30 g

pressure.
[c]
A175/A176/A177 10-22 SM
SR900 (A608)
Finisher
[D]
[d]
150 ± 40 g
3. Open the front door and slide out the jogger unit. Adjust the belt [D]
tension with tightener [d].
Standard: 8 mm deflection at 150 ± 40 g pressure.
SM 10-23 A175/A176/A177
SECTION 11
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
RT34 (A609)
1. SPECIFICATIONS
Copy Paper Size: A4 sideways

B5 Sideways
81/2" x 11" sideways
Copy Paper Weight: 64 ~ 105 g/m2 16~24 lb
Power Source: DC24 V, 5V (from the copier)
Power Consumption: 48 W
Dimensions (W x D x H ): 403 x 529 x 608 mm
(15.9" x 20.9" x 24.0")
Large Capacity
Weight: 19.8 kg (43.7 lb)
RT34 (A609)
Tray
Tray Capacity: 3,500 sheets (may vary slightly depending on
paper weight)
SM 11-1 A175/A176/A177
6
5
1. Bottom Plate
2. Tray Drive Belt
3. Separation Roller
4. Transport Rollers
5. Feed Roller
6. Pick-up Roller
A175/A176/A177 11-2 SM

Sensors
Paper End Informs the CPU that there is no
S1 L2
paper on the LCT bottom plate.
Paper Near End Informs the CPU that about 60 sheets
S2 of paper remain on the LCT bottom L3
plate.
S3 Paper Position Detects the paper position. L4
Tray Down Informs the CPU that the LCT bottom
S4 L6
plate is in the lowest position.
Feed Controls the paper feed clutch off-on
S5 timing and the pick-up solenoid off L9
Large Capacity
timing.
RT34 (A609)
S6 Lift Detects the correct paper feed height. L10
Tray
Switches
Feed Unit Cover Detects if the feed unit cover is open
SW1 or not. L1
Note: There are two sensors.
LCT Cover Detects if the LCT cover is open or
SW2 not. L7
Note: There are three sensors.
SW3 Tray Down Lowers the LCT bottom plate. L8
Motors
LCT Lifts and lowers the LCT bottom plate
M1 to bring paper to the feed position and L5
allow loading of the paper.
M2 Feed Drives all feed and transport rollers. L13
Others
Pick-up Controls the up-down movement of
SOL1 L11
the pick-up roller.
MC1 Feed Starts paper feed from the LCT. L12
SM 11-3 A175/A176/A177
4. MECHANICAL OPERATION
[G]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
The LCT uses an FRR feed system which uses three rollers.
The pick-up [A], separation [B] and feed [C] rollers are common with those of
the by-pass feed unit of the mainframe but different from those of the paper
feed stations in the paper tray unit.
The LCT feed motor [D] drives the pick-up, separation, feed, and transport
[E] rollers.
The pick-up and feed rollers rotate only when the LCT feed clutch [F]
activates.
Paper feeding starts when the LCT pick up solenoid [G] activates.
A175/A176/A177 11-4 SM
5. PAPER LIFT MECHANISM
[C]
[B]
[C]
[D]
Large Capacity
RT34 (A609)
[A]
Tray
[F]
[E]
The bottom plate [A] of the LCT is raised and lowered by the LCT motor [B]
and the drive belts [C]. When the main switch is on and the LCT cover is
closed, the pick-up solenoid [D] activates and the LCT motor [B] rotates
clockwise to raise the bottom plate until the top sheet pushes up the pick-up
roller [E]. When the lift sensor [F] is de-actuated, the copier CPU
de-activates the LCT motor [B] and the pick-up solenoid [D].
SM 11-5 A175/A176/A177
[C]
[A]
[B]
If the tray down switch [A] is pressed, or paper runs out, or a paper jam
occurs in the LCT, the LCT motor [B] rotates counterclockwise to lower the
bottom plate. However, it is not lowered all the way down at this time. When
the paper position sensor [C] activates, the LCT motor stops once. At this
point, the bottom plate (or the top sheet of paper) is positioned about 5 cm
below the top. This gives enough space for the customer to replenish about
500 sheets of paper.
If the tray down switch is then pressed again, the bottom plate moves down
and stops once again when the top sheet of paper just passes the paper
position sensor. In this way, the bottom plate is lowered 5 cm at each press
of the tray down switch. This allows the customer to replenish paper in
convenient amounts and at the same position.
By adding paper and pressing the tray down switch repeatedly, it is possible
to lower the bottom plate to its limit.
When the bottom plate lowers sufficiently the tray down sensor [D] will be
blocked. This informs the CPU that the LCT bottom plate is at the lowest
position.
A175/A176/A177 11-6 SM
6. PAPER END DETECTION
[A]
Large Capacity
RT34 (A609)
[B]
Tray
The paper end sensor [A] detects paper on the bottom plate. If there is paper
on the table, reflected light from the paper activates the paper end sensor.
When the paper runs out, the paper end sensor de-activates and informs the
copier CPU of the paper end condition.
The paper near end sensor [B] also detects the paper and the tray bottom
plate. If there is enough paper on the table, reflected light from the paper
activates the paper near end sensor.
If less than about 60 sheets of paper remain, the paper near end sensor
de-activates because the black colored bottom plate does not reflect the light
from the sensor LED. When the paper near end sensor is deactuated the
display for the LCT will change as shown below
If less than about 60 sheets of paper remain, the paper near end sensor
de-activates because the black colored bottom plate does not reflect the light
from the sensor LED. When the paper near end sensor is deactivated, the
display for the LCT will change as shown below:
81/2 x 11 81/2 x 11
SM 11-7 A175/A176/A177
7.1 PAPER FEED ROLLERS REPLACEMENT
[C]
[D]
[A]
[A]
1. Open the top cover [A].

2. Remove the pick-up roller [B] (1 snap ring).
3. Remove the feed roller [C] (1 snap ring).
4. Remove the separation roller [D] (1 snap ring).
NOTE: Do not touch the surface of the rollers with oily hands.
The paper feed rollers used in the LCT are different from rollers
used in the 1st ~ 3rd feed units in the paper tray unit.
A175/A176/A177 11-8 SM
7.2 LCT FEED CLUTCH REMOVAL
[A]
[F]
[C]
[B]
Large Capacity
RT34 (A609)
Tray
[E]
[D]
[B]
1. Remove the rear upper cover [A] (2 screws).

2. Disconnect the two connectors [B].
3. Remove the harness bracket [C] (2 screws).
4. Remove the bracket [D] with the LCT feed motor (3 screws).
5. Replace the LCT feed clutch [E] (2 Allen screws).
NOTE: When installing the LCT feed clutch, set the stopper pin on the
clutch in the cut-out [F] on the bracket.
SM 11-9 A175/A176/A177
7.3 UPPER COVER SWITCHES
[A]
[B]
[C]
❶
❺
❹
❸
❷
1. Remove the right cover [A].
2. Remove the front cover [B].
3. Remove the upper cover switches [C].
NOTE: When installing the switches, set the connectors correctly.
❶ Yellow
❷ Blue
❸ Green
❹ Small white
❺ Large white
A175/A176/A177 11-10 SM
7.4 SIDE-TO-SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
[B]
Large Capacity
RT34 (A609)
Tray
[A]
- Rough Adjustment -
1. Loosen the two screws [A] fixing the stay [B].
2. Move the stay position to change the side-to-side paper position.
- Fine Adjustment -
access the side to side adjustment mode ( SP Adjustment - PAGE
4).
2. Adjust side to side registration by changing the SP mode data.
NOTE: Copies can be made in SP mode. Touch the "Copy in SP" key to
Adjustment standard: less than ±2 mm difference between the original and
the copy.
SM 11-11 A175/A176/A177
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN
CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP
BULLETIN NUMBER: 7650/7660/7670 - 001 11/18/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FT7650/7660/7670
COPY QUALITY
Note: This copy intended as master of original
SUBJECT: LIGHT COPIES, LOW TONER DENSITY

for reproduction of additional bulletins.
SYMPTOM:
Light copies, insufficient amount of toner supplied when making consecutive copies of high densityriginals.
o
MECHANICAL
NOTE: This symptom will not occur when making normal image density copies.
CAUSE:
The software was changed so that the toner supply time was reduced by one half to correct a "dirty
background" issue which surfaced in the Japanese market for the FT6645/6655/6665 copiers. Although the
ELECTRICAL
United States market has not experienced the "dirty background" problem, the software change was
incorporated into the FT7650/7660/7670 copiers.
SOLUTION:
PAPER PATH
For customers that make a large amount of consecutive copies with high density, change the settingfoSP
Adjustment 1, page 7, Factory Use-T from [N] to [H] at time of installation. By changing the settin
g to [H],
the toner supply percentage will be the same as the [N] setting on the FT6645/6655/6665 copiers.
FSM
PARTS
OTHER
BULLETIN NUMBER: 7650/7660/7670 - 002 12/13/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: 7650/7660/7670
COPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: THERMISTOR FAILURE (SC546 OR SC548)

SYMPTOM:
The mylar "film" portion of the Thermistor falls off resulting in either SC546 or SC548.
MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
An excessive amount of oil was applied to the Hot Roller during the manufacturing process which
contaminated the Thermistor causing the mylar film to separate from the Thermistor.
ELECTRICAL
SOLUTION:
Replace the Thermistor (A1764221) at installation (for units affected) or next service visit.
PAPER PATH
ORDERING PROCEDURE:
One Thermistor (A1764221) will be automatically shipped for each FT7650/7660/7670 in the field based
on
Ricoh’s Equipment Shipped Records.
NOTE: The Thermistor part number has not changed.
PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE:
SM
Oil is no longer applied during the manufacturing process. All units shipped after 12/10/96 have bee
n
modified to address this issue.
PARTS
OTHER
BULLETIN NUMBER: 7650/7660/7670 - 003 01/16/97

COPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

GENERAL:
The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bulletinackage
p
contains 1 set of replacement pages.
MECHANICAL
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒
• 2-37 Updated Information
ELECTRICAL
SMPAPER PATH
PARTS
OTHER
BULLETIN NUMBER: 7650/7660/7670 - 004 01/16/97

COPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: INNER INVERTER GUIDE WARPAGE

SYMPTOM:
All of the following symptoms relate to the Duplex Unit:
• excessive paper curl
MECHANICAL
Inner Inverter Guide (A0964434)
• poor paper stacking
• duplex entrance paper jams
• duplex exit paper jams
ELECTRICAL
Inner Inverter Guide Drawer Tray Magnet
(A0964434) (AA020001)
O.K. Inverter Guides (side view) N.G.
Outer Inverter Guide

(A0964457)
Outer Inverter Guide
(A0964457)
SM
To verify proper alignment, remove the
Inverter Unit and insert a strip of paper
on each end of the Inverter Guides as
shown above. There should be an even
amount of "pull" on both strips.
PARTS
CAUSE:
Poor contact between the Inner Inverter Guide (A0964434) and the Outer Inverter Guide (A0964457). here
T
should be no gap between the Drawer Tray Magnets and the Outer Inverter Guide.
SOLUTION:
OTHER
Reform or replace the Inner Inverter Guide (A0964434) to ensure the proper contact between the Outer
Inverter Guide and the Drawer Tray Magnets.
BULLETIN NUMBER: 7650/7660/7670 - 005 04/14/97

nCOPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: OIL MARKS ON FIRST COPY

SYMPTOM:
A smeared image appears on the leading edge at about 10 mm on the 1st copy at machine installation.
q MECHANICAL
CAUSE:
Silicon oil may soak into the surface of the Hot Roller during machine storage. The silicon oil may
stick to the
surface of the Pressure Roller when the Hot Roller was is in contact with the Pressure Roller at ins
tallation.
The Pressure Roller may slip due to the oil because the Hot and Pressure Rollers are new. Therefore, a
smeared image may appear on the leading edge at about 10 mm on the 1st copy. This is because the Hot
Roller is rubbing the leading edge of the copy against the Pressure Roller.
q ELECTRICAL
SOLUTION:
This symptom occurs only at the 1st copy after installation. Make sample copies and make sure thathet
symptom does not re-occurred after several copies.
q PAPER PATH
SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
p
PAGES:
q
FSM
q
q PARTS
OTHER
BULLETIN NUMBER: 7650/7660/7670 - 006 05/06/97

qCOPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

GENERAL:
q MECHANICAL
p
PAGES:
q ELECTRICAL
q
n
q
q SMPAPER PATH
PARTS
OTHER
BULLETIN NUMBER: 7650/7660/7670 - 007 05/06/97

qCOPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: MAGNETIC CLUTCH STOPPER

GENERAL:
To prevent breakage, the shape of the Magnetic Clutch Stopper has been changed. This information sho
uld
q MECHANICAL
be incorporated into all existing FT6645/6655/6665 Parts Catalog documentation.
q
q ELECTRICAL
PAPER PATH
Stopper
OLD NEW
q FSM
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM
A0962604 A0962616 Magnetic Clutch Stopper 1→1 1 57 13
n
UNITS AFFECTED:
PARTS
All FT7650/7660/7670 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A703609XXXX, A704609XXXX and
A710609XXXX respectively will have the new style Magnetic Clutch Stopper installed during production
.
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
q
0 NEW machines. 2 OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OTHER
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured aft
er the S/N cut-in or
3/S previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
BULLETIN NUMBER: 7650/7660/7670 - 008 05/06/97

q
COPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: SC361 / UPPER DRUM SHIELD

SYMPTOM:
SC361
CAUSE:
When the drum reverses rotation, the Upper Shield (seal) may wrap around the drum. If this shouldccur,
o
SC361 will be recorded in the SP Data (SC Count).
SOLUTION:
To prevent this from occurring, the length of the Upper Drum Shield (seal) has been reduced by 4mm.
q PAPER PATH
REFERENCE
A0962302 A0962304 Upper Drum Shield 1→1 1 61 43
q FSM
UNITS AFFECTED:
Not available at time of publication.
n PARTS
1 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
q

OTHER
BULLETIN NUMBER: 7650/7660/7670 - 009 06/13/97

APPLICABLE MODEL: FT7650/7660/7670/Aficio 5106/5206
qCOPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES

• UPDATE NO. 1 - PLATEN COVER HARNESS - To facilitate assembly, the function of the Platen
Cover Harness has been combined with the Outer Optics Harness.
q MECHANICAL
REFERENCE
A0965474 Platen Cover Harness 1-0 21 14
1
A0975473 Outer Optics Harness 1-0 35 29
q
A1755473 Outer Optics Harness 0-1 35 29
ELECTRICAL
UNITS AFFECTED:
A710612XXXX respectively will have the new style Outer Optics Harness installed during production.
q
•
PAPER PATH
UPDATE NO. 2 - CLEANING BLADE SPRING - To improve the cleaning ability for the Transfer
Belt, the pressure of the Cleaning Blade Spring has been increased.
NOTE: To prevent the Cleaning Blade from wrapping around the Transfer Belt, please apply plenty of
setting powder or toner on the edge of the new blade at installation.
REFERENCE
q
FSM
AA066239 AA066290 Cleaning Blade Spring 1-1 1 71 38
UNITS AFFECTED:
n
A710702XXXX respectively will have the new style Cleaning Blade Spring installed during production.
PARTS
1 3
q
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
OTHER
Continued...
Tech Service Bulletin No. 7650/7660/7670 - 009
Page 2 of 3
• UPDATE NO. 3 - POSITION SENSOR BRACKET - Curled paper may be misfed due to delayed
detection by the Position Sensor. To correct this, the production machines have
been modified as follows:
1. The configuration of the Position Sensor Bracket has been changed. The height of the Position
Sensor has been raised by 1mm.
2. The notch holes (A) for the Separation Guide and the Paper Feed Guide Position Sensor have been
enlarged.
NOTE: When installing the new Position Sensor Bracket, you must also replace the Separation
Guide and the Paper Feed Guide if the Feeler comes in contact with the Position Sensor Bracket.
3. A retaining ring has been added to decrease the play in the thrust direction.
4. Due to Part Standardization, the Part Number for the Separation Roller Stay has been changed.
Paper Feed Guide
REFERENCE
A0966321 A1766321 Position Sensor Bracket 1-1 1 51 14
07200040B Retaining Ring - M4 n-n+1 51 106
A0966338 A1766338 Separation Guide 1-1 1 51 29
A0966337 A1766337 Paper Feed Guide 1-1 1 51 32
A0966303 A1766303 Separation Roller Stay 1-1 0 51 12
UNITS AFFECTED:
A710701XXXX respectively will have the new style parts listed above installed during production.
Continued...
Tech Service Bulletin No. 7650/7660/7670 - 009
Page 3 of 3
• UPDATE NO. 4 - PARTS CATALOG CORRECTION - Correct your Parts Catalog as follows:
1. Incorrect Listing
The following part was listed in the FT7650/7660/7670 Parts Catalog by mistake. The doctor plate
(positioning plate) cannot be installed in the field. Please delete the following part from the Par
ts
Catalog.
REFERENCE
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM
AD030042 Positioning Plate - 69 17
2. Part Number Correction

Correct the part number in your parts catalog as follows:
REFERENCE
INCORRECT CORRECT DESCRIPTION PAGE ITEM
PART NO. PART NO.
A0975794 A0795794 Push Switch 47 20
• UPDATE NO. 5 - ROLLER GUIDE MYLAR -

To improve the reliability of
81/2 X 11 inch duplex paper
feeding, the Roller Guide
Mylars have been added.
NOTE:
This modification applies to
the FT7650 model only.
REFERENCE
AA150374 Roller Guide Mylar 0-3 85 43
A0974502 Duplex Unit 1-0 81 *
A0974502 Duplex Unit (FT7660, FT7670) 0-1 81 *
A1754502 Duplex Unit (FT7650) 0-1 81 *
UNITS AFFECTED:
All FT7650 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A703611XXXX will have the Roller Guide Mylars
installed during production.

7650 SM PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7650 SM PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

(A175/A176/A177)

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

A4/A3 Version LT/LDG Version

Copier only Full system*

Copier only Full system*

Copier only Full system*

Weight: Copier only: (Without the optional platen cover

Zoom: From 50% to 200% in 1% steps

Warm-up Time: Less than 5 minutes (20°C) (A175 copier)

First Copy Time: 3.1 seconds (A175 copier)

Copy Number Input: Number keys, 1 to 999 (count up or count down)

Toner Replenishment: 1,100 g/cartridge, Yield 38K/cartridge 6% original

FT7650 (A175) copier

FT7660/7670 (A176/A177) copiers

Floor type 3,500-sheets

Recirculating document handler (DH500)

1) The threshold level if toner is attracted to the drum or toner remains on

❶ Main Motor 1. OPC Drum

❽ BY-Pass Feed Clutch 8. Paper Feed Units

❾ Development Drive Motor 9. Toner Hopper

LCT Motor Lifts and lowers the LCT bottom plate

Optic Cooling Fan-2 Remove heat from the optic unit.

Duplex Cooling Fan Cools the paper on the duplex tray to

2nd Pick-up Controls the up-down movement of

2nd Separation Roller Controls the up-down movement of

3rd Pick-up Controls the up-down movement of

Exit Detects misfeeds.

3rd Paper End Informs the CPU when the 3rd

2nd Paper Feed Controls the 2nd paper feed clutch

Paper Feed Control Controls all components in the paper

Image Density Control ADS Pattern

Original Exposure Glass

Latent image Lamp Voltage

Charge Control Grid Voltage

Toner Supply On time

Image Density Control

Toner Supply Control

Image density is controlled by the following sensors:

Main SW On (Fusing Temp. < 100°C)

Drum Potential Sensor Calibration

Transfer belt voltage detection

① : See Latent Image Control section

1.3.3 VSG Adjustment

After many copies

Dark Original Density Light

Dark Original Density Light

for the purpose

1. Potential sensor calibration

Development bias is also decided by using VR as follows.

A: VOUT (Gain data) is high.

<Toner Density Sensor Initial Setting>

<Toner Supply Criteria>

VTD ≥ VREF: Add more toner

By referring to these factors, the machine recognizes the difference between

V SP Detection VSP Detection VSP Detection

2nd Series 3rd Series

VSG is detected every time the machine starts copying.

While developing the ID sensor pattern, ID sensor bias is applied. ID sensor

<VREF correction timing>

1. OPC Drum 9. Cleaning Brush